Deployment Guide

ManualsBrandsDell ManualsAccess PlatformsOS9

Dell Configuration Guide for the S6000–ON

System

9.14.2.8

September 2020

Rev. A00

Summary of content (1130 pages)

PAGE 1
Dell Configuration Guide for the S6000–ON System 9.14.2.8 September 2020 Rev.
PAGE 2
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. © 2020 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries.
PAGE 3
Contents Chapter 1: About this Guide.........................................................................................................32 Audience.............................................................................................................................................................................. 32 Conventions........................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 4
Allowing Access to Different Modes...................................................................................................................... 56 Applying a Privilege Level to a Username..............................................................................................................57 Applying a Privilege Level to a Terminal Line........................................................................................................57 Configuring Logging................................
PAGE 5
Configuring Critical VLAN .............................................................................................................................................. 88 Configuring Request Identity Re-Transmissions........................................................................................................88 Configuring a Quiet Period after a Failed Authentication..................................................................................89 Forcibly Authorizing or Unauthorizing a Port...
PAGE 6
Example of viewing IP mirror–access–group applied to an Interface.......................................................... 125 Chapter 7: Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD).................................................................126 How BFD Works...............................................................................................................................................................126 BFD Packet Format.......................................................................
PAGE 7
Enabling Graceful Restart........................................................................................................................................198 Redistributing Routes............................................................................................................................................... 199 Enabling Additional Paths........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 8
Priority-Based Flow Control................................................................................................................................... 239 Enhanced Transmission Selection.........................................................................................................................240 Data Center Bridging Exchange Protocol (DCBx).............................................................................................241 Data Center Bridging in a Traffic Flow.............
PAGE 9
Configure the System to be a DHCP Server............................................................................................................ 281 Configuring the Server for Automatic Address Allocation...............................................................................281 Specifying a Default Gateway................................................................................................................................282 Configure a Method of Hostname Resolution....................
PAGE 10
Ensure Robustness in a Converged Ethernet Network.........................................................................................305 FIP Snooping on Ethernet Bridges............................................................................................................................. 306 Using FIP Snooping........................................................................................................................................................ 308 FIP Snooping Prerequisites.......
PAGE 11
Configure a GARP Timer...............................................................................................................................................339 Chapter 18: Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)........................................................ 340 IGMP Protocol Overview.............................................................................................................................................. 340 IGMP Version 2..............................................
PAGE 12
Port Channel Benefits...............................................................................................................................................371 Port Channel Implementation..................................................................................................................................371 Interfaces in Port Channels....................................................................................................................................
PAGE 13
Configuring the Duration to Establish a TCP Connection.................................................................................... 405 Enabling Directed Broadcast........................................................................................................................................406 Resolution of Host Names............................................................................................................................................
PAGE 14
Configuring Telnet with IPv6................................................................................................................................. 430 SNMP over IPv6........................................................................................................................................................430 Displaying IPv6 Information....................................................................................................................................
PAGE 15
Leaks from One Level to Another......................................................................................................................... 464 Sample Configurations...................................................................................................................................................464 Chapter 24: Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)............................................................. 467 Introduction to Dynamic LAGs and LACP............................
PAGE 16
TIA-1057 (LLDP-MED) Overview............................................................................................................................... 498 TIA Organizationally Specific TLVs.......................................................................................................................499 Configure LLDP...............................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 17
MSDP Sample Configurations......................................................................................................................................539 Chapter 29: Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol.................................................................... 542 MLD timers.......................................................................................................................................................................545 Reducing Host Response Burstiness............
PAGE 18
Displaying MLD groups table........................................................................................................................................583 Displaying MLD Interfaces............................................................................................................................................ 584 MLD Snooping.................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 19
OSPF with Dell EMC Networking OS........................................................................................................................ 609 Graceful Restart........................................................................................................................................................609 Fast Convergence (OSPFv2, IPv4 Only)............................................................................................................. 610 Multi-Process OSPFv2 with VRF....
PAGE 20
Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains............................................................................................................657 Electing an RP using the BSR Mechanism................................................................................................................657 Chapter 38: PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM).................................................................. 659 Implementation Information..............................................................
PAGE 21
PVST+ in Multi-Vendor Networks.............................................................................................................................. 698 Enabling PVST+ Extend System ID............................................................................................................................ 698 PVST+ Sample Configurations....................................................................................................................................
PAGE 22
Chapter 44: Remote Monitoring (RMON)...................................................................................744 Implementation Information..........................................................................................................................................744 Fault Recovery.................................................................................................................................................................744 Setting the RMON Alarm....................
PAGE 23
Configuring When to Re-generate an SSH Key ................................................................................................792 Configuring the SSH Server Key Exchange Algorithm.....................................................................................792 Configuring the HMAC Algorithm for the SSH Server.................................................................................... 793 Configuring the HMAC Algorithm for the SSH Client............................................
PAGE 24
Setting Rate-Limit BPDUs...................................................................................................................................... 830 Debugging Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling................................................................................................................830 Provider Backbone Bridging..........................................................................................................................................831 Chapter 49: sFlow............
PAGE 25
MIB Support for Power Monitoring............................................................................................................................857 MIB Support to Display the Available Memory Size on Flash...............................................................................857 Viewing the Available Flash Memory Size...........................................................................................................
PAGE 26
View Details of Storm Control PFC...................................................................................................................... 888 Chapter 52: Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)............................................................................... 890 Protocol Overview..........................................................................................................................................................890 Configure Spanning Tree..................................
PAGE 27
Setting Daylight Saving Time Once.......................................................................................................................919 Setting Recurring Daylight Saving Time...............................................................................................................919 Chapter 55: Tunneling............................................................................................................... 921 Configuring a Tunnel..............................................
PAGE 28
VLT and Stacking......................................................................................................................................................953 VLT and IGMP Snooping......................................................................................................................................... 954 VLT IPv6......................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 29
Functional Overview of VXLAN Gateway............................................................................................................... 1020 VXLAN Frame Format..................................................................................................................................................1020 Limitations on VXLAN ..................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 30
VRRP Benefits............................................................................................................................................................... 1066 VRRP Implementation.................................................................................................................................................. 1066 VRRP Configuration.................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 31
Information about installing CA certificates............................................................................................................ 1125 Installing CA certificate...........................................................................................................................................1126 Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR)...................................................................... 1126 Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR).....
PAGE 32
1 About this Guide This guide describes the protocols and features the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) supports and provides configuration instructions and examples for implementing them. For complete information about all the CLI commands, see the Dell EMC Command Line Reference Guide for your system. The S6000–ON platform is available with Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.7(0.0) and beyond. Though this guide contains information about protocols, it is not intended to be a complete reference.
PAGE 33
2 Configuration Fundamentals The Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface you can use to configure interfaces and protocols. The CLI is largely the same for each platform except for some commands and command outputs. The CLI is structured in modes for security and management purposes. Different sets of commands are available in each mode, and you can limit user access to modes using privilege levels.
PAGE 34
● EXEC mode is the default mode and has a privilege level of 1, which is the most restricted level. Only a limited selection of commands is available, notably the show commands, which allow you to view system information. ● EXEC Privilege mode has commands to view configurations, clear counters, manage configuration files, run diagnostics, and enable or disable debug operations. The privilege level is 15, which is unrestricted.
PAGE 35
ROUTE-MAP ROUTER BGP BGP ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER ISIS ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFV3 ROUTER RIP SPANNING TREE SUPPORTASSIST TRACE-LIST VLT DOMAIN VRRP UPLINK STATE GROUP uBoot Navigating CLI Modes The Dell EMC Networking OS prompt changes to indicate the CLI mode. The following table lists the CLI mode, its prompt, and information about how to access and exit the CLI mode.
PAGE 36
Table 1.
PAGE 37
Table 1.
PAGE 38
-- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports -----------------------------------------------------------------------1 Management online S6000-ON S6000-ON 1-0(0-3932) 128 2 Member not present 3 Member not present 4 Member not present 5 Member not present 6 Member not present -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(rpm) -----------------------------------------------------------1 1 up AC absent 0 1 2 absent absent 0 -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed
PAGE 39
● Enter ? after a partial keyword lists all of the keywords that begin with the specified letters. DellEMC(conf)#cl? class-map clock DellEMC(conf)#cl ● Enter [space]? after a keyword lists all of the keywords that can follow the specified keyword. DellEMC(conf)#clock ? summer-time Configure summer (daylight savings) time timezone Configure time zone DellEMC(conf)#clock Entering and Editing Commands Notes for entering commands. ● The CLI is not case-sensitive. ● You can enter partial CLI keywords.
PAGE 40
Command History The Dell EMC Networking OS maintains a history of previously-entered commands for each mode. For example: ● When you are in EXEC mode, the UP and DOWN arrow keys display the previously-entered EXEC mode commands. ● When you are in CONFIGURATION mode, the UP or DOWN arrows keys recall the previously-entered CONFIGURATION mode commands.
PAGE 41
Multiple Users in Configuration Mode Dell EMC Networking OS notifies all users when there are multiple users logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. A warning message indicates the username, type of connection (console or VTY), and in the case of a VTY connection, the IP address of the terminal on which the connection was established.
PAGE 42
3 Getting Started This chapter describes how you start configuring your system. When you power up the chassis, the system performs a power-on self test (POST) and system then loads the Dell EMC Networking Operating System. Boot messages scroll up the terminal window during this process. No user interaction is required if the boot process proceeds without interruption. When the boot process completes, the system status LEDs remain online (green) and the console monitor displays the EXEC mode prompt.
PAGE 43
Console Access The device has one RJ-45/RS-232 console port, an out-of-band (OOB) Ethernet port, and a micro USB-B console port. Serial Console The RJ-45/RS-232 console port is labeled on the upper right-hand side, as you face the I/O side of the chassis. Figure 1. RJ-45 Console Port 1. RS-232 console port. 2. USB port. Accessing the Console Port To access the console port, follow these steps: For the console port pinout, refer to Accessing the RJ-45 Console Port with a DB-9 Adapter. 1.
PAGE 44
Table 2.
PAGE 45
CONFIGURATION mode interface ManagementEthernet slot/port 2. Assign an IP address to the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address/mask ● ip-address: an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). ● mask: a subnet mask in /prefix-length format (/ xx). 3. Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown Configure a Management Route Define a path from the system to the network from which you are accessing the system remotely.
PAGE 46
○ privilege level: Assign a privilege levels to the user. The range is from 0 to 15. ○ role role-name: Assign a role name for the user. Dell EMC Networking OS encrypts type 5 secret and type 7 password based on dynamic-salt option such that the encrypted password is different when an user is configured with the same password. NOTE: dynamic-salt option is shown only with secret and password options.
PAGE 47
Configuration File Management Files can be stored on and accessed from various storage media. Rename, delete, and copy files on the system from EXEC Privilege mode. Copy Files to and from the System The command syntax for copying files is similar to UNIX. The copy command uses the format copy source-file-url destination-file-url. NOTE: For a detailed description of the copy command, refer to the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Reference.
PAGE 48
Mounting an NFS File System This feature enables you to quickly access data on an NFS mounted file system. You can perform file operations on an NFS mounted file system using supported file commands. This feature allows an NFS mounted device to be recognized as a file system. This file system is visible on the device and you can execute all file commands that are available on conventional file systems such as a Flash file system.
PAGE 49
Example of Copying to NFS Mount DellEMC#copy flash://test.txt nfsmount:/// Destination file name [test.txt]: ! 15 bytes successfully copied DellEMC#copy flash://test/capture.txt.pcap nfsmount:/// Destination file name [test.txt]: ! 15 bytes successfully copied DellEMC#copy flash://test/capture.txt.pcap nfsmount:///username/snoop.pcap ! 24 bytes successfully copied DellEMC# DellEMC#copy tftp://10.16.127.
PAGE 50
Configure the Overload Bit for a Startup Scenario For information about setting the router overload bit for a specific period of time after a switch reload is implemented, see the Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) section in the Dell Command Line Reference Guide for your system. Viewing Files You can only view file information and content on local file systems. To view a list of files or the contents of a file, use the following commands. ● View a list of files on the internal flash.
PAGE 51
Managing the File System The Dell EMC Networking system can use the internal Flash, external Flash, or remote devices to store files. The system stores files on the internal Flash by default but can be configured to store files elsewhere. To view file system information, use the following command. ● View information about each file system.
PAGE 52
[May 17 15:43:08]: CMD-(CLI):[end]by default from console [May 17 15:43:16]: CMD-(CLI):[show logging]by default from console [May 17 15:43:22]: CMD-(CLI):[show command-history]by default from console DellEMC# Example 2: service timestamps log datetime utc DellEMC(conf)#service timestamps log datetime utc DellEMC# show command-history - Repeated 1 time. [May 17 15:46:44]: CMD-(CLI):[configure]by default from console - Repeated 1 time.
PAGE 53
Upgrading Dell EMC Networking OS To upgrade Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS), refer to the Release Notes for the version you want to load on the system. You can download the release notes of your platform at https://www.force10networks.com. Use your login ID to log in to the website. Using HTTP for File Transfers Stating with Release 9.3(0.1), you can use HTTP to copy files or configuration details to a remote server.
PAGE 54
To validate a software image: 1. Download Dell EMC Networking OS software image file from the iSupport page to the local (FTP or TFTP) server. The published hash for that file displays next to the software image file on the iSupport page. 2. Go on to the Dell EMC Networking system and copy the software image to the flash drive, using the copy command. 3. Run the verify {md5 | sha256} [ flash://]img-file sha256 flash://FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin [hash-value] command. For example, verify 4.
PAGE 55
4 Management This chapter describes the different protocols or services used to manage the Dell EMC Networking system.
PAGE 56
Removing a Command from EXEC Mode To remove a command from the list of available commands in EXEC mode for a specific privilege level, use the privilege exec command from CONFIGURATION mode. In the command, specify a level greater than the level given to a user or terminal line, then the first keyword of each command you wish to restrict.
PAGE 57
privilege configure level level {interface | line | route-map | router} {command-keyword ||...|| command-keyword} ● Allow access to a CONFIGURATION, INTERFACE, LINE, ROUTE-MAP, and/or ROUTER mode command. CONFIGURATION mode privilege {configure |interface | line | route-map | router} level level {command ||...
PAGE 58
CONFIGURATION mode username username privilege level NOTE: When you assign a privilege level between 2 and 15, access to the system begins at EXEC mode, but the prompt is hostname#, rather than hostname>. Configuring Logging The Dell EMC Networking OS tracks changes in the system using event and error messages. By default, Dell EMC Networking OS logs these messages on: ● the internal buffer ● console and terminal lines ● any configured syslog servers To disable logging, use the following commands.
PAGE 59
● Uncontrolled shutdown. Security Logs The security log contains security events and information. RBAC restricts access to audit and security logs based on the CLI sessions’ user roles. The types of information in this log consist of the following: ● Establishment of secure traffic flows, such as SSH. ● Violations on secure flows or certificate issues. ● Adding and deleting of users.
PAGE 60
Clearing Audit Logs To clear audit logs, use the clear logging auditlog command in Exec mode. When RBAC is enabled, only the system administrator user role can issue this command. Example of the clear logging auditlog Command DellEMC# clear logging auditlog Configuring Logging Format To display syslog messages in a RFC 3164 or RFC 5424 format, use the logging version {0 | 1} command in CONFIGURATION mode. By default, the system log version is set to 0.
PAGE 61
Figure 2. Setting Up a Secure Connection to a Syslog Server Pre-requisites To configure a secure connection from the switch to the syslog server: 1. On the switch, enable the SSH server DellEMC(conf)#ip ssh server enable 2. On the syslog server, create a reverse SSH tunnel from the syslog server to the Dell OS switch, using following syntax: ssh -R :: user@remote_host -nNf In the following example the syslog server IP address is 10.156.166.
PAGE 62
Log Messages in the Internal Buffer All error messages, except those beginning with %BOOTUP (Message), are log in the internal buffer.
PAGE 63
In the previous lines, local7 is the logging facility level and debugging is the severity level. Track Login Activity Dell EMC Networking OS enables you to track the login activity of users and view the successful and unsuccessful login events.
PAGE 64
Unsuccessful login attempt(s) in last 30 day(s): 0 Successful login attempt(s) in last 30 day(s): 1 -----------------------------------------------------------------Example of the show login statistics all command The show login statistics all command displays the successful and failed login details of all users in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period.
PAGE 65
The following is sample output of the show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts time-period days command. DellEMC# show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts time-period 15 There were 0 unsuccessful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 15 day(s). The following is sample output of the show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts user login-id command. DellEMC# show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts user admin There were 3 unsuccessful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 12 day(s).
PAGE 66
During the next authentication attempt, the system does not allow any attempt to login since maximum VTY sessions have reached and hence no clear-line option. NOTE: If the maximum number of VTY lines are more than the concurrent sessions and the same user is attempting to login second time or more, the system displays the Maximum concurrent sessions for the user reached message. You are allowed to clear the existing session and login.
PAGE 67
Changing System Logging Settings You can change the default settings of the system logging by changing the severity level and the storage location. The default is to log all messages up to debug level, that is, all system messages. By changing the severity level in the logging commands, you control the number of system messages logged. To specify the system logging settings, use the following commands. ● Specify the minimum severity level for logging to the logging buffer.
PAGE 68
%CHMGR-5-CARDDETECTED: Line card 0 present %CHMGR-5-CARDDETECTED: Line card 2 present %CHMGR-5-CARDDETECTED: Line card 4 present %CHMGR-5-CARDDETECTED: Line card 5 present %CHMGR-5-CARDDETECTED: Line card 8 present %CHMGR-5-CARDDETECTED: Line card 10 present %CHMGR-5-CARDDETECTED: Line card 12 present %TSM-6-SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 0 %TSM-6-SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 1 %TSM-6-SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 2 %TSM-6-SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 3 %TSM-6-SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 4 %TSM-6-SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 5 %TSM-
PAGE 69
○ uucp (UNIX to UNIX copy protocol) To view nondefault settings, use the show running-config logging command in EXEC mode. DellEMC#show running-config logging ! logging buffered 524288 debugging service timestamps log datetime msec service timestamps debug datetime msec ! logging trap debugging logging facility user logging source-interface Loopback 0 logging 10.10.10.
PAGE 70
○ msec: Enter the keyword msec to include milliseconds in the timestamp. ○ uptime: To view time since last boot. ○ utc: Enter the keyword utc to view timestamp in UTC time that excludes the local time zone. If you do not specify a parameter, Dell EMC Networking OS configures datetime as localtime by default. To view the configuration, use the show running-config logging command in EXEC privilege mode. To disable time stamping on syslog messages, use the no service timestamps [log | debug] command.
PAGE 71
[May 17 10:17:46]: CMD-(CLI):[end]by default from console [May 17 10:17:50]: CMD-(CLI):[show logging]by default from console [May 17 10:17:56]: CMD-(CLI):[show command-history]by default from console DellEMC# show logging Syslog logging: enabled Console logging: disabled Monitor logging: level debugging Buffer logging: level debugging, 6 Messages Logged, Size (40960 bytes) Trap logging: level informational Last logging buffer cleared: May 17 15:46:36 May 17 10:17:46 %STKUNIT1-M:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configure
PAGE 72
DellEMC(conf)#no service timestamps log DellEMC#show clock 15:55:12.246 IST Fri May 17 2019 DellEMC# show command-history [May 17 15:53:10]: CMD-(CLI):[no service timestamps log]by default from console [May 17 15:53:16]: CMD-(CLI):[write memory]by default from console - Repeated 3 times. [May 17 15:53:22]: CMD-(CLI):[show logging]by default from console - Repeated 1 time. [May 17 15:53:36]: CMD-(CLI):[write memory]by default from console - Repeated 5 times.
PAGE 73
Enabling the FTP Server To enable the system as an FTP server, use the following command. To view FTP configuration, use the show running-config ftp command in EXEC privilege mode. ● Enable FTP on the system. CONFIGURATION mode ftp-server enable DellEMC#show running ftp ! ftp-server enable ftp-server username nairobi password 0 zanzibar DellEMC# Configuring FTP Server Parameters After you enable the FTP server on the system, you can configure different parameters.
PAGE 74
● Enter a username to use on the FTP client. CONFIGURATION mode ip ftp username name To view the FTP configuration, use the show running-config ftp command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the example for Enable FTP Server. Terminal Lines You can access the system remotely and restrict access to the system by creating user profiles. Terminal lines on the system provide different means of accessing the system.
PAGE 75
! ipv6 access-list testv6deny seq 10 deny ipv6 3001::/64 any seq 15 permit ipv6 any any ! DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC(conf)#line vty 0 0 DellEMC(config-line-vty)#access-class testv6deny ipv6 DellEMC(config-line-vty)#access-class testvpermit ipv4 DellEMC(config-line-vty)#show c line vty 0 exec-timeout 0 0 access-class testpermit ipv4 access-class testv6deny ipv6 ! Configuring Login Authentication for Terminal Lines You can use any combination of up to six authentication methods to authenticate a user on a termin
PAGE 76
login authentication myvtymethodlist DellEMC(config-line-vty)# Setting Timeout for EXEC Privilege Mode EXEC timeout is a basic security feature that returns Dell EMC Networking OS to EXEC mode after a period of inactivity on the terminal lines. To set timeout, use the following commands. ● Set the number of minutes and seconds. The default is 10 minutes on the console and 30 minutes on VTY. Disable EXEC time out by setting the timeout period to 0.
PAGE 77
Lock CONFIGURATION Mode Dell EMC Networking OS allows multiple users to make configurations at the same time. You can lock CONFIGURATION mode so that only one user can be in CONFIGURATION mode at any time (Message 2). You can set two types of lockst: auto and manual. ● Set auto-lock using the configuration mode exclusive auto command from CONFIGURATION mode. When you set auto-lock, every time a user is in CONFIGURATION mode, all other users are denied access.
PAGE 78
EXEC Privilege mode reload onie [install | uninstall | rescue] Use the install parameter to reload the system and enter the Install mode to install a networking OS. Use the uninstall parameter to reload the system and enter the Uninstall mode to uninstall a networking OS. Use the rescue parameter to reload the system and enter the Rescue mode to access the file system.
PAGE 79
Power-cycling the unit(s). .... Restoring Factory Default Environment Variables The Boot line determines the location of the image that is used to boot up the chassis after restoring factory default settings. Ideally, these locations contain valid images, using which the chassis boots up. When you restore factory-default settings, you can either use a flash boot procedure or a network boot procedure to boot the switch.
PAGE 80
4. Assign an IP address and netmask to the Management Ethernet interface. BOOT_USER # interface management ethernet ip address ip_address_with_mask For example, 10.16.150.106/16. 5. Assign an IP address as the default gateway for the system. default-gateway gateway_ip_address For example, 10.16.150.254. 6. The environment variables are auto saved. 7. Reload the system. BOOT_USER # reload Viewing the Reason for Last System Reboot You can view the reason for the last system reboot.
PAGE 81
5 802.1X 802.1X is a port-based Network Access Control (PNAC) that provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. A device connected to a port that is enabled with 802.1X is disallowed from sending or receiving packets on the network until its identity is verified (through a username and password, for example). 802.
PAGE 82
● The device attempting to access the network is the supplicant. The supplicant is not allowed to communicate on the network until the authenticator authorizes the port. It can only communicate with the authenticator in response to 802.1X requests. ● The device with which the supplicant communicates is the authenticator. The authenticator is the gate keeper of the network. It translates and forwards requests and responses between the authentication server and the supplicant.
PAGE 83
Figure 5. EAP Port-Authentication EAP over RADIUS 802.1X uses RADIUS to shuttle EAP packets between the authenticator and the authentication server, as defined in RFC 3579. EAP messages are encapsulated in RADIUS packets as a type of attribute in Type, Length, Value (TLV) format. The Type value for EAP messages is 79. Figure 6. EAP Over RADIUS RADIUS Attributes for 802.1X Support Dell EMC Networking systems include the following RADIUS attributes in all 802.
PAGE 84
Configuring 802.1X Configuring 802.1X on a port is a one-step process. For more information, refer to Enabling 802.1X. Related Configuration Tasks ● ● ● ● ● ● Configuring Request Identity Re-Transmissions Forcibly Authorizing or Unauthorizing a Port Re-Authenticating a Port Configuring Timeouts Configuring a Guest VLAN Configuring an Authentication-Fail VLAN Important Points to Remember ● Dell EMC Networking OS supports 802.
PAGE 85
Enabling 802.1X Enable 802.1X globally. Figure 7. 802.1X Enabled 1. Enable 802.1X globally. CONFIGURATION mode dot1x authentication 2. Enter INTERFACE mode on an interface or a range of interfaces. INTERFACE mode interface [range] 3. Enable 802.1X on the supplicant interface only. INTERFACE mode dot1x authentication Verify that 802.1X is enabled globally and at the interface level using the show running-config | find dot1x command from EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 86
no ip address dot1x authentication no shutdown ! DellEMC# To view 802.1X configuration information for an interface, use the show dot1x interface command. In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled on all ports unauthorized by default. DellEMC#show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/1 802.
PAGE 87
● Configure a list of MAC addresses for a dot1x profile. DOT1X PROFILE CONFIG (conf-dot1x-profile) mac mac-address mac-address — Enter the keyword mac and type up to the 48– bit MAC addresses using the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. A maximum of 6 MAC addresses are allowed. The following example configures 2 MAC addresses and then displays these addresses.
PAGE 88
Auth PAE State: Backend State: Authenticated Idle Configuring Critical VLAN By default, critical-VLAN is not configured. If authentication fails because of a server which is not reachable, user session is authenticated under critical-VLAN. To configure a critical-VLAN for users or devices when authenticating server is not reachable, use the following command.
PAGE 89
● Configure the amount of time that the authenticator waits before re-transmitting an EAP Request Identity frame. INTERFACE mode dot1x tx-period number The range is from 1 to 65535 (1 year) The default is 30. ● Configure the maximum number of times the authenticator re-transmits a Request Identity frame. INTERFACE mode dot1x max-eap-req number The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2.
PAGE 90
Forcibly Authorizing or Unauthorizing a Port The 802.1X ports can be placed into any of the three states: ● ForceAuthorized — an authorized state. A device connected to this port in this state is never subjected to the authentication process, but is allowed to communicate on the network. Placing the port in this state is same as disabling 802.1X on the port. ● ForceUnauthorized — an unauthorized state.
PAGE 91
INTERFACE mode dot1x reauth-max number The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2. The bold lines show that re-authentication is enabled and the new maximum and re-authentication time period. DellEMC(conf-if-Te-1/1/1)#dot1x reauthentication interval 7200 DellEMC(conf-if-Te-1/1/1)#dot1x reauth-max 10 DellEMC(conf-if-Te-1/1/1)#do show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 802.
PAGE 92
Guest VLAN: Disable Guest VLAN id: NONE Auth-Fail VLAN: Disable Auth-Fail VLAN id: NONE Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: NONE Tx Period: 90 seconds Quiet Period: 120 seconds ReAuth Max: 10 Supplicant Timeout: 15 seconds Server Timeout: 15 seconds Re-Auth Interval: 7200 seconds Max-EAP-Req: 10 Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: SINGLE_HOST Initialize Initialize Enter the tasks the user should do after finishing this task (optional).
PAGE 93
Figure 8. Dynamic VLAN Assignment 1. Configure 8021.x globally (refer to Enabling 802.1X) along with relevant RADIUS server configurations (refer to the illustration inDynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication). 2. Make the interface a switchport so that it can be assigned to a VLAN. 3. Create the VLAN to which the interface will be assigned. 4. Connect the supplicant to the port configured for 802.1X. 5.
PAGE 94
● If a port is already forwarding on the Guest VLAN when 802.1X is enabled, the port is moved out of the Guest VLAN and the authentication process begins. Configuring a Guest VLAN If the supplicant does not respond within a determined amount of time ([reauth-max + 1] * tx-period, the system assumes that the host does not have 802.1X capability and the port is placed in the Guest VLAN. NOTE: For more information about configuring timeouts, refer to Configuring Timeouts.
PAGE 95
Example of Viewing Configured Authentication 802.
PAGE 96
6 Access Control Lists (ACLs) This chapter describes access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps. At their simplest, access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps permit or deny traffic based on MAC and/or IP addresses. This chapter describes implementing IP ACLs, IP prefix lists and route-maps. For MAC ACLS, refer to Layer 2.
PAGE 97
• • • • • • • • • • Assign an IP ACL to an Interface Applying an IP ACL Configure Ingress ACLs Configure Egress ACLs IP Prefix Lists ACL Remarks ACL Resequencing Route Maps Flow-Based Monitoring Configuring IP Mirror Access Group IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) In Dell EMC Networking switch/routers, you can create two different types of IP ACLs: standard or extended. A standard ACL filters packets based on the source IP packet.
PAGE 98
CAM Optimization When you enable this command, if a policy map containing classification rules (ACL and/or dscp/ ip-precedence rules) is applied to more than one physical interface on the same port-pipe, only a single copy of the policy is written (only one FP entry is used). When you disable this command, the system behaves as described in this chapter. Test CAM Usage This command applies to both IPv4 and IPv6 CAM profiles, but is best used when verifying QoS optimization for IPv6 ACLs.
PAGE 99
ACL Optimization If an access list contains duplicate entries, Dell EMC Networking OS deletes one entry to conserve CAM space. Standard and extended ACLs take up the same amount of CAM space. A single ACL rule uses two CAM entries to identify whether the access list is a standard or extended ACL.
PAGE 100
CONFIGURATION ACL RANGE mode type [inverse value] lower threshold upper-threshold DellEMC(conf)#feature aclrange DellEMC(conf)#aclrange sportrange1 DellEMC(conf-aclrange-sportrange1)# l4srcport 1024 65535 DellEMC(conf)#aclrange destportrange1 DellEMC(conf-acl-destportrange1)# l4dstport 500 500 DellEMC(conf)#aclrange inverserange DellEMC(conf-acl-inverserange)# l4dstport inverse 1000 DellEMC# show aclrange INDEX PROFILE_NAME TYPE INVERSE LOWER UPPER REF_CNT THRESHOLD THRESHOLD ----------------------------
PAGE 101
Creating a Route Map Route maps, ACLs, and prefix lists are similar in composition because all three contain filters, but route map filters do not contain the permit and deny actions found in ACLs and prefix lists. Route map filters match certain routes and set or specific values. To create a route map, use the following command. ● Create a route map and assign it a unique name. The optional permit and deny keywords are the actions of the route map.
PAGE 102
Set clauses: tag 3444 DellEMC# To delete a route map, use the no route-map map-name command in CONFIGURATION mode. Configure Route Map Filters Within ROUTE-MAP mode, there are match and set commands. ● match commands search for a certain criterion in the routes. ● set commands change the characteristics of routes, either adding something or specifying a level.
PAGE 103
● Match routes whose next hop is a specific interface. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match interface interface The parameters are: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ For For For For For a a a a a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
PAGE 104
● Generate a tag to be added to redistributed routes. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set automatic-tag ● Specify an OSPF area or ISIS level for redistributed routes. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set level {backbone | level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 | stub-area} ● Specify a value for the BGP route’s LOCAL_PREF attribute. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set local-preference value ● Specify a value for redistributed routes. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set metric {+ | - | metric-value} ● Specify an OSPF or ISIS type for redistributed routes.
PAGE 105
Example of Calling a Route Map to Redistribute Specified Routes router ospf 34 default-information originate metric-type 1 redistribute static metric 20 metric-type 2 tag 0 route-map staticospf ! route-map staticospf permit 10 match interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 match metric 255 set level backbone Configure a Route Map for Route Tagging One method for identifying routes from different routing protocols is to assign a tag to routes from that protocol.
PAGE 106
● For IP ACL, Dell EMC Networking OS always applies implicit deny. You do not have to configure it. ● For IP ACL, Dell EMC Networking OS applies implicit permit for second and subsequent fragment just prior to the implicit deny. ● If you configure an explicit deny, the second and subsequent fragments do not hit the implicit permit rule for fragments. ● Loopback interfaces do not support ACLs using the IP fragment option.
PAGE 107
DellEMC(conf-ext-nacl)#deny ip any any fragment DellEMC(conf-ext-nacl) To log all the packets denied and to override the implicit deny rule and the implicit permit rule for TCP/ UDP fragments, use a configuration similar to the following.
PAGE 108
ip access-list standard dilling seq 15 permit tcp 10.3.0.0/16 any monitor 300 seq 25 deny ip host 10.5.0.0 any log DellEMC(config-std-nacl)# To delete a filter, use the no seq sequence-number command in IP ACCESS LIST mode. If you are creating a standard ACL with only one or two filters, you can let Dell EMC Networking OS assign a sequence number based on the order in which the filters are configured. The software assigns filters in multiples of 5.
PAGE 109
Configuring Filters with a Sequence Number To configure filters with a sequence number, use the following commands. 1. Enter IP ACCESS LIST mode by creating an extended IP ACL. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list extended access-list-name 2. Configure a drop or forward filter.
PAGE 110
seq 50 permit icmp any any source-quench count seq 55 permit icmp any any time-exceeded count DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#show ip accounting access-list ! Extended Ingress IP access list icmp on TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 Total cam count 11 seq 5 permit icmp any any echo count (50 packets) seq 10 permit icmp any any echo-reply count (50 packets) seq 15 permit icmp any any host-unreachable count (50 packets) seq 20 permit icmp any any host-unknown count (50 packets) seq 25 permit icmp any any network-unknown coun
PAGE 111
Configure Filters, UDP Packets To create a filter for UDP packets with a specified sequence number, use the following commands. 1. Create an extended IP ACL and assign it a unique name. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list extended access-list-name 2. Configure an extended IP ACL filter for UDP packets.
PAGE 112
seq 10 permit udp 154.44.0.0 0.0.255.255 host 34.6.0.0 monitor 111 DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)# To view all configured IP ACLs and the number of packets processed through the ACL, use the show ip accounting access-list command in EXEC Privilege mode, as shown in the first example in Configure a Standard IP ACL Filter. Configure Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACLs Both Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACLs may be configured on an interface in Layer 2 mode.
PAGE 113
INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address 3. Apply an IP ACL to traffic entering or exiting an interface. INTERFACE mode ip access-group access-list-name {in} [implicit-permit] [vlan vlan-range | vrf vrf-range] [layer3] NOTE: ● The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. For detailed specification about entries allowed per ACL, refer to your line card documentation. ● One of the usage scenarios is to avoid ACL being applied on the L2 traffic which comes in via ICL.
PAGE 114
no ip address ip access-group abcd in no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te1/1/1)#end DellEMC#configure terminal DellEMC(conf)#ip access-list extended abcd DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#permit tcp any any DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#deny icmp any any DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#permit 1.1.1.2 DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#end DellEMC#show ip accounting access-list ! Extended Ingress IP access list abcd on tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 seq 5 permit tcp any any seq 10 deny icmp any any seq 15 permit 1.1.1.
PAGE 115
DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/2/1)# DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/2/1)#end DellEMC# Applying Egress Layer 3 ACLs (Control-Plane) By default, packets originated from the system are not filtered by egress ACLs. For example, if you initiate a ping session from the system and apply an egress ACL to block this type of traffic on the interface, the ACL does not affect that ping traffic.
PAGE 116
NOTE: It is important to know which protocol your system supports prior to implementing prefix-lists. Configuration Task List for Prefix Lists To configure a prefix list, use commands in PREFIX LIST, ROUTER RIP, ROUTER OSPF, and ROUTER BGP modes. Create the prefix list in PREFIX LIST mode and assign that list to commands in ROUTER RIP, ROUTER OSPF and ROUTER BGP modes. The following list includes the configuration tasks for prefix lists, as described in the following sections.
PAGE 117
Creating a Prefix List Without a Sequence Number To create a filter without a specified sequence number, use the following commands. 1. Create a prefix list and assign it a unique name. CONFIGURATION mode ip prefix-list prefix-name 2. Create a prefix list filter with a deny or permit action. CONFIG-NPREFIXL mode {deny | permit} ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length] The optional parameters are: ● ge min-prefix-length: is the minimum prefix length to be matched (0 to 32).
PAGE 118
Prefix-list with the last deletion/insertion: filter_ospf ip prefix-list filter_in: count: 3, range entries: 3, sequences: 5 - 10 ip prefix-list filter_ospf: count: 4, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 10 DellEMC> Applying a Prefix List for Route Redistribution To pass traffic through a configured prefix list, use the prefix list in a route redistribution command. Apply the prefix list to all traffic redistributed into the routing process.
PAGE 119
To view the configuration, use the show config command in ROUTER OSPF mode, or the show running-config ospf command in EXEC mode. DellEMC(conf-router_ospf)#show config ! router ospf 34 network 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.255 area 0.0.0.1 distribute-list prefix awe in DellEMC(conf-router_ospf)# ACL Remarks While defining ACL rules, you can optionally include a remark to make the ACLs more descriptive. You can include a remark with a maximum of 80 characters in length.
PAGE 120
CONFIG-EXT-NACL mode or CONFIG-STD-NACL no remark [remark-number] [remark-text] The remark number is optional. The following is an example of removing a remark.
PAGE 121
resequence access-list {ipv4 | ipv6 | mac} {access-list-name StartingSeqNum Step-toIncrement} ● IPv4 or IPv6 prefix-list EXEC mode resequence prefix-list {ipv4 | ipv6} {prefix-list-name StartingSeqNum Step-to-Increment} Remarks and rules that originally have the same sequence number have the same sequence number after you apply the resequence command. The example shows the resequencing of an IPv4 access-list beginning with the number 2 and incrementing by 2.
PAGE 122
Route Maps Although route maps are similar to ACLs and prefix lists in that they consist of a series of commands that contain a matching criterion and an action, route maps can modify parameters in matching packets. Implementation Information ACLs and prefix lists can only drop or forward the packet or traffic. Route maps process routes for route redistribution. For example, a route map can be called to filter only specific routes and to add a metric. Route maps also have an “implicit deny.
PAGE 123
seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [count [byte]] [order] [fragments] [log [threshold-in-msgs count]] [monitor] If you configure the flow-based enable command and do not apply an ACL on the source port or the monitored port, both flow-based monitoring and port mirroring do not function. You cannot apply the same ACL to an interface or a monitoring session context simultaneously.
PAGE 124
ip access-list For more information, see Access Control Lists (ACLs). 3. Apply the ACL to the monitored port. INTERFACE mode ip access-group access-list To view an access-list that you applied to an interface, use the show ip accounting access-list command from EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 125
Dell(conf)#ip access-list standard test 4. Configure a filter to permit the IP packets. CONFIGURATION—STANDARD—ACCESS—LIST mode CONFIGURATION—EXTENDED—ACCESS—LIST mode permit {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [count [bytes]] [dscp value] [order] [fragments] [monitor [session-id]] [no-drop] Dell(config-ext-nacl)#permit ip any any count monitor 65535 5. Associate the IP access list to an interface.
PAGE 126
7 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) BFD is a protocol that is used to rapidly detect communication failures between two adjacent systems. It is a simple and lightweight replacement for existing routing protocol link state detection mechanisms. It also provides a failure detection solution for links on which no routing protocol is used. BFD is a simple hello mechanism. Two neighboring systems running BFD establish a session using a three-way handshake.
PAGE 127
BFD Packet Format Control packets are encapsulated in user datagram protocol (UDP) packets. The following illustration shows the complete encapsulation of a BFD control packet inside an IPv4 packet. Figure 9. BFD in IPv4 Packet Format Field Description Diagnostic Code The reason that the last session failed. State The current local session state. Refer to BFD Sessions. Flag A bit that indicates packet function.
PAGE 128
Field Description Your Discriminator A random number generated by the remote system to identify the session. Discriminator values are necessary to identify the session to which a control packet belongs because there can be many sessions running on a single interface. Desired Min TX Interval The minimum rate at which the local system would like to send control packets to the remote system.
PAGE 129
State Description Init The local system is communicating. Up Both systems are exchanging control packets. The session is declared down if: ● A control packet is not received within the detection time. ● Sufficient echo packets are lost. ● Demand mode is active and a control packet is not received in response to a poll packet. BFD Three-Way Handshake A three-way handshake must take place between the systems that participate in the BFD session.
PAGE 130
Session State Changes The following illustration shows how the session state on a system changes based on the status notification it receives from the remote system. For example, if a session on a system is down and it receives a Down status notification from the remote system, the session state on the local system changes to Init. Figure 11.
PAGE 131
● ● ● ● ● Configure BFD for OSPFv3 Configure BFD for IS-IS Configure BFD for BGP Configure BFD for VRRP Configuring Protocol Liveness Configure BFD for Physical Ports Configuring BFD for physical ports is supported on the C-Series and E-Series platforms only. BFD on physical ports is useful when you do not enable the routing protocol. Without BFD, if the remote system fails, the local system does not remove the connected route until the first failed attempt to send a packet.
PAGE 132
Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
PAGE 133
● Disabling BFD for Static Routes Establishing Sessions for Static Routes for Default VRF Sessions are established for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route on the default VRF. Figure 12. Establishing Sessions for Static Routes To establish a BFD session, use the following command. ● Establish BFD sessions for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route.
PAGE 134
Example Configuration and Verification The following example contains static routes for both default and nondefault VRFs. Dell#sh run | grep bfd bfd enable ip route bfd prefix-list p4_le ip route bfd vrf vrf1 ip route bfd vrf vrf2 ip route bfd vrf vrf1 prefix-list p4_le The following example shows that sessions are created for static routes for the default VRF.
PAGE 135
Prefix lists are used in route maps and route filtering operations. You can use prefix lists as an alternative to existing access lists (ACLs). A prefix is a portion of the IP address. Prefix lists constitute any number of bits in an IP address starting from the far left bit of the far left octet. By specifying the exactly number of bits in an IP address that belong to a prefix list, the prefix list can be used to aggregate addresses and perform some functions; for example, redistribution.
PAGE 136
no ip route bfd [prefix-list prefix-list-name] [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}] Configure BFD for IPv6 Static Routes BFD offers systems a link state detection mechanism for static routes. With BFD, systems are notified to remove static routes from the routing table as soon as the link state change occurs, rather than waiting until packets fail to reach their next hop. Configuring BFD for IPv6 static routes is a three-step process: 1. Enable BFD globally. 2.
PAGE 137
ipv6 route bfd vrf vrf-name [prefix-list prefix-list-name] [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}] Example Configuration and Verification The following example contains static routes for both default and nondefault VRFs. Dell#show run | grep bfd bfd enable ipv6 route bfd prefix-list p6_le ipv6 route bfd vrf vrf1 ipv6 route bfd vrf vrf2 ipv6 route bfd vrf vrf1 prefix-list p6_le The following example shows that sessions are created for static routes for the default VRF.
PAGE 138
Changing IPv6 Static Route Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role. The parameters you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. These parameters are configured for all static routes. If you change a parameter, the change affects all sessions for static routes. To change parameters for static route sessions, use the following command . ● Change parameters for all static route sessions.
PAGE 139
Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors for the Default VRF BFD sessions can be established with all OSPF neighbors at once or sessions can be established with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPF adjacency is in the Full state. Figure 13. Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To establish BFD with all OSPF neighbors or with OSPF neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. ● Enable BFD globally.
PAGE 140
The bold line shows the OSPF BFD sessions. R2(conf-router_ospf)#bfd all-neighbors R2(conf-router_ospf)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients * 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.1 Te 2/1/1 Up 100 100 3 O * 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 Te 2/2/1 Up 100 100 3 O Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors for nondefault VRFs To configure BFD in a nondefault VRF, follow this procedure: ● Enable BFD globally.
PAGE 141
LocalAddr * 10.1.3.2 RemoteAddr 10.1.3.1 Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients Te 1/3/1 Up 300 250 3 C show bfd vrf VRF_blue neighbors * Ad Dn B C I O O3 R M V VT - Active session role Admin Down BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr * 10.1.3.2 RemoteAddr 10.1.3.1 Interface Te 1/3/1 State Rx-int Tx-int Mult VRF Clients Up 300 250 3 255 O DellEMC# show bfd neighbors detail Session Discriminator: 1 Neighbor Discriminator: 1 Local Addr: 10.1.3.
PAGE 142
To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command. Disabling BFD for OSPF If you disable BFD globally, all sessions are torn down and sessions on the remote system are placed in a Down state. If you disable BFD on an interface, sessions on the interface are torn down and sessions on the remote system are placed in a Down state. Disabling BFD does not trigger a change in BFD clients; a final Admin Down packet is sent before the session is terminated.
PAGE 143
VT - Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr Clients * 1.1.1.1 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult 1.1.1.2 Te 1/21/3 Up 200 200 3 O * 2.1.1.1 2.1.1.2 Vl 2 Up 200 200 3 O * fe80::2a0:c9ff:fe00:2 O3 fe80::3617:98ff:fe34:12 Fo 1/1 Up 200 200 3 * fe80::2a0:c9ff:fe00:2 O3 DellEMC# fe80::3617:98ff:fe34:12 Vl 2 Up 200 200 3 Establishing BFD Sessions with OSPFv3 Neighbors for nondefault VRFs To configure BFD in a nondefault VRF, use the following procedure: ● Enable BFD globally.
PAGE 144
* 10.1.1.1 3 511 O 10.1.1.2 Vl 100 Up 150 150 * 11.1.1.1 3 511 O 11.1.1.2 Vl 101 Up 150 150 * 12.1.1.1 3 511 O 12.1.1.2 Vl 102 Up 150 150 * 13.1.1.1 3 511 O 13.1.1.
PAGE 145
Configure BFD for IS-IS When using BFD with IS-IS, the IS-IS protocol registers with the BFD manager on the RPM. BFD sessions are then established with all neighboring interfaces participating in IS-IS. If a neighboring interface fails, the BFD agent on the line card notifies the BFD manager, which in turn notifies the IS-IS protocol that a link state change occurred. Configuring BFD for IS-IS is a two-step process: 1. Enable BFD globally. 2. Establish sessions for all or particular IS-IS neighbors.
PAGE 146
● Establish sessions with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface. INTERFACE mode isis bfd all-neighbors To view the established sessions, use the show bfd neighbors command. The bold line shows that IS-IS BFD sessions are enabled. R2(conf-router_isis)#bfd all-neighbors R2(conf-router_isis)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.
PAGE 147
Configure BFD for BGP In a BGP core network, BFD provides rapid detection of communication failures in BGP fast-forwarding paths between internal BGP (iBGP) and external BGP (eBGP) peers for faster network reconvergence. BFD for BGP is supported on physical, portchannel, and VLAN interfaces. BFD for BGP does not support the BGP multihop feature. Before configuring BFD for BGP, you must first configure BGP on the routers that you want to interconnect.
PAGE 148
Prerequisites Before configuring BFD for BGP, you must first configure the following settings: ● Configure BGP on the routers that you want to interconnect. Establishing Sessions with BGP Neighbors for Default VRF To establish sessions with either IPv6 or IPv4 BGP neighbors for the default VRF, follow these steps: 1. Enable BFD globally. CONFIGURATION mode bfd enable 2. Specify the AS number and enter ROUTER BGP configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 3.
PAGE 149
address-family ipv6 unicast neighbor 20::2 activate exit-address-family DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# Establishing Sessions with BGP Neighbors for Nondefault VRF To establish sessions with either IPv6 or IPv4 BGP neighbors for nondefault VRFs, follow these steps: 1. Enable BFD globally. CONFIGURATION mode bfd enable 2. Specify the AS number and enter ROUTER BGP configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 3. Specify the address family as IPv4.
PAGE 150
! router bgp 1 ! address-family ipv4 vrf vrf1 neighbor 10.1.1.2 remote-as 2 neighbor 10.1.1.2 no shutdown neighbor 20::2 remote-as 2 neighbor 20::2 no shutdown bfd all-neighbors exit-address-family ! address-family ipv6 unicast vrf vrf1 neighbor 20::2 activate exit-address-family DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# Disabling BFD for BGP You can disable BFD for BGP. To disable a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor, use the first command.
PAGE 151
neighbor 2.2.2.2 no shutdown neighbor 3.3.3.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 3.3.3.2 no shutdown bfd all-neighbors The following example shows viewing all BFD neighbors. R2# show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down B - BGP C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) M - MPLS V - VRRP LocalAddr * 1.1.1.3 * 2.2.2.3 * 3.3.3.3 RemoteAddr 1.1.1.2 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.
PAGE 152
Client Registered: BGP Uptime: 00:02:22 Statistics: Number of packets received from neighbor: 1428 Number of packets sent to neighbor: 1428 Number of state changes: 1 Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 4 The following example shows viewing BFD summary information. The bold line shows the message displayed when you enable BFD for BGP connections. R2# show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 10.0.0.
PAGE 153
E1200i_R2# R2# show ip bgp neighbors 2.2.2.3 BGP neighbor is 2.2.2.3, remote AS 1, external link Member of peer-group pg1 for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 12.0.0.4 BGP state ESTABLISHED, in this state for 00:05:33 ... Neighbor is using BGP neighbor mode BFD configuration Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization ... R2# show ip bgp neighbors 2.2.2.4 BGP neighbor is 2.2.2.
PAGE 154
Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all VRRP neighbors at once, or a session can be established with a particular neighbor. Figure 16. Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors To establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors, use the following command. ● Establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors.
PAGE 155
LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients * 2.2.5.1 2.2.5.2 Te 1/1/1 Down 1000 1000 3 V To view session state information, use the show vrrp command. The bold line shows the VRRP BFD session. DellEMC(conf-if-te-4/25/1)#do show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 4/1/1, VRID: 1, Net: 2.2.5.1 VRF:0 default State: Backup, Priority: 1, Master: 2.2.5.
PAGE 156
Configuring Protocol Liveness Protocol liveness is a feature that notifies the BFD manager when a client protocol is disabled. When you disable a client, all BFD sessions for that protocol are torn down. Neighbors on the remote system receive an Admin Down control packet and are placed in the Down state. To enable protocol liveness, use the following command. ● Enable Protocol Liveness.
PAGE 157
8 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an interdomain routing protocol that manages routing between edge routers. BGP uses an algorithm to exchange routing information between switches enabled with BGP. BGP determines a path to reach a particular destination using certain attributes while avoiding routing loops. BGP selects a single path as the best path to a destination network or host. You can also influence BGP to select different path by altering some of the BGP attributes.
PAGE 158
The devices within an AS (AS1 or AS2, as seen in the following illustration) exchange routing information using Internal BGP (IBGP), whereas the devices in different AS communicate using External BGP (EBGP). IBGP provides routers inside the AS with the knowledge to reach routers external to the AS. EBGP routers exchange information with other EBGP routers as well as IBGP routers to maintain connectivity and accessibility. Figure 17.
PAGE 159
Figure 18. BGP Routers in Full Mesh The number of BGP speakers each BGP peer must maintain increases exponentially. Network management quickly becomes impossible. AS4 Number Representation Dell EMC Networking OS supports multiple representations of 4-byte AS numbers: asplain, asdot+, and asdot. NOTE: The ASDOT and ASDOT+ representations are supported only with the 4-Byte AS numbers feature. If 4-Byte AS numbers are not implemented, only ASPLAIN representation is supported.
PAGE 160
● All AS numbers between 0 and 65535 are represented as a decimal number, when entered in the CLI and when displayed in the show commands outputs. ● AS Numbers larger than 65535 is represented using ASDOT notation as .. For example: AS 65546 is represented as 1.10. ASDOT representation combines the ASPLAIN and ASDOT+ representations.
PAGE 161
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#do sho ip bgp BGP table version is 28093, local router ID is 172.30.1.57 AS4 SUPPORT DISABLED DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#no bgp four-octet-as-support DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#sho conf ! router bgp 100 neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip bgp BGP table version is 28093, local router ID is 172.30.1.57 Four-Byte AS Numbers You can use the 4-Byte (32-bit) format when configuring autonomous system numbers (ASNs).
PAGE 162
State Description Idle BGP initializes all resources, refuses all inbound BGP connection attempts, and initiates a TCP connection to the peer. Connect In this state the router waits for the TCP connection to complete, transitioning to the OpenSent state if successful. If that transition is not successful, BGP resets the ConnectRetry timer and transitions to the Active state when the timer expires. Active The router resets the ConnectRetry timer to zero and returns to the Connect state.
PAGE 163
Best Path Selection Criteria Paths for active routes are grouped in ascending order according to their neighboring external AS number (BGP best path selection is deterministic by default, which means the bgp non-deterministic-med command is NOT applied). The best path in each group is selected based on specific criteria. Only one “best path” is selected at a time. If any of the criteria results in more than one path, BGP moves on to the next option in the list.
PAGE 164
6. Prefer the path with the lowest multi-exit discriminator (MED) attribute. The following criteria apply: a. This comparison is only done if the first (neighboring) AS is the same in the two paths; the MEDs are compared only if the first AS in the AS_SEQUENCE is the same for both paths. b. If you entered the bgp always-compare-med command, MEDs are compared for all paths. c. Paths with no MED are treated as “worst” and assigned a MED of 4294967295. 7.
PAGE 165
Figure 20. BGP Local Preference Multi-Exit Discriminators (MEDs) If two ASs connect in more than one place, a multi-exit discriminator (MED) can be used to assign a preference to a preferred path. MED is one of the criteria used to determine the best path, so keep in mind that other criteria may impact selection, as shown in the illustration in Best Path Selection Criteria. One AS assigns the MED a value and the other AS uses that value to decide the preferred path.
PAGE 166
Figure 21. Multi-Exit Discriminators NOTE: Configuring the set metric-type internal command in a route-map advertises the IGP cost as MED to outbound EBGP peers when redistributing routes. The configured set metric value overwrites the default IGP cost. If the outbound route-map uses MED, it overwrites IGP MED. Origin The origin indicates the origin of the prefix, or how the prefix came into BGP. There are three origin codes: IGP, EGP, INCOMPLETE.
PAGE 167
The AS path is shown in the following example. The origin attribute is shown following the AS path information (shown in bold).
PAGE 168
unicast and multicast BGP database to form a routing table for unicast and multicast. You can configure BGP peers that exchange both unicast and multicast Network Layer Reachability Information (NLRI) in which MBGP routes is redistributed into BGP. The default is IPv4 unicast. IPv4 and IPv6 address family The IPv4 address family configuration in Dell EMC Networking OS is used for identifying routing sessions for protocols that use IPv4 address. You can specify multicast within the IPv4 address family.
PAGE 169
BGP global configuration default values By default, BGP is disabled. The following table displays the default values for BGP on Dell EMC Networking OS. Table 8. BGP Default Values Item Default BGP Neighbor Adjacency changes All BGP neighbor changes are logged.
PAGE 170
● If the redistribute command has metric configured (route-map set metric or redistribute route-type metric) and the BGP peer outbound route-map has metric-type internal configured, BGP advertises the metric configured in the redistribute command as MED. ● If BGP peer outbound route-map has metric configured, all other metrics are overwritten by this configuration. NOTE: When redistributing static, connected, or OSPF routes, there is no metric option.
PAGE 171
Figure 22. Before and After AS Number Migration with Local-AS Enabled When you complete your migration, and you have reconfigured your network with the new information, disable this feature. If you use the “no prepend” option, the Local-AS does not prepend to the updates received from the eBGP peer. If you do not select “no prepend” (the default), the Local-AS is added to the first AS segment in the AS-PATH.
PAGE 172
● Configure inbound BGP soft-reconfiguration on a peer for f10BgpM2PrefixInPrefixesRejected to display the number of prefixes filtered due to a policy. If you do enable BGP soft-reconfig, the denied prefixes are not accounted for. ● F10BgpM2AdjRibsOutRoute stores the pointer to the NLRI in the peer's Adj-Rib-Out. ● PA Index (f10BgpM2PathAttrIndex field in various tables) is used to retrieve specific attributes from the PA table.
PAGE 173
Basic BGP configuration tasks The following sections describe how to configure a basic BGP network and the basic configuration tasks that are required for the BGP to be up and running.
PAGE 174
neighbor {ip-address | ipv6-address| peer-group name} remote-as as-number ● ip-address: IPv4 address of the neighbor ● ipv6-address: IPv6 address of the neighbor ● peer-group name: Name of the peer group. It can contain 16 characters. ● as-number: Autonomous number NOTE: Neighbors that are defined using the neighbor remote-as command in the CONFIGURATION-ROUTERBGP mode exchange IPv4 unicast address prefixes only. 3. Enable the BGP neighbor.
PAGE 175
The third line of the show ip bgp neighbors output contains the BGP State. If anything other than ESTABLISHED is listed, the neighbor is not exchanging information and routes. For more information about using the show ip bgp neighbors command, refer to the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide. The following example shows the show ip bgp neighbors command output. DellEMC#show ip bgp neighbors BGP neighbor is 20.20.20.1, remote AS 20, external link BGP remote router ID 1.1.1.
PAGE 176
1 neighbor(s) using 40960 bytes of memory Neighbor 20.20.20.1 AS 200 MsgRcvd 0 MsgSent 0 TblVer 0 InQ 0 OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 0 00:00:00 0 Changing a BGP router ID BGP uses the configured router ID to identify the devices in the network. By default, the router ID is the highest IP address of the Loopback interface. If no Loopback interfaces are configured, the highest IP address of a physical interface on the router is used as the BGP router ID.
PAGE 177
CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asplain NOTE: ASPLAIN is the default method Dell EMC Networking OS uses and does not appear in the configuration display. ● Enable ASDOT AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asdot ● Enable ASDOT+ AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asdot+ The following example shows the bgp asnotation asplain command output.
PAGE 178
● Enter the router configuration mode and the AS number. CONFIG mode router bgp as-number ● Add the IP address of the neighbor for the specified autonomous system. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | ipv6–address | peer-group-name} remote-as as-number ● Enable the neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor ip-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name no shutdown ● Specify the IPv4 address family configuration.
PAGE 179
To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, you can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. Be sure that you make the necessary changes. Example-Configuring BGP routing between peers Example of enabling BGP in Router A Following is an example to enable BGP configuration in the router A. RouterA# configure terminal RouterA(conf)# router bgp 40000 RouterA(conf-router_bgp)# bgp router-id 10.1.1.99 RouterA(conf-router_bgp)# timers bgp 80 130 RouterA(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.
PAGE 180
Configuration rules in a peer group: ● You must create a peer group first before adding the neighbors in the peer group. ● If you remove any configuration parameters from a peer group, it will apply to all the neighbors configured under that peer group. ● If you have not configured a parameter for an individual neighbor in the peer group, the neighbor uses the value configured in the peer group. ● If you reset any parameter for an individual neighbor, it will override the value set in the peer group.
PAGE 181
To add an external BGP (EBGP) neighbor, configure the as-number parameter with a number different from the BGP asnumber configured in the router bgp as-number command. To add an internal BGP (IBGP) neighbor, configure the as-number parameter with the same BGP as-number configured in the router bgp as-number command. After you create a peer group, you can use any of the commands beginning with the keyword neighbor to configure that peer group.
PAGE 182
Number of peers in this group 1 Peer-group members (* - outbound optimized): 2001::1 Example-Configuring BGP peer groups The following example configurations show how to enable BGP and set up some peer groups. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, you can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. Be sure that you make the necessary changes.
PAGE 183
ip address 10.0.1.21/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#int gi 1/31 R1(conf-if-te-1/31)#ip address 10.0.3.31/24 R1(conf-if-te-1/31)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-te-1/31)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 1/31 ip address 10.0.3.31/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-te-1/31)#exit R1(conf)#ip route 192.168.128.2/32 10.0.1.22 R1(conf)#router bgp 99 R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.2 remote 99 R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.2 no shut R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.
PAGE 184
Example of Enabling BGP (Router 3) R3#conf R3(conf)#int te 3/11/1 R3(conf-if-te-3/11/1)#ip address 10.0.3.33/24 R3(conf-if-te-3/11/1)#no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/11/1)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 3/11/1 ip address 10.0.3.33/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/11/1)#int gi 3/21/1 R3(conf-if-te-3/21/1)#ip address 10.0.2.3/24 R3(conf-if-te-3/21/1)#no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/21/1)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 3/21/1 ip address 10.0.2.
PAGE 185
2 BGP AS-PATH entrie(s) using 74 bytes of memory 2 neighbor(s) using 8672 bytes of memory Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ 192.168.128.2 99 23 24 0 0 OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 0 00:06:11 0 Example of Enabling Peer Groups (Router 2) R2#conf R2(conf)#router bgp 99 R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CCC peer-group R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CC no shutdown R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor BBB peer-group R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor BBB no shutdown R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.
PAGE 186
192.168.128.1 192.168.128.2 99 99 93 122 99 120 1 1 0 0 (0) (0) 00:00:15 1 00:00:11 1 Advanced BGP configuration tasks The following sections describe how to configure the advanced (optional) BGP configuration tasks. Route-refresh and Soft-reconfiguration BGP soft-reconfiguration allows for faster and easier route changing. Changing routing policies typically requires a reset of BGP sessions (the TCP connection) for the policies to take effect.
PAGE 187
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.108.1.1 soft-reconfiguration inbound DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# exit Route-refresh This section explains how the soft-reconfiguration and route-refresh works. Soft-reconfiguration has to be configured explicitly for a neighbor unlike route refresh, which is automatically negotiated between BGP peers when establishing a peer session.
PAGE 188
IPv4 and IPv6 route-refresh updates are sent. Following is an example configuration in which IPv6 prefixes is enabled for a IPv6 neighbor and the corresponding route-refresh message: DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# show config ! router bgp 100 redistribute connected neighbor 20.1.1.2 remote-as 200 neighbor 20.1.1.
PAGE 189
aggregate-address ip-address mask [advertise-map map-name] [as-set] [attribute-map mapname] [summary-only] [suppress-map map-name] ○ as-set- Specify that the advertised path of this route is an AS_SET. ○ summary-only-Create aggregate route and suppress advertisements of specific routes to all neighbors. ○ suppress-map map-name-Create aggregate route by suppressing the advertisements of specific routes. ○ advertise-map map-name-Create aggregate route by advertising specific routes.
PAGE 190
The suppress-map keyword creates the aggregate route but suppress the advertisement of specified routes. The routes that are suppressed are not advertised to the neighbors. You can use match clause of route maps to selectively suppress the specific route from the aggregate routes. Following is the sample configuration to suppress the advertisement of specific aggregate routes. DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 100 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# aggregate-address 10.1.1.
PAGE 191
Regular Expression Definition _ (underscore) Matches a ^, a $, a comma, a space, or a {, or a }. Placed on either side of a string to specify a literal and disallow substring matching. You can precede or follow numerals enclosed by underscores by any of the characters listed. | (pipe) Matches characters on either side of the metacharacter; logical OR. As seen in the following example, the expressions are displayed when using the show commands.
PAGE 192
NOTE: You can create inbound and outbound policies. Each of the commands used for filtering has in and out parameters that you must apply. In Dell EMC Networking OS, the order of preference varies depending on whether the attributes are applied for inbound updates or outbound updates.
PAGE 193
● If none of the routes match any of the filters in the prefix list, the route is denied. This action is called an implicit deny. (If you want to forward all routes that do not match the prefix list criteria, you must configure a prefix list filter to permit all routes. For example, you could have the following filter as the last filter in your prefix list permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32). ● After a route matches a filter, the filter’s action is applied. No additional filters are applied to the route.
PAGE 194
To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. To view a route map configuration, use the show route-map command in EXEC Privilege mode. Filtering on an AS-Path Attribute You can use the BGP attribute, AS_PATH, to manipulate routing policies. The AS_PATH attribute contains a sequence of AS numbers representing the route’s path. As the route traverses an AS, the ASN is prepended to the route.
PAGE 195
20 0 --More-- 64801 i Filtering Routes with Community Lists To use an IP community list or IP extended community list to filter routes, you must apply a match community filter to a route map and then apply that route map to a BGP neighbor or peer group. 1. Enter the ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route map. CONFIGURATION mode route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] 2. Configure a match filter for all routes meeting the criteria in the IP community or IP extended community list.
PAGE 196
The BGP fast fall-over feature is configured on a per-neighbor or peer-group basis and is disabled by default. To enable the BGP fast fall-over feature, use the following command. ● Enable BGP fast fall-over. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name} fall-over To disable fast fall-over, use the [no] neighbor [ip-address | ipv6-address | peer-group] fall-over command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode.
PAGE 197
To verify that fast fall-over is enabled on a peer-group, use the show ip bgp peer-group command (shown in bold). DellEMC#show ip bgp peer-group Peer-group test fall-over enabled BGP version 4 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 5 seconds For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP neighbor is test Number of peers in this group 1 Peer-group members (* - outbound optimized): 10.10.10.
PAGE 198
Enabling Graceful Restart Use this feature to lessen the negative effects of a BGP restart. Dell EMC Networking OS advertises support for this feature to BGP neighbors through a capability advertisement. You can enable graceful restart by router and/or by peer or peer group. NOTE: By default, BGP graceful restart is disabled. The default role for BGP is as a receiving or restarting peer.
PAGE 199
Redistributing Routes In addition to filtering routes, you can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the BGP process. You can configure the device to redistribute ISIS, OSPF, static, or directly connected routes into BGP process using the redistribute command. To add routes from other routing instances or protocols, use any of the following commands in ROUTER BGP mode. ● Include directly connected or user-configured (static) routes into BGP.
PAGE 200
To allow multiple paths sent to peers, use the following commands. 1. Allow the advertisement of multiple paths (send, receive or both). CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP or CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP-AF mode bgp add-path [both | enable | receive | send] path-count Configure the following parameters: ● ● ● ● ● both: Indicate that the system sends and accepts multiple paths from peers. enable: Indicate that the system enables add-path support for the node. send: Indicate that the system sends multiple paths to peers.
PAGE 201
{deny | permit} {community-number | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export | quote-regexp regular-expression-list | regexp regular-expression} ● community-number: use AA:NN format where AA is the AS number (2 Bytes or 4 Bytes) and NN is a value specific to that autonomous system. ● local-AS: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED. ● no-advertise: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_ADVERTISE. ● no-export: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT.
PAGE 202
deny 701:20 deny 702:20 deny 703:20 deny 704:20 deny 705:20 deny 14551:20 deny 701:112 deny 702:112 deny 703:112 deny 704:112 deny 705:112 deny 14551:112 deny 701:667 deny 702:667 deny 703:667 deny 704:666 deny 705:666 deny 14551:666 DellEMC# Configure BGP attributes Following sections explain how to configure the BGP attributes such as MED, COMMUNITY, WEIGHT, and LOCAL_PREFERENCE.
PAGE 203
extended- Allows to send the extended community attribute to a BGP neighbor or peer group. standard- Allows to send the standard community attribute to a BGP neighbor or peer group. To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. If you want to remove or add a specific COMMUNITY number from a BGP path, you must create a route map with one or both of the following statements in the route map. Then apply that route map to a BGP neighbor or peer group. 1.
PAGE 204
*>i 6.10.0.0/15 *>i 6.14.0.0/15 *>i 6.133.0.0/21 *>i 6.151.0.0/16 --More-- 195.171.0.16 205.171.0.16 205.171.0.16 205.171.0.16 100 100 100 100 0 0 0 0 209 209 209 209 7170 7170 7170 7170 1455 1455 1455 1455 i i i i Changing the LOCAL_PREFERENCE Attribute In Dell EMC Networking OS, you can change the value of the LOCAL_PREFERENCE attribute, so that the preferred path can be changed. To change the default values of this attribute for all routes received by the router, use the following command.
PAGE 205
In the above example configuration, a route-map named route1 is created with a clause to set the specified local preference value, which is 140. To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. To view a routemap configuration, use the show route-map command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 206
Enabling Multipath By default, the software allows one path to a destination. You can enable multipath to allow up to 64 parallel paths to a destination. You can configure the maximum number of parallel routes (multipath support) to a destination in BGP. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking recommends not using multipath and add path simultaneously in a route reflector. To allow more than one path, use the following command. ● Enable multiple parallel paths.
PAGE 207
2. Router C receives the advertisement but does not advertise it to any peer because its only other peer is Router D, an iBGP peer, and Router D has already learned it through iBGP from Router B. 3. Router D does not advertise the route to Router C because Router C is a nonclient peer and the route advertisement came from Router B who is also a nonclient peer. 4. Router D does reflect the advertisement to Routers E and G because they are client peers of Router D. 5.
PAGE 208
● Attribute change When dampening is applied to a route, its path is described by one of the following terms: ● history entry — an entry that stores information on a downed route ● dampened path — a path that is no longer advertised ● penalized path — a path that is assigned a penalty To configure route flap dampening parameters, set dampening parameters using a route map, clear information on route dampening and return suppressed routes to active state, view statistics on route flapping, or change the path
PAGE 209
CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp non-deterministic-med NOTE: When you change the best path selection method, path selection for existing paths remains unchanged until you reset it by entering the clear ip bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode or the show running-config bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode. The following example shows how to configure values to reuse or restart a route.
PAGE 210
CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbors {ip-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name} timers keepalive holdtime ○ keepalive: Time interval, in seconds, between keepalive messages sent to the neighbor routers. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 60 seconds. ○ holdtime: Time interval, in seconds, between the last keepalive message and declaring the BGP peer is dead. The range is from 3 to 65536. The default is 180 seconds. ● Configure timer values for all neighbors.
PAGE 211
CONFIGURATION Mode router bgp as-number 2. In ROUTER BGP mode, enter the following command: ROUTER BGP Mode shutdown all You can use the no shutdown all command in the ROUTER BGP mode to re-enable all the BGP interface. You can also enable or disable BGP neighbors corresponding to the IPv4 unicast or multicast address families and the IPv6 unicast address family. To enable or disable BGP neighbors corresponding to the IPv4 unicast address families, use the following commands: 1.
PAGE 212
Meaning, BGP neighbors corresponding to the IPv4 unicast or multicast address family and the IPv6 unicast address family that were explicitly disabled before the global shutdown remains in disabled state. Use the no shutdown address-familyipv4-unicast, no shutdown address-family-ipv4-multicast, or no shutdown address-family-ipv6unicast commands to enable these neighbors. NOTE: This behavior applies to all BGP neighbors.
PAGE 213
bgp confederation peers as-number [... as-number] ○ as-number: from 0 to 65535 (2 Byte) or from 1 to 4294967295 (4 Byte). All Confederation routers must be either 4 Byte or 2 Byte. You cannot have a mix of router ASN support. To view the configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. Configuring a BGP VRF address family To perform BGP configuration between two neighbors that must exchange IPv6 or IPv4 VRF information, use the following commands.
PAGE 214
Neighbor 50.0.0.2 AS 200 MsgRcvd 0 MsgSent 0 TblVer 0 InQ 0 OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 0 00:00:00 0 Following is the output of show running-config bgp command for the above configuration. DellEMC#show running-config bgp ! router bgp 10 bgp router-id 1.1.1.1 network 10.10.21.0/24 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 20.20.20.1 remote-as 65550 neighbor 20.20.20.1 no shutdown ! address-family ipv4 vrf vrf1 neighbor 50.0.0.2 maximum-prefix 10000 warning-only neighbor 50.0.0.2 remote-as 200 neighbor 50.0.0.
PAGE 215
neighbor 100.10.92.9 local-as 6500 neighbor 100.10.92.9 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.10.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 192.168.10.1 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.10.1 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.12.2 remote-as 65123 neighbor 192.168.12.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.12.2 no shutdown R2(conf-router_bgp)# Allowing an AS Number to Appear in its Own AS Path This command allows you to set the number of times a particular AS number can occur in the AS path.
PAGE 216
The default is IPv4 Unicast routes. When you configure a peer to support IPv4 multicast, Dell EMC Networking OS takes the following actions: ● Send a capability advertisement to the peer in the BGP Open message specifying IPv4 multicast as a supported AFI/SAFI (Subsequent Address Family Identifier). ● If the corresponding capability is received in the peer’s Open message, BGP marks the peer as supporting the AFI/SAFI.
PAGE 217
Following is the output of show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary command for the above configuration example. DellEMC#show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary BGP router identifier 1.1.1.
PAGE 218
Neighbor 20.20.20.2 30.30.30.1 2001::2 AS 200 20 200 MsgRcvd 10 0 40 MsgSent 20 0 45 TblVer 0 0 0 InQ 0 0 0 OutQ 0 0 0 Up/Down 00:06:11 00:00:00 00:03:14 State/Pfx 0 0 0 The same output will be displayed when using show ip bgp ipv4 unicast summary command. Following is the sample output of show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary command. R1# show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary BGP router identifier 1.1.1.
PAGE 219
Following is the output of show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary command for the above configuration example. R2#show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary BGP router identifier 2.2.2.2, local AS number 200 BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 2 neighbor(s) using 24576 bytes of memory Neighbor 20.20.20.
PAGE 220
Following is the show running-config command output for the above configuration. DellEMC# show running-config bgp ! router bgp 655 bgp router-id 1.1.1.1 neighbor 10.1.1.2 remote-as 20 neighbor 10.1.1.2 auto-local-address neighbor 10.1.1.2 no shutdown ! address-family ipv6 unicast neighbor 10.1.1.2 activate exit-address-family ! Example configuration performed in R2 DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 20 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.1.1.
PAGE 221
Debugging BGP To enable BGP debugging, use any of the following commands. ● View all information about BGP, including BGP events, keepalives, notifications, and updates. EXEC Privilege mode debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] [in | out] ● View information about BGP route being dampened. EXEC Privilege mode debug ip bgp dampening [in | out] ● View information about local BGP state changes and other BGP events.
PAGE 222
3 opens, 2 notifications, 0 updates 43 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds Minimum time before advertisements start is 0 seconds Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 1395, neighbor version 1394 Prefixes accepted 1
PAGE 223
9 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) CAM is a type of memory that stores information in the form of a lookup table. On Dell EMC Networking systems, CAM stores Layer 2 (L2) and Layer 3 (L3) forwarding information, access-lists (ACLs), flows, and routing policies.
PAGE 224
Table 11. Default Cam Allocation Settings (continued) CAM Allocation Setting ipv4pbr 0 vrfv4Acl 0 Openflow 0 fedgovacl 0 NOTE: When you reconfigure CAM allocation, use the nlbclusteracl number command to change the number of NLB ARP entries. The range is from 0 to 2. The default value is 0. At the default value of 0, eight NLB ARP entries are available for use. This platform supports upto 512 CAM entries. Select 1 to configure 256 entries. Select 2 to configure 1024 entries.
PAGE 225
The new cam region ipv6mirracl is introduced in the cam-acl command to configure dedicated FP CAM regions for the IPv6 mirror ACL entries. NOTE: If you do not enter the allocation values for the CAM regions, the value is 0. 3. Execute write memory and verify that the new settings are written to the CAM on the next boot. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-acl 4. Reload the system.
PAGE 226
Example of show running-config cam-profile Command Dell#show running-config cam-profile ! cam-profile default microcode default Dell# View CAM-ACL Settings The show cam-acl command shows the cam-acl setting that will be loaded after the next reload.
PAGE 227
L2Acl Ipv4Acl Ipv6Acl Ipv4Qos L2Qos L2PT IpMacAcl VmanQos VmanDualQos EcfmAcl FcoeAcl iscsiOptAcl ipv4pbr vrfv4Acl Openflow fedgovacl : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 block = 128 entries 6 4 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- Stack unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 -- Stack unit 7 -Cu
PAGE 228
Example of the show cam-usage Command DellEMC#show cam-usage Stackunit|Portpipe|Pipeline| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM ========|========|========|=================|=============|=============|============== 1 | 0 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | | IN-L3 ACL | 2304 | 1 | 2303 | | | IN-L3 ECMP GRP | 2048 | 0 | 2048 | | | IN-V6 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | | IN-NLB ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | | IPMAC ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | | IN-V6-MIRRACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | | IN-L3-MIRR ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | | OUT-L2 ACL | 206 |
PAGE 229
Consider if the last CAM threshold was set to 90 percent and now you re-configure the CAM threshold to 80. And, if the current CAM usage is 85 percent, then the system displays the syslog message saying that the CAM usage is above the configured CAM threshold value. Table 13.
PAGE 230
Syslog Error When the Table is Full In the Dell EMC Networking OS, the table full condition is displayed as CAM full only for LPM. But now the LPM is split into two tables. There are two syslog errors that are displayed: 1. /65 to /128 Table full. 2. 0/0 – 0/64 Table full. A table-full error message is displayed once the number of entries is crossed the table size. Table-full message is generated only once when it crosses the threshold.
PAGE 231
DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC(conf)#end DellEMC#01:13:44: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console DellEMC# 2. Display the hardware forwarding table mode in the current boot and in the next boot.
PAGE 232
10 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. That filter prevents traffic not specifically identified as legitimate from reaching the system control plane, rate-limits, traffic to an acceptable level.
PAGE 233
Figure 28. CoPP Implemented Versus CoPP Not Implemented Topics: • Configure Control Plane Policing Configure Control Plane Policing The system can process a maximum of 4200 packets per second (PPS). Protocols that share a single queue may experience flaps if one of the protocols receives a high rate of control traffic even though per protocol CoPP is applied. This happens because queue-based rate limiting is applied first.
PAGE 234
Configuring CoPP for Protocols This section lists the commands necessary to create and enable the service-policies for CoPP. For complete information about creating ACLs and QoS rules, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs) and Quality of Service (QoS). The basics for creating a CoPP service policy are to create a Layer 2, Layer 3, and/or an IPv6 ACL rule for the desired protocol type. Then, create a QoS input policy to rate-limit the protocol traffics according to the ACL.
PAGE 235
DellEMC(conf)#mac access-list extended lacp cpu-qos DellEMC(conf-mac-acl-cpuqos)#permit lacp DellEMC(conf-mac-acl-cpuqos)#exit DellEMC(conf)#ipv6 access-list ipv6-icmp cpu-qos DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#permit icmp DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#exit DellEMC(conf)#ipv6 access-list ipv6-vrrp cpu-qos DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#permit vrrp DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#exit The following example shows creating the QoS input policy.
PAGE 236
1. Create a QoS input policy for the router and assign the policing. CONFIGURATION mode qos-policy-input name cpu-qos 2. Create an input policy-map to assign the QoS policy to the desired service queues.l. CONFIGURATION mode policy-map--input name cpu-qos service-queue queue-number qos-policy name 3. Enter Control Plane mode. CONFIGURATION mode control-plane-cpuqos 4. Assign a CPU queue-based service policy on the control plane in cpu-qos mode.
PAGE 237
Q7 DellEMC# 1100 To view the queue mapping for each configured protocol, use the show ip protocol-queue-mapping command.
PAGE 238
11 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of enhancements to Ethernet local area networks used in data center environments, particularly with clustering and storage area networks.
PAGE 239
A CNA is a computer input/output device that combines the functionality of a host bus adapter (HBA) with a network interface controller (NIC). Multiple adapters on different devices for several traffic types are no longer required.
PAGE 240
Figure 29. Illustration of Traffic Congestion The system supports loading two DCB_Config files: ● FCoE converged traffic with priority 3. ● iSCSI storage traffic with priority 4. In the Dell EMC Networking OS, PFC is implemented as follows: ● PFC is supported on specified 802.1p priority traffic (dot1p 0 to 7) and is configured per interface.
PAGE 241
The following figure shows how ETS allows you to allocate bandwidth when different traffic types are classed according to 802.1p priority and mapped to priority groups. Figure 30. Enhanced Transmission Selection The following table lists the traffic groupings ETS uses to select multiprotocol traffic for transmission. Table 15. ETS Traffic Groupings Traffic Groupings Description Group ID A 4-bit identifier assigned to each priority group. The range is from 0 to 7 configurable; 8 - 14 reservation and 15.
PAGE 242
Data Center Bridging in a Traffic Flow The following figure shows how DCB handles a traffic flow on an interface. Figure 31. DCB PFC and ETS Traffic Handling Enabling Data Center Bridging DCB is automatically configured when you configure FCoE or iSCSI optimization. Data center bridging supports converged enhanced Ethernet (CEE) in a data center network. DCB is disabled by default. It must be enabled to support CEE.
PAGE 243
DCB Maps and its Attributes This topic contains the following sections that describe how to configure a DCB map, apply the configured DCB map to a port, configure PFC without a DCB map, and configure lossless queues. DCB Map: Configuration Procedure A DCB map consists of PFC and ETS parameters. By default, PFC is not enabled on any 802.1p priority and ETS allocates equal bandwidth to each priority. To configure user-defined PFC and ETS settings, you must create a DCB map.
PAGE 244
ETS: Equal bandwidth is assigned to each port queue and each dot1p priority in a priority group. To configure PFC and ETS parameters on an interface, you must specify the PFC mode, the ETS bandwidth allocation for a priority group, and the 802.1p priority-to-priority group mapping in a DCB map. No default PFC and ETS settings are applied to Ethernet interfaces. Configuring Priority-Based Flow Control Priority-Based Flow Control (PFC) provides a flow control mechanism based on the 802.
PAGE 245
Port B acting as Egress During the congestion, [traffic pump on priorities 3 and 4 from PORT A and PORT C is at full line rate], PORT A and C send out the PFCs to rate the traffic limit. Egress drops are not observed on Port B since traffic flow on priorities is mapped to loss less queues. Port B acting as Ingress If the traffic congestion is on PORT B , Egress DROP is on PORT A or C, as the PFC is not enabled on PORT B.
PAGE 246
In S6000, any pfc-dot1p priorities configured on a given interface need not be the same across the system. In other words, lossless queue limit is applicable on a per-port level and not on the global-config context. For example, one of the interfaces can have pfc-dot1p priorities as 2 and 3. Whereas, the other interface(s) can have its pfc-dot1p priorities as 4 and 5.
PAGE 247
● Dell EMC Networking OS allows you to change the default dot1p priority-queue assignments only if the change satisfies the following requirements in DCB maps already applied to the interfaces: ● All 802.1p priorities mapped to the same queue must be in the same priority group. ● A maximum of two PFC-enabled, lossless queues are supported on an interface. Otherwise, the reconfiguration of a default dot1p-queue assignment is rejected.
PAGE 248
Configuring PFC without a DCB Map In a network topology that uses the default ETS bandwidth allocation (assigns equal bandwidth to each priority), you can also enable PFC for specific dot1p-priorities on individual interfaces without using a DCB map. This type of DCB configuration is useful on interfaces that require PFC for lossless traffic, but do not transmit converged Ethernet traffic. Table 17.
PAGE 249
When configuring lossless queues on a port interface, consider the following points: ● By default, no lossless queues are configured on a port. ● A limit of two lossless queues is supported on a port. If the number of lossless queues configured exceeds the maximum supported limit per port (two), an error message is displayed. Reconfigure the value to a smaller number of queues.
PAGE 250
Table 19.
PAGE 251
Behavior of Tagged Packets The below is example for enabling PFC for priority 2 for tagged packets. Priority (Packet Dot1p) 2 will be mapped to PG6 on PRIO2PG setting. All other Priorities for which PFC is not enabled are mapped to default PG – PG7. Classification rules on ingress (Ingress FP CAM region) matches incoming packet-dot1p and assigns an internal priority (to select queue as per Table 1 and Table 2).
PAGE 252
4. Interface Configurations on server connected ports. a. Enable DCB globally. DellEMC(conf)#dcb enable b. Apply PFC Priority configuration. Configure priorities on which PFC is enabled. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#pfc priority 1,2 SNMP Support for PFC and Buffer Statistics Tracking Buffer Statistics Tracking (BST) feature provides a mechanism to aid in Resource Monitoring and Tuning of Buffer Allocation. The Max Use Count mode provides the maximum value of the counters accumulated over a period of time.
PAGE 253
PFC from the peer. If a queue is congested due to packets with a specific Dot1p and PFC is enabled for that Dot1p, switch will transit out PFC frames for that Dot1p. The packet Dot1p to Queue mapping for classification on the ingress must be same as the mapping of Dot1p to the Queue to be halted on the egress used for PFC honoring. Dell EMC Networking OS ensures that these mappings are identical.
PAGE 254
PFC and ETS Configuration Examples This section contains examples of how to configure and apply DCB policies on an interface. Using PFC to Manage Converged Ethernet Traffic To use PFC for managing converged Ethernet traffic, use the following command: dcb-map stack-unit all dcb-map-name Operations on Untagged Packets The below is example for enabling PFC for priority 2 for tagged packets. Priority (Packet Dot1p) 2 will be mapped to PG6 on PRIO2PG setting.
PAGE 255
ETS Prerequisites and Restrictions The following prerequisites and restrictions apply when you configure ETS bandwidth allocation or queue scheduling. ● Configuring ETS bandwidth allocation or a queue scheduler for dot1p priorities in a priority group is applicable if the DCBx version used on a port is CIN (refer to Configuring DCBx).
PAGE 256
If you configure more than one priority queue as strict priority or more than one priority group as strict priority, the higher numbered priority queue is given preference when scheduling data traffic. If multiple lossful priorities are mapped to a single priority group (PG1) and lossless priorities to another priority group (PG0), then bandwidth split across lossful priorities is not even. ETS Operation with DCBx The following section describes DCBx negotiation with peer ETS devices.
PAGE 257
interface type slot/port/subport 6. Apply the QoS output policy with the bandwidth percentage for specified priority queues to an egress interface. INTERFACE mode Dell(conf-if-te-0/1)#service-policy output test12 Configuring ETS in a DCB Map A switch supports the use of a DCB map in which you configure enhanced transmission selection (ETS) setting. To configure ETS parameters, you must apply a DCB map on an interface.
PAGE 258
● Although ETS bandwidth allocation or strict-priority queuing does not support weighted random early detection (WRED), explicit congestion notification (ECN), rate shaping, and rate limiting because these parameters are not negotiated by DCBx with peer devices, you can apply a QoS output policy with WRED and/or rate shaping on a DCBx CIN-enabled interface.
PAGE 259
Applying DCB Policies in a Switch Stack You can apply DCB policies with PFC and ETS configurations to all stacked ports in a switch stack or on a stacked switch. To apply DCB policies in a switch stack, follow this step. ● Apply the specified DCB policy on all ports of the switch stack or a single stacked switch.
PAGE 260
● If the received peer configuration is not compatible with the currently configured port configuration, the link with the DCBx peer port is disabled and a syslog message for an incompatible configuration is generated. The network administrator must then reconfigure the peer device so that it advertises a compatible DCB configuration. ○ The configuration received from a DCBx peer or from an internally propagated configuration is not stored in the switch’s running configuration.
PAGE 261
● On manual ports, an application priority TLV is advertised only if the priorities in the TLV match the PFC priorities configured on the port. DCB Configuration Exchange The DCBx protocol supports the exchange and propagation of configuration information for the enhanced transmission selection (ETS) and priority-based flow control (PFC) DCB features.
PAGE 262
Auto-Detection and Manual Configuration of the DCBx Version When operating in Auto-Detection mode (the DCBx version auto command), a DCBx port automatically detects the DCBx version on a peer port. Legacy CIN and CEE versions are supported in addition to the standard IEEE version 2.5 DCBx. A DCBx port detects a peer version after receiving a valid frame for that version.
PAGE 263
DCBx Prerequisites and Restrictions The following prerequisites and restrictions apply when you configure DCBx operation on a port: ● For DCBx, on a port interface, enable LLDP in both Send (TX) and Receive (RX) mode (the protocol lldp mode command; refer to the example in CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations in the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) chapter). If multiple DCBx peer ports are detected on a local DCBx interface, LLDP is shut down.
PAGE 264
The default is All PFC and ETS TLVs are advertised. NOTE: You can configure the transmission of more than one TLV type at a time; for example, advertise DCBx-tlv ets-conf ets-reco. You can enable ETS recommend TLVs (ets-reco) only if you enable ETS configuration TLVs (ets-conf). To disable TLV transmission, use the no form of the command; for example, no advertise DCBx-tlv pfc ets-reco. 6. On manual ports only: Configure the Application Priority TLVs advertised on the interface to DCBx peers.
PAGE 265
5. Configure the Application Priority TLVs that advertise on unconfigured interfaces with a manual port-role. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] advertise DCBx-appln-tlv {fcoe | iscsi} ● fcoe: enables the advertisement of FCoE in Application Priority TLVs. ● iscsi: enables the advertisement of iSCSI in Application Priority TLVs. The default is Application Priority TLVs are enabled and advertise FCoE and iSCSI.
PAGE 266
debug DCBx {all | auto-detect-timer | config-exchng | fail | mgmt | resource | sem | tlv} ○ all: enables all DCBx debugging operations. ○ auto-detect-timer: enables traces for DCBx auto-detect timers. ○ config-exchng: enables traces for DCBx configuration exchanges. ○ fail: enables traces for DCBx failures. ○ mgmt: enables traces for DCBx management frames. ○ resource: enables traces for DCBx system resource frames. ○ sem: enables traces for the DCBx state machine. ○ tlv: enables traces for DCBx TLVs.
PAGE 267
The following example shows the show dot1p-queue mapping command. DellEMC(conf)# show qos dot1p-queue-mapping Dot1p Priority: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue : 0 0 0 1 2 3 3 3 The following example shows the show dcb command. DellEMC# show dcb stack-unit 2 port-set 0 DCB Status : Enabled PFC Port Count : 56 (current), 56 (configured) PFC Queue Count : 2 (current), 2 (configured) The following example shows the show qos priority-groups command.
PAGE 268
PFC Link Delay 45556 pause quanta Application Priority TLV Parameters : -------------------------------------FCOE TLV Tx Status is disabled ISCSI TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Local ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x10 Remote FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Remote ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x8 0 Input TLV pkts, 1 Output TLV pkts, 0 Error pkts, 0 Pause Tx pkts, 0 Pause Rx pkts The following table describes the show interface pfc summary command fields. Table 24.
PAGE 269
Table 24. show interface pfc summary Command Description (continued) Fields Description Application Priority TLV: Remote FCOE Priority Map Status of FCoE advertisements in application priority TLVs from remote peer port: enabled or disabled. Application Priority TLV: Remote ISCSI Priority Map Status of iSCSI advertisements in application priority TLVs from remote peer port: enabled or disabled. PFC TLV Statistics: Input TLV pkts Number of PFC TLVs received.
PAGE 270
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 3 25 ETS 1 4 25 ETS 2 0,1,2,5,6,7 50 ETS 3 4 5 6 7 Oper status is init ETS DCBX Oper status is Down Reason: Port Shutdown State Machine Type is Asymmetric Conf TLV Tx Status is enabled Reco TLV Tx Status is enabled The following example shows the show interface ets detail command.
PAGE 271
Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Output Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts 0 Input Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Output Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Error Traffic Class TLV Pkts The following table describes the show interface ets detail command fields. Table 25. show interface ets detail Command Description Field Description Interface Interface type with stack-unit and port number.
PAGE 272
0 Pause Tx pkts, 0 Pause Rx pkts stack unit 2 stack-port all Admin mode is On Admin is enabled, Priority list is 4-5 Local is enabled, Priority list is 4-5 Link Delay 45556 pause quantum 0 Pause Tx pkts, 0 Pause Rx pkts The following example shows the show stack-unit all stack-ports all ets details command.
PAGE 273
1 0 1 1 Input PFC PFC Pause Input ETS Input ETS TLV pkts, 2 Output PFC TLV pkts, 0 Error PFC pkts Tx pkts, 0 Pause Rx pkts Conf TLV Pkts, 1 Output ETS Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Error ETS Conf TLV Pkts Reco TLV pkts, 1 Output ETS Reco TLV pkts, 0 Error ETS Reco TLV Pkts The following example shows the show interface DCBx detail command (legacy CEE).
PAGE 274
Table 26. show interface DCBx detail Command Description (continued) Field Description Peer Operating version DCBx version that the peer uses to exchange DCB parameters. Local DCBx TLVs Transmitted Transmission status (enabled or disabled) of advertised DCB TLVs (see TLV code at the top of the show command output). Local DCBx Status: DCBx Operational Version DCBx version advertised in Control TLVs. Local DCBx Status: DCBx Max Version Supported Highest DCBx version supported in Control TLVs.
PAGE 275
Configuring the Dynamic Buffer Method Priority-based flow control using dynamic buffer spaces is supported on the switch. To configure the dynamic buffer capability, perform the following steps: 1. Enable the DCB application. By default, DCB is enabled and link-level flow control is disabled on all interfaces. CONFIGURATION mode dcb enable 2. Configure the shared PFC buffer size and the total buffer size. A maximum of 4 lossless queues are supported.
PAGE 276
Figure 33. PFC and ETS Applied to LAN, IPC, and SAN Priority Traffic QoS Traffic Classification: The service-class dynamic dot1p command has been used in Global Configuration mode to map ingress dot1p frames to the queues shown in the following table. For more information, refer to QoS dot1p Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment.
PAGE 277
The following describes the priority group-bandwidth assignment. Priority Group Bandwidth Assignment IPC 5% SAN 50% LAN 45% PFC and ETS Configuration Command Examples The following examples show PFC and ETS configuration commands to manage your data center traffic. 1. Enabling DCB DellEMC(conf)#dcb enable 2. Configure DCB map and enable PFC, and ETS DellEMC(conf)# service-class dynamic dot1p Or DellEMC(conf)# interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# service-class dynamic dot1p 3.
PAGE 278
12 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) DHCP is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network endstations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators.
PAGE 279
Option Number and Description Subnet Mask Option 1 Specifies the client’s subnet mask. Router Option 3 Specifies the router IP addresses that may serve as the client’s default gateway. Domain Name Server Option 6 Domain Name Option 15 Specifies the domain name servers (DNSs) that are available to the client. Specifies the domain name that clients should use when resolving hostnames via DNS.
PAGE 280
1. The client initially broadcasts a DHCPDISCOVER message on the subnet to discover available DHCP servers. This message includes the parameters that the client requires and might include suggested values for those parameters. 2. Servers unicast or broadcast a DHCPOFFER message in response to the DHCPDISCOVER that offers to the client values for the requested parameters. Multiple servers might respond to a single DHCPDISCOVER; the client might wait a period of time and then act on the most preferred offer.
PAGE 281
● All platforms support Dynamic ARP Inspection on 16 VLANs per system. For more information, refer to Dynamic ARP Inspection. NOTE: If the DHCP server is on the top of rack (ToR) and the VLTi (ICL) is down due to a failed link, when a VLT node is rebooted in BMP (Bare Metal Provisioning) mode, it is not able to reach the DHCP server, resulting in BMP failure.
PAGE 282
DHCP mode show config After an IP address is leased to a client, only that client may release the address. Dell EMC Networking OS performs a IP + MAC source address validation to ensure that no client can release another clients address. This validation is a default behavior and is separate from IP+MAC source address validation.
PAGE 283
Configure a Method of Hostname Resolution Dell systems are capable of providing DHCP clients with parameters for two methods of hostname resolution—using DNS or NetBIOS WINS. Using DNS for Address Resolution A domain is a group of networks. DHCP clients query DNS IP servers when they need to correlate host names to IP addresses. 1. Create a domain. DHCP domain-name name 2. Specify in order of preference the DNS servers that are available to a DHCP client.
PAGE 284
Debugging the DHCP Server To debug the DHCP server, use the following command. ● Display debug information for DHCP server. EXEC Privilege mode debug ip dhcp server [events | packets] Using DHCP Clear Commands To clear DHCP binding entries, address conflicts, and server counters, use the following commands. ● Clear DHCP binding entries for the entire binding table. EXEC Privilege mode. clear ip dhcp binding ● Clear a DHCP binding entry for an individual IP address. EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 285
Configuring the DHCP Client System This section describes how to configure and view an interface as a DHCP client to receive an IP address. Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: The ip address dhcp command enables DHCP server-assigned dynamic addresses on an interface. The setting persists after a switch reboot. To stop DHCP transactions and save the dynamically acquired IP address, use the shutdown command on the interface.
PAGE 286
● To display dynamic IP address lease information currently assigned to a DHCP client interface, use the show ip dhcp lease [interface type slot/port[/subport]] command. ● To display log messages for all DHCP packets sent and received on DHCP client interfaces, use the debug ip dhcp client packets [interface type slot/port[/subport] command.
PAGE 287
DHCP Snooping A DHCP client can run on a switch simultaneously with the DHCP snooping feature as follows: ● If you enable DHCP snooping globally on a switch and you enable a DHCP client on an interface, the trust port, source MAC address, and snooping table validations are not performed on the interface by DHCP snooping for packets destined to the DHCP client daemon. The following criteria determine packets destined for the DHCP client: ○ DHCP is enabled on the interface.
PAGE 288
! ip vrf VRF_2 ip route-import 2:2 ip route-export 1:1 ! route-map rmap1 permit 10 match source-protocol connected ! route-map map2 permit 20 match source-protocol connected Route Leaking for Complete Routing Table ! ip vrf VRF_1 ip route-import 1:1 ip route-export 2:2 ! ip vrf VRF_2 ip route-import 2:2 ip route-export 1:1 Route Leaking for Selective Routes ! ip vrf VRF_1 ip route-import 1:1 map1 ip route-export 2:2 map2 ! ip vrf VRF_2 ip route-import 2:2 ip route-export 1:1 ! ! route-map map1 permit 10 m
PAGE 289
INTERFACE mode ipv6 helper-address [vrf vrf-name] ipv6-address Configuring DHCP relay source interface The following section explains how to configure global and interface level DHCP relay source IPv4 or IPv6 configuration to forward all the DHCP packets from the DHCP client to DHCP server through the configured source interface. This feature is applicable only for L3 interface with relay configuration and L3 DHCP snooping enabled VLANs.
PAGE 290
1. Configuring L3 interface with IPv4 or IPv6 address. Following are the steps to configure a L3 interface (loopback) with IPv4 and IPv6 address in INTERFACE MODE. Dell(conf)# interface loopback 2 Dell(conf-if-lo-1)# ip vrf forwarding vrf1 Dell(conf-if-lo-1)# ip address 2.2.2.2/32 Dell(conf-if-lo-1)# ipv6 address 2::2/128 Dell(conf-if-lo-1)# no shutdown Dell(conf)# interface loopback 3 Dell(conf-if-lo-1)# ip vrf forwarding vrf2 Dell(conf-if-lo-1)# ip address 3.3.3.
PAGE 291
The received stacking configuration is always applied on the master stack unit. option #230 "unit-number:3#priority:2#stack-group:14" Configure Secure DHCP DHCP as defined by RFC 2131 provides no authentication or security mechanisms. Secure DHCP is a suite of features that protects networks that use dynamic address allocation from spoofing and attacks.
PAGE 292
ip dhcp relay information-option remote-id DHCPv6 relay agent options The DHCPv6 relay agent inserts Options 18 and 37 before forwarding DHCPv6 packets to the server. These DHCPv6 options are enabled by default and are not configurable. Interface ID (Option 18) Remote ID (Option 37) Interface on which the client-originated message is received. The interface-ID is 12 bytes long and is constructed using three ifindexes: Logical, Received, and Physical. Each of the ifindex is 4 bytes long.
PAGE 293
NOTE: If you enable DHCP Option 82 using the ip dhcp relay command, by default, the remote-ID field contains the MAC address of the relay agent. If you configure the remote ID as the host name in a VLT setup, configure different host names on both VLT peers. If you configure the remote ID with your own string, ensure that your strings are different on both VLT peers. DHCP Snooping in a VLT Setup In a VLT setup, the DHCP snooping binding table synchronizes between the VLT nodes.
PAGE 294
Adding a Static IPV6 DHCP Snooping Binding Table To add a static entry in the snooping database, use the following command. ● Add a static entry in the snooping binding table. EXEC Privilege mode ipv6 dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan-id vlan-id ipv6 ipv6-address interface interface-type | interface-number lease value Clearing the Binding Table To clear the binding table, use the following command. ● Delete all of the entries in the binding table.
PAGE 295
Invalid Binding List of List of List of Binding Entry Entry lease expired Trust Ports DHCP Snooping Enabled Vlans DAI Trust ports : 0 : 0 :Te 1/4/1 :Vl 10 :Te 1/4/1 View the DHCP snooping binding table using the show ip dhcp snooping binding command. DellEMC#show ip dhcp snooping binding Codes : S - Static D - Dynamic IP Address MAC Address Expires(Sec) Type VLAN Interface ========================================================================= 10.1.1.254 00:00:a0:00:00:02 162 D Vl 200 Te 1/4/1 10.1.1.
PAGE 296
View the DHCP snooping statistics with the show ipv6 dhcp snooping command. DellEMC#show ipv6 dhcp snooping binding Codes : S - Static D – Dynamic IPv6 Address MAC Address Expires(Sec) Type VLAN Interface ========================================================================= 11:11::22 11:22:11:22:11:22 120331 S Vl 100 Te 1/1/1 33::22 11:22:11:22:11:23 120331 S Vl 200 Te 1/1/1 333:22::22 11:22:11:22:11:24 120331 D Vl 300 Te 1/2/1 Debugging the IPv6 DHCP To debug the IPv6 DHCP, use the following command.
PAGE 297
The lack of authentication in ARP makes it vulnerable to spoofing. ARP spoofing is a technique attackers use to inject false IPto-MAC mappings into the ARP cache of a network device. It is used to launch man-in-the-middle (MITM), and denial-ofservice (DoS) attacks, among others. A spoofed ARP message is one in which the MAC address in the sender hardware address field and the IP address in the sender protocol field are strategically chosen by the attacker.
PAGE 298
configure terminal 2. Select the interface to be configured. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface-name 3. Configure ARP packet inspection rate limiting. INTERFACE CONFIGURATION mode arp inspection-limit {rate pps [interval seconds]} The rate packet per second (pps) range is from 1 to 2048. The default is 15. The rate burst interval range is from 1 to 15 seconds. The default is 1.
PAGE 299
system verifies that the source IP address is one that is associated with the incoming port and optionally that the client belongs to the permissible VLAN. If an attacker is impostering as a legitimate client, the source address appears on the wrong ingress port and the system drops the packet. If the IP address is fake, the address is not on the list of permissible addresses for the port and the packet is dropped. Similarly, if the IP address does not belong to the permissible VLAN, the packet is dropped.
PAGE 300
ip dhcp source-address-validation ipmac vlan vlan-id Dell EMC Networking OS creates an ACL entry for each IP+MAC address pair and optionally with its VLAN ID in the binding table and applies it to the interface. To display the IP+MAC ACL for an interface for the entire system, use the show ip dhcp snooping source-addressvalidation [interface] command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 301
13 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) This chapter describes configuring ECMP. This chapter describes configuring ECMP. Topics: • • ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity Link Bundle Monitoring ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity ECMP for flow-based affinity includes link bundle monitoring. Configuring the Hash Algorithm TeraScale has one algorithm that is used for link aggregation groups (LAGs), ECMP, and NH-ECMP, and ExaScale can use three different algorithms for each of these features.
PAGE 302
Configuring the Hash Algorithm Seed Deterministic ECMP sorts ECMPs in order even though RTM provides them in a random order. However, the hash algorithm uses as a seed the lower 12 bits of the chassis MAC, which yields a different hash result for every chassis. This behavior means that for a given flow, even though the prefixes are sorted, two unrelated chassis can select different hops.
PAGE 303
Managing ECMP Group Paths To avoid path degeneration, configure the maximum number of paths for an ECMP route that the L3 CAM can hold. When you do not configure the maximum number of routes, the CAM can hold a maximum ECMP per route. To configure the maximum number of paths, use the following command. NOTE: For the new settings to take effect, save the new ECMP settings to the startup-config (write-mem) then reload the system. ● Configure the maximum number of paths per ECMP group. CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 304
NOTE: An ecmp-group index is generated automatically for each unique ecmp-group when you configure multipath routes to the same network. The system can generate a maximum of 512 unique ecmp-groups. The ecmp-group indices are generated in even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6... 1022) and are for information only. You can configure ecmp-group with id 2 for link bundle monitoring. This ecmp-group is different from the ecmp-group index 2 that is created by configuring routes and is automatically generated.
PAGE 305
14 FIP Snooping The Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Transit feature is supported on Ethernet interfaces. When you enable the switch for FCoE transit, the switch functions as a FIP snooping bridge. NOTE: FIP snooping is not supported on Fibre Channel interfaces or in a switch stack.
PAGE 306
Table 30. FIP Functions FIP Function Description FIP VLAN discovery FCoE devices (ENodes) discover the FCoE VLANs on which to transmit and receive FIP and FCoE traffic. FIP discovery FCoE end-devices and FCFs are automatically discovered. Initialization FCoE devices learn ENodes from the FLOGI and FDISC to allow immediate login and create a virtual link with an FCoE switch. Maintenance A valid virtual link between an FCoE device and an FCoE switch is maintained and the LOGO functions properly.
PAGE 307
Port-based ACLs These ACLs are applied on all three port modes: on ports directly connected to an FCF, server-facing ENode ports, and bridge-to-bridge links. Port-based ACLs take precedence over global ACLs. FCoE-generated ACLs These take precedence over user-configured ACLs. A user-configured ACL entry cannot deny FCoE and FIP snooping frames. The following illustration shows a switch used as a FIP snooping bridge in a converged Ethernet network.
PAGE 308
● Process FIP VLAN discovery requests and responses, advertisements, solicitations, FLOGI/FDISC requests and responses, FLOGO requests and responses, keep-alive packets, and clear virtual-link messages. Using FIP Snooping There are four steps to configure FCoE transit. 1. 2. 3. 4. Enable the FCoE transit feature on a switch. Enable FIP snooping globally on all Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) or individual VLANs on a FIP snooping bridge.
PAGE 309
NOTE: Manually add the CAM-ACL space to the FCoE region as it is not applied by default. To support FIP-Snooping and set CAM-ACL, usecam-acl l2acl 4 ipv4acl 4 ipv6acl 0 ipv4qos 2 l2qos 1 l2pt 0 ipmacacl 0 vman-qos 0 ecfmacl 0 fcoeacl 2 command.
PAGE 310
Configure the FC-MAP Value You can configure the FC-MAP value to be applied globally by the switch on all or individual FCoE VLANs to authorize FCoE traffic. The configured FC-MAP value is used to check the FC-MAP value for the MAC address assigned to ENodes in incoming FCoE frames. If the FC-MAP value does not match, FCoE frames are dropped. A session between an ENode and an FCF is established by the switch-bridge only when the FC-MAP value on the FCF matches the FC-MAP value on the FIP snooping bridge.
PAGE 311
● The maximum number of FIP snooping sessions supported per ENode server is 32. To increase the maximum number of sessions to 64, use the fip-snooping max-sessions-per-enodemac command. ● The maximum number of FCFs supported per FIP snooping-enabled VLAN is twelve. ● When FCoE is configured on fanned-out ports or unusable 100G ports, traffic outage occurs for about 45 seconds. Configuring FIP Snooping You can enable FIP snooping globally on all FCoE VLANs on a switch or on an individual FCoE VLAN.
PAGE 312
Table 32. Displaying FIP Snooping Information (continued) Command Output show fip-snooping enode [enode-mac-address] Displays information on the ENodes in FIP-snooped sessions, including the ENode interface and MAC address, FCF MAC address, VLAN ID and FC-ID. show fip-snooping fcf [fcf-mac-address] Displays information on the FCFs in FIP-snooped sessions, including the FCF interface and MAC address, FCF interface, VLAN ID, FC-MAP value, FKA advertisement period, and number of ENodes connected.
PAGE 313
Table 33. show fip-snooping sessions Command Description (continued) Field Description Port WWPN Worldwide port name of the CNA port. Port WWNN Worldwide node name of the CNA port. The following example shows the show fip-snooping config command.
PAGE 314
Table 35. show fip-snooping fcf Command Description (continued) Field Description FC-ID Fibre Channel session ID assigned by the FCF. The following example shows the show fip-snooping statistics interface vlan command (VLAN and port).
PAGE 315
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number of of of of of of of FDISC Rejects FLOGO Accepts FLOGO Rejects CVL FCF Discovery Timeouts VN Port Session Timeouts Session failures due to Hardware Config :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 The following table describes the show fip-snooping statistics command fields. Table 36. show fip-snooping statistics Command Descriptions Field Description Number of VLAN Requests Number of FIP-snooped VLAN request frames received on the interface.
PAGE 316
Table 36. show fip-snooping statistics Command Descriptions (continued) Field Description Number of Session failures due to Hardware Config Number of session failures due to hardware configuration that occurred on the interface. The following example shows the show fip-snooping system command. DellEMC# show fip-snooping system Global Mode : Enabled FCOE VLAN List (Operational) : 1, 100 FCFs : 1 Enodes : 2 Sessions : 17 The following example shows the show fip-snooping vlan command.
PAGE 317
The DCBx configuration on the FCF-facing port is detected by the server-facing port and the DCB PFC configuration on both ports is synchronized. For more information about how to configure DCBx and PFC on a port, refer to the Data Center Bridging (DCB) chapter. The following example shows how to configure FIP snooping on FCoE VLAN 10, on an FCF-facing port (1/5/1), on an ENode server-facing port (1/1/1), and to configure the FIP snooping ports as tagged members of the FCoE VLAN enabled for FIP snooping.
PAGE 318
15 Flex Hash and Optimized Boot-Up This chapter describes the Flex Hash and fast-boot enhancements. Topics: • • • • • • • Flex Hash Capability Overview Configuring the Flex Hash Mechanism Configuring Fast Boot and LACP Fast Switchover Optimizing the Boot Time Interoperation of Applications with Fast Boot and System States RDMA Over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) Overview Preserving 802.
PAGE 319
Flex hash APIs do not mask out unwanted byte values after extraction of the data from the Layer 4 headers for the offset value. 2. Use the load-balance flexhash command to specify whether IPv4 or IPv6 packets must be subjected to the flex hash functionality, a unique protocol number, the offset of hash fields from the start of the L4 header to be used for hash calculation, and a meaningful description to associate the protocol number with the name.
PAGE 320
unexpected shutdown) from an older release of Dell EMC Networking OS to Release 9.3(0.0) or later. Dell EMC recommends that you do not downgrade your system from Release 9.3(0.0) to an earlier release that does not support the fast boot functionality because the system behavior is unexpected and undefined. ● Fast boot uses the Symmetric Multiprocessing (SMP) utility that is enabled on the Intel CPU on the device to enhance the speed of the system startup. SMP is supported on the device.
PAGE 321
A file is generated to indicate that the system is undergoing a fast boot, which is used after the system comes up. After the Dell EMC Networking OS image is loaded and activated, and the appropriate software components come up, the following additional actions are performed: ● If a database of dynamic ARP entries is present on the flash drive, that information is read and the ARP entries are restored; the entries are installed on the switch as soon as possible.
PAGE 322
Unexpected Reload of the System When an unexpected or unplanned reload occurs, such as a reset caused by the software, the system performs the regular boot sequence even if it is configured for fast boot. When the system comes up, dynamic ARP or ND database entries are not present or required to be restored. The system boot up mode will not be fast boot and actions specific to this mode will not be performed.
PAGE 323
RDMA Over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) Overview This functionality is supported on the platform. RDMA is a technology that a virtual machine (VM) uses to directly transfer information to the memory of another VM, thus enabling VMs to be connected to storage networks. With RoCE, RDMA enables data to be forwarded without passing through the CPU and the main memory path of TCP/IP.
PAGE 324
except the Layer 2 and Layer 3 control frames. It is not required for a VLAN ID to be preserved (in the hardware or the OS application) when a VLAN ID, used for encapsulation, is associated with a physical/Port-channel interface. Normal VLANs and VLAN encapsulation can exist simultaneously and any non-unicast traffic received on a normal VLAN is not flooded using lite subinterfaces whose encapsulation VLAN ID matches with that of the normal VLAN ID.
PAGE 325
16 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP provides fast network convergence to Layer 2 switches interconnected in a ring topology, such as a metropolitan area network (MAN) or large campuses. FRRP is similar to what can be achieved with the spanning tree protocol (STP), though even with optimizations, STP can take up to 50 seconds to converge (depending on the size of network and node of failure) and may require 4 to 5 seconds to reconverge.
PAGE 326
Ring Status The ring failure notification and the ring status checks provide two ways to ensure the ring remains up and active in the event of a switch or port failure. Ring Checking At specified intervals, the Master node sends a ring health frame (RHF) through the ring. If the ring is complete, the frame is received on its secondary port and the Master node resets its fail-period timer and continues normal operation.
PAGE 327
Figure 39. Example of Multiple Rings Connected by Single Switch Important FRRP Points FRRP provides a convergence time that can generally range between 150ms and 1500ms for Layer 2 networks. The Master node originates a high-speed frame that circulates around the ring. This frame, appropriately, sets up or breaks down the ring. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The Master node transmits ring status check frames at specified intervals. You can run multiple physical rings on the same switch.
PAGE 328
Important FRRP Concepts The following table lists some important FRRP concepts. Concept Explanation Ring ID Each ring has a unique 8-bit ring ID through which the ring is identified (for example, FRRP 101 and FRRP 202, as shown in the illustration in Member VLAN Spanning Two Rings Connected by One Switch. Control VLAN Each ring has a unique Control VLAN through which tagged ring health frames (RHF) are sent. Control VLANs are used only for sending RHF, and cannot be used for any other purpose.
PAGE 329
● ● ● ● The control VLAN cannot have members that are not ring ports. If multiple rings share one or more member VLANs, they cannot share any links between them. Member VLANs across multiple rings are not supported in Master nodes. Each ring has only one Master node; all others are transit nodes. FRRP Configuration These are the tasks to configure FRRP.
PAGE 330
Interface: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. 3. Assign the Primary and Secondary ports and the control VLAN for the ports on the ring. CONFIG-FRRP mode.
PAGE 331
VLAN ID: Identification number of the Control VLAN. 4. Configure a Transit node. CONFIG-FRRP mode. mode transit 5. Identify the Member VLANs for this FRRP group. CONFIG-FRRP mode. member-vlan vlan-id {range} VLAN-ID, Range: VLAN IDs for the ring’s Member VLANs. 6. Enable this FRRP group on this switch. CONFIG-FRRP mode. no disable Setting the FRRP Timers To set the FRRP timers, use the following command. NOTE: Set the Dead-Interval time 3 times the Hello-Interval.
PAGE 332
show frrp ring-id Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. ● Show the state of all FRRP groups. EXEC or EXEC PRIVELEGED mode. show frrp summary Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Troubleshooting FRRP To troubleshoot FRRP, use the following information. Configuration Checks ● ● ● ● ● Each Control Ring must use a unique VLAN ID. Only two interfaces on a switch can be Members of the same control VLAN. There can be only one Master node for any FRRP group. You can configure FRRP on Layer 2 interfaces only.
PAGE 333
switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/11/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 101 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/14/1,11/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 201 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/14/1,11/1 no shutdown ! protocol frrp 101 interface primary TenGigabitEthernet 1/14/1 secondary TenGigabitEthernet 1/11/1 control-vlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode transit no disable Example of R3 TRANSIT interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/14/1 no ip address switchport no
PAGE 334
Figure 40. FRRP Ring Connecting VLT Devices You can also configure an FRRP ring where both the VLT peers are connected to the FRRP ring and the VLTi acts as the primary interface for the FRRP Master and transit nodes. This active-active FRRP configuration blocks the FRRP ring on a per VLAN or VLAN group basis enabling the configuration to spawn across different set of VLANs.
PAGE 335
control VLAN, multiple member VLANS are configured (for example, M1 to M10) that carry the data traffic across the FRRP rings. The secondary port P2 is tagged to the control VLAN (V1). VLTi is implicitly tagged to the member VLANs when these VLANs are configured in the VLT peer. As a result of the VLT Node2 configuration on R2, the secondary interface P2 is blocked for the member VLANs (M11 to Mn). Following figure illustrated the FRRP Ring R1 topology: Figure 41.
PAGE 336
17 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) VLAN registration protocol (GVRP), defined by the IEEE 802.1q specification, is a Layer 2 network protocol that provides for automatic VLAN configuration of switches. GVRP-compliant switches use GARP to register and de-register attribute values, such as VLAN IDs, with each other.
PAGE 337
Configure GVRP To begin, enable GVRP. To facilitate GVRP communications, enable GVRP globally on each switch. Then, GVRP configuration is per interface on a switch-by-switch basis. Enable GVRP on each port that connects to a switch where you want GVRP information exchanged. In the following example, GVRP is configured on VLAN trunk ports. Figure 42. Global GVRP Configuration Example Basic GVRP configuration is a two-step process: 1. Enabling GVRP Globally 2.
PAGE 338
gvrp enable DellEMC(conf)#protocol gvrp DellEMC(config-gvrp)#no disable DellEMC(config-gvrp)#show config ! protocol gvrp no disable DellEMC(config-gvrp)# To inspect the global configuration, use the show gvrp brief command. Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface To enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface, use the following command. ● Enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface.
PAGE 339
no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/21/1)# Configure a GARP Timer Set GARP timers to the same values on all devices that are exchanging information using GVRP. There are three GARP timer settings. ● Join — A GARP device reliably transmits Join messages to other devices by sending each Join message two times. To define the interval between the two sending operations of each Join message, use this parameter. The Dell EMC Networking OS default is 200ms.
PAGE 340
18 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Internet group management protocol (IGMP) is a Layer 3 multicast protocol that hosts use to join or leave a multicast group. Multicast is premised on identifying many hosts by a single destination IP address; hosts represented by the same IP address are a multicast group. Multicast routing protocols (such as protocol-independent multicast [PIM]) use the information in IGMP messages to discover which groups are active and to populate the multicast routing table.
PAGE 341
Figure 43. IGMP Messages in IP Packets Join a Multicast Group There are two ways that a host may join a multicast group: it may respond to a general query from its querier or it may send an unsolicited report to its querier. Responding to an IGMP Query The following describes how a host can join a multicast group. 1. One router on a subnet is elected as the querier. The querier periodically multicasts (to all-multicast-systems address 224.0.0.1) a general query to all hosts on the subnet. 2.
PAGE 342
IGMP Version 3 Conceptually, IGMP version 3 behaves the same as version 2. However, there are differences. ● Version 3 adds the ability to filter by multicast source, which helps multicast routing protocols avoid forwarding traffic to subnets where there are no interested receivers. ● To enable filtering, routers must keep track of more state information, that is, the list of sources that must be filtered.
PAGE 343
Joining and Filtering Groups and Sources The following illustration shows how multicast routers maintain the group and source information from unsolicited reports. 1. The first unsolicited report from the host indicates that it wants to receive traffic for group 224.1.1.1. 2. The host’s second report indicates that it is only interested in traffic from group 224.1.1.1, source 10.11.1.1. Include messages prevents traffic from all other sources in the group from reaching the subnet.
PAGE 344
Leaving and Staying in Groups The following illustration shows how multicast routers track and refresh state changes in response to group-and-specific and general queries. 1. Host 1 sends a message indicating it is leaving group 224.1.1.1 and that the included filter for 10.11.1.1 and 10.11.1.2 are no longer necessary. 2.
PAGE 345
● ● ● ● ● ● Adjusting Timers Preventing a Host from Joining a Group Enabling IGMP Immediate-Leave IGMP Snooping Fast Convergence after MSTP Topology Changes Designating a Multicast Router Interface Viewing IGMP Enabled Interfaces Interfaces that are enabled with PIM-SM are automatically enabled with IGMP. To view IGMP-enabled interfaces, use the following command. ● View IGMP-enabled IPv4 interfaces. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp interface ● View IGMP-enabled IPv6 interfaces.
PAGE 346
ip igmp version DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/13/1)#ip igmp version 3 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/13/1)#do show ip igmp interface GigabitEthernet 1/13/1 is up, line protocol is down Inbound IGMP access group is not set Interface IGMP group join rate limit is not set Internet address is 1.1.1.
PAGE 347
The maximum response time is the amount of time that the querier waits for a response to a query before taking further action. The querier advertises this value in the query (refer to the illustration in IGMP Version 2). Lowering this value decreases leave latency but increases response burstiness because all host membership reports must be sent before the maximum response time expires. Inversely, increasing this value decreases burstiness at the expense of leave latency.
PAGE 348
If you enable IGMP snooping on a VLT unit, IGMP snooping dynamically learned groups and multicast router ports are made to learn on the peer by explicitly tunneling the received IGMP control packets. IGMP Snooping Implementation Information ● IGMP snooping on Dell EMC Networking OS uses IP multicast addresses not MAC addresses.
PAGE 349
shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)# Disabling Multicast Flooding If the switch receives a multicast packet that has an IP address of a group it has not learned (unregistered frame), the switch floods that packet out of all ports on the VLAN. When you configure the no ip igmp snooping flood command, the system drops the packets immediately. The system does not forward the frames on mrouter ports, even if they are present.
PAGE 350
Fast Convergence after MSTP Topology Changes When a port transitions to the Forwarding state as a result of an STP or MSTP topology change, Dell EMC Networking OS sends a general query out of all ports except the multicast router ports. The host sends a response to the general query and the forwarding database is updated without having to wait for the query interval to expire.
PAGE 351
Table 37.
PAGE 352
panel port IP on the peer box is initiated via management port only, if the management port is UP and management route is available.
PAGE 353
● TFTP is an exception to the preceding logic. ● For TFTP, data transfer is initiated on port 69, but the data transfer ports are chosen independently by the sender and receiver during initialization of the connection. The ports are chosen at random according to the parameters of the networking stack, typically from the range of temporary ports. ● If route lookup in EIS routing table succeeds, the application-specific packet count is incremented.
PAGE 354
Handling of Transit Traffic (Traffic Separation) This is forwarded traffic where destination IP is not an IP address configured in the switch. ● Packets received on the management port with destination on the front-end port is dropped. ● Packets received on the front-end port with destination on the management port is dropped. ● A separate drop counter is incremented for this case. This counter is viewed using the netstat command, like all other IP layer counters.
PAGE 355
This phenomenon occurs where traffic is originating from the switch. 1. Management Applications (Applications that are configured as management applications): The management port is an egress port for management applications. If the management port is down or the destination is not reachable through the management port (next hop ARP is not resolved, and so on), and if the destination is reachable through a data port, then the management application traffic is sent out through the front-end data port.
PAGE 356
EIS Behavior: If source TCP or UDP port matches an EIS management or a non-EIS management application and source IP address is management port IP address, management port is the preferred egress port selected based on route lookup in EIS table. If the management port is down or the route lookup fails, packets are dropped. If the source TCP/UDP port or source IP address does not match the management port IP address, a route lookup is done in the default routing table.
PAGE 357
Designating a Multicast Router Interface To designate an interface as a multicast router interface, use the following command. Dell EMC Networking OS also has the capability of listening in on the incoming IGMP general queries and designate those interfaces as the multicast router interface when the frames have a non-zero IP source address. All IGMP control packets and IP multicast data traffic originating from receivers is forwarded to multicast router interfaces.
PAGE 358
19 Interfaces This chapter describes interface types, both physical and logical, and how to configure them with Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS). The system supports 10 Gigabit Ethernet and 40 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. NOTE: Only Dell-qualified optics are supported on these interfaces. Non-Dell 40G optics are set to error-disabled state.
PAGE 359
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Defining Interface Range Macros Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces Non Dell-Qualified Transceivers Splitting 40G Ports without Reload Splitting QSFP Ports to SFP+ Ports Converting a QSFP or QSFP+ Port to an SFP or SFP+ Port Configuring wavelength for 10–Gigabit SFP+ optics Link Dampening Link Bundle Monitoring Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control Configure the MTU Size on an Interface Port-Pipes Auto-Negotiation on Ethernet Interfaces View Advanced Interface Infor
PAGE 360
The following example shows the configuration and status information for one interface.
PAGE 361
no ip address shutdown Resetting an Interface to its Factory Default State You can reset the configurations applied on an interface to its factory default state. To reset the configuration, perform the following steps: 1. View the configurations applied on an interface. INTERFACE mode show config DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/5/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/5/1 no ip address portmode hybrid switchport rate-interval 8 mac learning-limit 10 no-station-move no shutdown 2.
PAGE 362
Physical Interfaces The Management Ethernet interface is a single RJ-45 Fast Ethernet port on a switch. The interface provides dedicated management access to the system. Stack-unit interfaces support Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic over the and 40-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. These interfaces can also become part of virtual interfaces such as virtual local area networks (VLANs) or port channels. For more information about VLANs, refer to Bulk Configuration.
PAGE 363
Overview of Layer Modes On all systems running Dell EMC Networking OS, you can place physical interfaces, port channels, and VLANs in Layer 2 mode or Layer 3 mode. By default, VLANs are in Layer 2 mode. Table 42.
PAGE 364
Configuring Layer 3 (Network) Mode When you assign an IP address to a physical interface, you place it in Layer 3 mode. To enable Layer 3 mode on an individual interface, use the following commands. In all interface types except VLANs, the shutdown command prevents all traffic from passing through the interface. In VLANs, the shutdown command prevents Layer 3 traffic from passing through the interface. Layer 2 traffic is unaffected by the shutdown command.
PAGE 365
Poison Reverse is disabled ICMP redirects are not sent ICMP unreachables are not sent IP unicast RPF check is not supported Automatic recovery of an Err-disabled interface The Dell EMC Networking OS attempts to recover the interface from the Err-disabled state automatically based on the cause of the error.
PAGE 366
Whenever the Err-disable recovery timer is reconfigured, it will get effective only after the current timer expires. Following message is displayed after each Err-disable recovery timer configuration: DellEMC(conf)# errdisable recovery interval 30 New timer interval will be effective from the next timer instance only. Following is the sample steps to configure the recovery cause and the timer interval for automatic recovery of an interface.
PAGE 367
Management Interfaces The system supports the Management Ethernet interface as well as the standard interface on any port. You can use either method to connect to the system. Configuring Management Interfaces The dedicated Management interface provides management access to the system. You can configure this interface using the CLI, but the configuration options on this interface are limited.
PAGE 368
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:06:14 Queueing strategy: fifo Input 791 packets, 62913 bytes, 775 multicast Received 0 errors, 0 discarded Output 21 packets, 3300 bytes, 20 multicast Output 0 errors, 0 invalid protocol Time since last interface status change: 00:06:03 If there are two RPMs on the system, configure each Management interface with a different IP address.
PAGE 369
DellEMC#show ip route Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, B - BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP,LO - Locally Originated, O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is 10.11.131.254 to network 0.0.0.0 Destination ----------*S 0.0.
PAGE 370
Loopback Interfaces A Loopback interface is a virtual interface in which the software emulates an interface. Packets routed to it are processed locally. Because this interface is not a physical interface, you can configure routing protocols on this interface to provide protocol stability. You can place Loopback interfaces in default Layer 3 mode. To configure, view, or delete a Loopback interface, use the following commands. ● Enter a number as the Loopback interface.
PAGE 371
Port Channel Interfaces Port channel interfaces support link aggregation, as described in IEEE Standard 802.3ad. This section covers the following topics: ● ● ● ● Port Channel Definition and Standards Port Channel Benefits Port Channel Implementation Configuration Tasks for Port Channel Interfaces Port Channel Definition and Standards Link aggregation is defined by IEEE 802.
PAGE 372
Interfaces in Port Channels When interfaces are added to a port channel, the interfaces must share a common speed. When interfaces have a configured speed different from the port channel speed, the software disables those interfaces. The common speed is determined when the port channel is first enabled. Then, the software checks the first interface listed in the port channel configuration. If you enabled that interface, its speed configuration becomes the common speed of the port channel.
PAGE 373
Adding a Physical Interface to a Port Channel The physical interfaces in a port channel can be on any line card in the chassis, but must be the same physical type. NOTE: Port channels can contain a mix of Ethernet interfaces, but Dell EMC Networking OS disables the interfaces that are not the same speed of the first channel member in the port channel (refer to 10/100/1000 Mbps Interfaces in Port Channels). You can add any physical interface to a port channel if the interface configuration is minimal.
PAGE 374
42 CRC, 0 IP Checksum, 0 overrun, 0 discarded 2456590833 packets output, 203958235255 bytes, 0 underruns Output 1640 Multicasts, 56612 Broadcasts, 2456532581 Unicasts 2456590654 IP Packets, 0 Vlans, 0 MPLS 0 throttles, 0 discarded Rate info (interval 5 minutes): Input 00.01Mbits/sec, 2 packets/sec Output 81.
PAGE 375
no ip address channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 1/8/1 shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-po-3)# Configuring the Minimum Oper Up Links in a Port Channel You can configure the minimum links in a port channel (LAG) that must be in “oper up” status to consider the port channel to be in “oper up” status. To set the “oper up” status of your links, use the following command. ● Enter the number of links in a LAG that must be in “oper up” status. INTERFACE mode minimum-links number The default is 1.
PAGE 376
INTERFACE mode DellEMC(conf-if)#switchport 3. Verify the manually configured VLAN membership (show interfaces switchport interface command).
PAGE 377
Dell EMC Networking OS allows you to modify the hashing algorithms used for flows and for fragments. The load-balance and hash-algorithm commands are available for modifying the distribution algorithms. Changing the Hash Algorithm The load-balance command selects the hash criteria applied to port channels. If you do not obtain even distribution with the load-balance command, you can use the hash-algorithm command to select the hash scheme for LAG, ECMP and NH-ECMP.
PAGE 378
Bulk Configuration Bulk configuration allows you to determine if interfaces are present for physical interfaces or configured for logical interfaces. Interface Range An interface range is a set of interfaces to which other commands may be applied and may be created if there is at least one valid interface within the range. Bulk configuration excludes from configuration any non-existing interfaces from an interface range.
PAGE 379
Create a Multiple-Range The following is an example of multiple range. Example of the interface range Command (Multiple Ranges) DellEMC(conf)#interface range tengigabitethernet 1/5/1 - 1/10/1 , tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 , vlan 1 DellEMC(conf-if-range-te-1/5/1-1/10/1,te-1/1/1,vl-1)# Exclude Duplicate Entries The following is an example showing how duplicate entries are omitted from the interface-range prompt.
PAGE 380
Add Ranges The following example shows how to use commas to add VLAN and port-channel interfaces to the range. Example of Adding VLAN and Port-Channel Interface Ranges DellEMC(config-if-range-te-1/1/1-1/2/1)# interface range Vlan 2 – 100 , Port 1 – 25 DellEMC(config-if-range-te-1/1/1-1/2/1-vl-2-100-po-1-25)# no shutdown Defining Interface Range Macros You can define an interface-range macro to automatically select a range of interfaces for configuration.
PAGE 381
○ For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ○ For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. The information displays in a continuous run, refreshing every 2 seconds by default. To manage the output, use the following keys.
PAGE 382
1. To test for cable faults on the TenGigabitEthernet cable. EXEC Privilege mode tdr-cable-test tengigabitethernet slot/port/subport Between two ports, do not start the test on both ends of the cable. Enable the interface before starting the test. Enable the port to run the test or the test prints an error message. 2. Displays TDR test results.
PAGE 383
stack-unit stack-unit number slot slot-number port port-number portmode quad The defaults ports are: 2,4,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,27,29,31 To display the Fan-out capability profile, use the following show command: show system stack-unit stack-unit number quad-port-profile Example of the show Command The following example shows the show system stack-unit stack-unit number quad-portprofile command.
PAGE 384
The following example shows the interface status before splitting a 40G interface: Dell# show interfaces status Port Description Status Speed Duplex Vlan Fo 1/15/1 Down 40000 Mbit Auto -Fo 1/16/1 Down 40000 Mbit Auto -The following example shows that when you split an interface on a 16X40G module, the subsequent even numbered interface is removed from the configuration. Dell(conf)# stack-unit 1 slot 3 port 15 portmode quad speed 10G Warning: Enabling Quad mode on stack-unit 1 slot 3 port 15.
PAGE 385
● Splitting a 40G port into four 10G ports is supported on standalone and stacked units. ● You cannot use split ports as stack-link to stack a system. To verify port splitting, use the show system stack-unit stack-unit-number fanout {count | configure} command. To verify port splitting, use the show system stack-unit stack—unit—number fanout {count | configure} command ● The quad port must be in a default configuration before you can split it into 4x10G ports.
PAGE 386
● You can use the QSA on any of the ports. Example Scenarios Consider the following scenarios: ● QSFP port 0 is connected to a QSA with SFP+ optical cables plugged in. ● QSFP port 4 is connected to a QSA with SFP optical cables plugged in. ● QSFP port 8 in fanned-out mode is plugged in with QSFP optical cables. ● QSFP port 12 in 40 G mode is plugged in with QSFP optical cables.
PAGE 387
SFP 4/1 Transceiver Code = 0x08 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 SFP 4/1 Encoding = 0x00 ……………… ……………… SFP 4/1 Diagnostic Information =================================== SFP 4/1 Rx Power measurement type = OMA =================================== SFP 4/1 Temp High Alarm threshold = 0.000C SFP 4/1 Voltage High Alarm threshold = 0.000V SFP 4/1 Bias High Alarm threshold = 0.
PAGE 388
Link dampening: ● reduces processing on the CPUs by reducing excessive interface flapping. ● improves network stability by penalizing misbehaving interfaces and redirecting traffic. ● improves convergence times and stability throughout the network by isolating failures so that disturbances are not propagated. Important Points to Remember ● ● ● ● Link dampening is not supported on VLAN interfaces. Link dampening is disabled when the interface is configured for port monitoring.
PAGE 389
Figure 48. Interface State Change Consider an interface periodically flaps as shown above. Every time the interface goes down, a penalty (1024) is added. In the above example, during the first interface flap (flap 1), the penalty is added to 1024. And, the accumulated penalty will exponentially decay based on the set half-life, which is set as 10 seconds in the above example. During the second interface flap (flap 2), again the penalty (1024) is accumulated.
PAGE 390
Enabling Link Dampening To enable link dampening, use the following command. ● Enable link dampening. INTERFACE mode dampening To view the link dampening configuration on an interface, use the show config command. R1(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 ip address 10.10.19.1/24 dampening 1 2 3 4 no shutdown To view dampening information on all or specific dampened interfaces, use the show interfaces dampening command from EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 391
Configure MTU Size on an Interface In Dell EMC Networking OS, Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is defined as the entire Ethernet packet (Ethernet header + FCS + payload). The following table lists the range for each transmission media. Transmission Media MTU Range (in bytes) Ethernet 592-9216 = link MTU 576-9398 = IP MTU The IP MTU automatically configures.
PAGE 392
The globally assigned 48-bit Multicast address 01-80-C2-00-00-01 is used to send and receive pause frames. To allow fullduplex flow control, stations implementing the pause operation instruct the MAC to enable reception of frames with destination address equal to this multicast address. The PAUSE frame is defined by IEEE 802.3x and uses MAC Control frames to carry the PAUSE commands. Ethernet pause frames are supported on full duplex only.
PAGE 393
The following table lists the various Layer 2 overheads found in Dell EMC Networking OS and the number of bytes. The MTU range is from 592 to 9216, with a default of 9216. IP MTU automatically configures. The following table lists the various Layer 2 overheads found in the Dell EMC Networking OS and the number of bytes. Table 43.
PAGE 394
Setting the Speed of Ethernet Interfaces To discover whether the remote and local interface requires manual speed synchronization, and to manually synchronize them if necessary, use the following command sequence. 1. Determine the local interface status. Refer to the following example. EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces [interface | stack—unit stack-unit-number] status 2. Determine the remote interface status.
PAGE 395
DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#speed 100 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#duplex full DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#no negotiation auto DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 no ip address speed 100 duplex full no shutdown Set Auto-Negotiation Options The negotiation auto command provides a mode option for configuring an individual port to forced master/ forced slave once auto-negotiation is enabled.
PAGE 396
View Advanced Interface Information The following options have been implemented for the show [ip | running-config] interfaces commands for (only) stack-unit interfaces. When you use the configured keyword, only interfaces that have non-default configurations are displayed. Dummy stack-unit interfaces (created with the stack-unit command) are treated like any other physical interface.
PAGE 397
Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 00:01:e8:01:9e:d9 Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 10000 Mbit ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 1d23h44m Queueing strategy: fifo 0 packets input, 0 bytes Input 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans 0 MPLS 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts Received 0 input symbol errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 IP Chec
PAGE 398
● ● ● ● IP ACL IP FIB L2 ACL L2 FIB Clearing Interface Counters The counters in the show interfaces command are reset by the clear counters command. This command does not clear the counters any SNMP program captures. To clear the counters, use the following the command. ● Clear the counters used in the show interface commands for all VRRP groups, VLANs, and physical interfaces or selected ones. Without an interface specified, the command clears all interface counters.
PAGE 399
Table 44.
PAGE 400
Table 44. Standard and Compressed Configurations Uncompressed Compressed ! interface Vlan 5 tagged te 1/1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address no shutdown ! interface Vlan 1000 ip address 1.1.1.1/16 no shutdown Uncompressed config size – 52 lines write memory compressed The write memory compressed CLI will write the operating configuration to the startup-config file in the compressed mode.
PAGE 401
20 IPv4 Routing The Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) supports various IP addressing features. This chapter describes the basics of domain name service (DNS), address resolution protocol (ARP), and routing principles and their implementation in the Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 402
IP Addresses Dell EMC Networking OS supports IP version 4 (as described in RFC 791), classful routing, and variable length subnet masks (VLSM). With VLSM, you can configure one network with different masks. Supernetting, which increases the number of subnets, is also supported. To subnet, you add a mask to the IP address to separate the network and host portions of the IP address.
PAGE 403
INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] ● ip-address mask: the IP address must be in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in slash prefixlength format (/24). ● secondary: add the keyword secondary if the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. You can configure up to eight secondary IP addresses. To view the configuration, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode or use the show ip interface command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the second example.
PAGE 404
S 6.1.2.7/32 S 6.1.2.8/32 S 6.1.2.9/32 S 6.1.2.10/32 S 6.1.2.11/32 S 6.1.2.12/32 S 6.1.2.13/32 S 6.1.2.14/32 S 6.1.2.15/32 S 6.1.2.16/32 S 6.1.2.17/32 S 11.1.1.0/24 Direct, Lo 0 --More-- via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.
PAGE 405
Configure Static Routes for the Management Interface When an IP address that a protocol uses and a static management route exists for the same prefix, the protocol route takes precedence over the static management route. To configure a static route for the management port, use the following command. ● Assign a static route to point to the management interface or forwarding router.
PAGE 406
occurs on the device. You can set the wait time to be 10 seconds or lower. If the device does not contain any BGP connections with the BGP neighbors across WAN links, you must set this interval to a higher value, depending on the complexity of your network and the configuration attributes. To configure the duration for which the device waits for the ACK packet to be sent from the requesting host to establish the TCP connection, perform the following steps: 1.
PAGE 407
ip name-server ip-address [ip-address2 ... ip-address6] The order you entered the servers determines the order of their use. To view current bindings, use the show hosts command. DellEMC>show host Default domain is force10networks.com Name/address lookup uses domain service Name servers are not set Host Flags TTL Type Address -------- ----- ------- ------ks (perm, OK) - IP 2.2.2.2 patch1 (perm, OK) - IP 192.68.69.2 tomm-3 (perm, OK) - IP 192.68.99.2 gxr (perm, OK) - IP 192.71.18.2 f00-3 (perm, OK) - IP 192.
PAGE 408
To keep the default setting for these parameters, press the ENTER key. The following text is example output of DNS using the traceroute command. DellEMC#traceroute www.force10networks.com Translating "www.force10networks.com"...domain server (10.11.0.1) [OK] Type Ctrl-C to abort. ---------------------------------------------------------------------Tracing the route to www.force10networks.com (10.11.84.
PAGE 409
○ ip-address: IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). ○ mac-address: MAC address in nnnn.nnnn.nnnn format. ○ interface: enter the interface type slot/port information. For 10G interfaces, enter the slot/port[/subport] information. These entries do not age and can only be removed manually. To remove a static ARP entry, use the no arp ip-address command. To view the static entries in the ARP cache, use the show arp static command in EXEC privilege mode.
PAGE 410
● detect IP address conflicts ● inform switches of their presence on a port so that packets can be forwarded ● update the ARP table of other nodes on the network in case of an address change In the request, the host uses its own IP address in the Sender Protocol Address and Target Protocol Address fields. Enabling ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP To enable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, use the following command. ● Enable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP.
PAGE 411
Whether you enable or disable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system does not look up the target IP. It only updates the ARP entry for the Layer 3 interface with the source IP of the request. Configuring ARP Retries You can configure the number of ARP retries. The default backoff interval remains at 20 seconds. To set and display ARP retries, use the following commands. ● Set the number of ARP retries. CONFIGURATION mode arp retries number The default is 5. The range is from 1 to 20.
PAGE 412
To view if ICMP unreachable messages are sent on the interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode. If it is not listed in the show config command output, it is enabled. Only non-default information is displayed in the show config command output. ICMP Redirects When a host sends a packet to a destination, it sends the packet to the configured default gateway.
PAGE 413
UDP Helper User datagram protocol (UDP) helper allows you to direct the forwarding IP/UDP broadcast traffic by creating special broadcast addresses and rewriting the destination IP address of packets to match those addresses. Configure UDP Helper To configure Dell EMC Networking OS to direct UDP broadcast, enable UDP helper and specify the UDP ports for which traffic is forwarded.
PAGE 414
1. Packet 1 is dropped at ingress if you did not configure UDP helper address. 2. If you enable UDP helper (using the ip udp-helper udp-port command), and the UDP destination port of the packet matches the UDP port configured, the system changes the destination address to the configured broadcast 1.1.255.255 and routes the packet to VLANs 100 and 101.
PAGE 415
UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses Incoming packets with a destination IP address matching the configured broadcast address of any interface are forwarded to the matching interfaces. In the following illustration, Packet 1 has a destination IP address that matches the configured broadcast address of VLAN 100 and 101. If you enabled UDP helper and the UDP port number matches, the packet is flooded on both VLANs with an unchanged destination address. Packet 2 is sent from a host on VLAN 101.
PAGE 416
2017-08-05 11:59:35 %RELAY-I-BOOTREQUEST, Forwarded BOOTREQUEST for 00:02:2D:8D:46:DC to 137.138.17.6 2017-08-05 11:59:36 %RELAY-I-PACKET, BOOTP REPLY (Unicast) received at interface 194.12.129.98 BOOTP Reply, XID = 0x9265f901, secs = 0 hwaddr = 00:02:2D:8D:46:DC, giaddr = 172.21.50.193, hops = 2 2017-08-05 11:59:36 %RELAY-I-BOOTREPLY, Forwarded BOOTREPLY for 00:02:2D:8D:46:DC to 128.141.128.90 Packet 0.0.0.0:68 -> 255.255.255.
PAGE 417
21 IPv6 Routing Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) routing is the successor to IPv4. Due to the rapid growth in internet users and IP addresses, IPv4 is reaching its maximum usage. IPv6 will eventually replace IPv4 usage to allow for the constant expansion. This chapter provides a brief description of the differences between IPv4 and IPv6, and the Dell EMC Networking support of IPv6. This chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive description of IPv6.
PAGE 418
● Prefix Renumbering — Useful in transparent renumbering of hosts in the network when an organization changes its service provider. NOTE: As an alternative to stateless autoconfiguration, network hosts can obtain their IPv6 addresses using the dynamic host control protocol (DHCP) servers via stateful auto-configuration. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking OS provides the flexibility to add prefixes on Router Advertisements (RA) to advertise responses to Router Solicitations (RS).
PAGE 419
● Partition will take effect only after the switch reboot. During the reboot Dell EMC Networking OS reads the partition configuration from NVRAM and uses the same for partitioning the LPM. ● A command has been introduced to partition the LPM to support provisioning of IPv6 /65 to /128 route prefixes. To support /65 – /128 IPv6 route prefix entries, Dell EMC Networking OS needs to be programmed with /65 - /128 bit IPv6 support. The number of entries as well needs to be explicitly programmed.
PAGE 420
Version (4 bits) The Version field always contains the number 6, referring to the packet’s IP version. Traffic Class (8 bits) The Traffic Class field deals with any data that needs special handling. These bits define the packet priority and are defined by the packet Source. Sending and forwarding routers use this field to identify different IPv6 classes and priorities. Routers understand the priority settings and handle them appropriately during conditions of congestion.
PAGE 421
Hop Limit (8 bits) The Hop Limit field shows the number of hops remaining for packet processing. In IPv4, this is known as the Time to Live (TTL) field and uses seconds rather than hops. Each time the packet moves through a forwarding router, this field decrements by 1. If a router receives a packet with a Hop Limit of 1, it decrements it to 0 (zero). The router discards the packet and sends an ICMPv6 message back to the sending router indicating that the Hop Limit was exceeded in transit.
PAGE 422
11 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem, Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address only if the Destination IP Address is not a multicast address. The second byte contains the Option Data Length. The third byte specifies whether the information can change en route to the destination. The value is 1 if it can change; the value is 0 if it cannot change.
PAGE 423
Implementing IPv6 with Dell EMC Networking OS Dell EMC Networking OS supports both IPv4 and IPv6 and both may be used simultaneously in your system. The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS version in which an IPv6 feature became available for each platform. The sections following the table give greater detail about the feature. Table 45.
PAGE 424
Table 45. Dell EMC Networking OS versions and supported platforms with IPv6 support (continued) Feature and Functionality Documentation and Chapter Location IPv6 IS-IS in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. OSPF for IPv6 (OSPFv3) OSPFv3 in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 425
Path MTU discovery The size of the packet that can be sent across each hop in the network path without being fragmented is called the path maximum transmission unit (PMTU). The PMTU value might differ for the same route between two devices, mainly over a public network, depending on the network load and speed, and it is not a consistent value. The MTU size can also be different for various types of traffic sent from one host to the same endpoint.
PAGE 426
Figure 57. NDP Router Redirect IPv6 Neighbor Discovery of MTU Packets You can set the MTU advertised through the RA packets to incoming routers, without altering the actual MTU setting on the interface. The ipv6 nd mtu command sets the value advertised to routers. It does not set the actual MTU rate. For example, if you set ipv6 nd mtu to 1280, the interface still passes 1500-byte packets, if that is what is set with the mtu command.
PAGE 427
resolution DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#ipv6 nd dns-server 1000::1 1 Debugging IPv6 RDNSS Information Sent to the Host To verify that the IPv6 RDNSS information sent to the host is configured correctly, use the debug ipv6 nd command in EXEC Privilege mode. Example of Debugging IPv6 RDNSS Information Sent to the Host The following example debugs IPv6 RDNSS information sent to the host.
PAGE 428
IPv6 hop limit for originated packets ND dns-server address is 1000::1 with ND dns-server address is 3000::1 with ND dns-server address is 2000::1 with IP unicast RPF check is not supported is 64 lifetime of 1 seconds lifetime of 1 seconds lifetime of 0 seconds To display IPv6 RDNSS information, use the show configuration command in INTERFACE CONFIG mode. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#show configuration The following example uses the show configuration command to display IPv6 RDNSS information.
PAGE 429
CONFIGURATION mode cam-acl { ipv6acl } When not selecting the default option, enter all of the profiles listed and a range for each. The total space allocated must equal 13. The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2. ● Show the current CAM settings. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show cam-acl ● Provides information on FP groups allocated for the egress acl. CONFIGURATION mode show cam-acl-egress Allocate at least one group for L2ACL and IPv4 ACL. The total number of groups is 4.
PAGE 430
○ forwarding router: forwarding router’s address ○ tag: route tag Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ For For For For For For a a a a a a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
PAGE 431
mld mroute neighbors ospf pim prefix-list route rpf DellEMC# MLD information IPv6 multicast-routing table IPv6 neighbor information OSPF information PIM V6 information List IPv6 prefix lists IPv6 routing information RPF table Displaying an IPv6 Interface Information To view the IPv6 configuration for a specific interface, use the following command. ● Show the currently running configuration for the specified interface.
PAGE 432
The following keywords are available: ○ To display information about a network, enter ipv6 address (X:X:X:X::X). ○ To display information about a host, enter hostname. ○ To display information about all IPv6 routes (including non-active routes), enter all. ○ To display information about all connected IPv6 routes, enter connected. ○ To display information about brief summary of all IPv6 routes, enter summary. ○ To display information about Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) routes, enter bgp.
PAGE 433
Showing the Running-Configuration for an Interface To view the configuration for any interface, use the following command. ● Show the currently running configuration for the specified interface. EXEC mode show running-config interface type {slot/port[/subport]} Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information: ○ For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 434
Configuring IPv6 RA Guard The IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) guard allows you to block or reject the unwanted router advertisement guard messages that arrive at the network device platform. To configure the IPv6 RA guard, perform the following steps: 1. Configure the terminal to enter the Global Configuration mode. EXEC Privilege mode configure terminal 2. Enable the IPv6 RA guard. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 nd ra-guard enable 3. Create the policy.
PAGE 435
reachable—time value The reachability time range is from 0 to 3,600,000 milliseconds. 14. Set the advertised retransmission time. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode retrans—timer value The retransmission time range is from 100 to 4,294,967,295 milliseconds. 15. Display the configurations applied on the RA guard policy mode.
PAGE 436
EXEC Privilege mode debug ipv6 nd ra-guard [interface slot/port[/subport] | count value] The count range is from 1 to 65534. The default is infinity. For a complete listing of all commands related to IPv6 RA Guard, see the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 437
22 iSCSI Optimization This chapter describes how to configure internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization, which enables qualityof-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI traffic.
PAGE 438
NOTE: After a switch is reloaded, powercycled, or upgraded, the system may display the ACL_AGENT-3ISCSI_OPT_MAX_SESS_LIMIT_REACHED: Monitored iSCSI sessions reached maximum limit log message. This cannot be inferred as the maximum supported iSCSI sessions are reached. Also, number of iSCSI sessions displayed on the system may show any number equal to or less than the maximum.
PAGE 439
Application of Quality of Service to iSCSI Traffic Flows You can configure iSCSI CoS mode. This mode controls whether CoS (dot1p priority) queue assignment and/or packet marking is performed on iSCSI traffic. When you enable iSCSI CoS mode, the CoS policy is applied to iSCSI traffic. When you disable iSCSI CoS mode, iSCSI sessions and connections are still detected and displayed in the status tables, but no CoS policy is applied to iSCSI traffic.
PAGE 440
Detection and Auto-Configuration for Dell EqualLogic Arrays The iSCSI optimization feature includes auto-provisioning support with the ability to detect directly connected Dell EqualLogic storage arrays and automatically reconfigure the switch to enhance storage traffic flows. The switch uses the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) to discover Dell EqualLogic devices on the network. LLDP is enabled by default. For more information about LLDP, refer to Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP).
PAGE 441
● Additional updates to connections (including aging updates) that are learnt on VLT lag members are synced to the peer. ● When receiving an iSCSI login request on a non-VLT interface followed by a response from a VLT interface, the session is not synced since it is initially learnt on a non-VLT interface through the request packet. ● The peer generates a new connection log that sees the login response packet.
PAGE 442
Table 46. iSCSI Optimization Defaults (continued) Parameter Default Value iSCSI optimization target ports iSCSI well-known ports 3260 and 860 are configured as default (with no IP address or name) but can be removed as any other configured target. iSCSI session monitoring Disabled. The CAM allocation for iSCSI is set to zero (0). iSCSI Optimization Prerequisites The following are iSCSI optimization prerequisites. ● iSCSI optimization requires LLDP on the switch.
PAGE 443
CONFIGURATION mode [no] iscsi target port tcp-port-1 [tcp-port-2...tcp-port-16] [ip-address address] ● tcp-port-n is the TCP port number or a list of TCP port numbers on which the iSCSI target listens to requests. You can configure up to 16 target TCP ports on the switch in one command or multiple commands. The default is 860, 3260. Separate port numbers with a comma.
PAGE 444
Displaying iSCSI Optimization Information To display information on iSCSI optimization, use the following show commands. ● Display the currently configured iSCSI settings. show iscsi ● Display information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch. show iscsi sessions ● Display detailed information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch . To display detailed information on specified iSCSI session, enter the session’s iSCSI ID.
PAGE 445
Initiator:iqn.2010-11.com.ixia.ixload:initiator-iscsi-2c Up Time:00:00:01:28(DD:HH:MM:SS) Time for aging out:00:00:09:34(DD:HH:MM:SS) ISID:806978696102 Initiator Initiator Target Target Connection IP Address TCP Port IP Address TCPPort ID 10.10.0.53 33432 10.10.0.
PAGE 446
23 Intermediate System to Intermediate System The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. Dell EMC Networking supports both IPv4 and IPv6 versions of IS-IS.
PAGE 447
Figure 59. ISO Address Format Multi-Topology IS-IS Multi-topology IS-IS (MT IS-IS) allows you to create multiple IS-IS topologies on a single router with separate databases. Use this feature to place a virtual physical topology into logical routing domains, which can each support different routing and security policies. All routers on a LAN or point-to-point must have at least one common supported topology when operating in Multi-Topology ISIS mode.
PAGE 448
Graceful Restart Graceful restart is a protocol-based mechanism that preserves the forwarding table of the restarting router and its neighbors for a specified period to minimize the loss of packets. A graceful-restart router does not immediately assume that a neighbor is permanently down and so does not trigger a topology change. Normally, when an IS-IS router is restarted, temporary disruption of routing occurs due to events in both the restarting router and the neighbors of the restarting router.
PAGE 449
● ● ● ● Processes IPv6 information received in the PDUs. Computes routes to IPv6 destinations. Downloads IPv6 routes to the RTM for installing in the FIB. Accepts external IPv6 information and advertises this information in the PDUs. The following table lists the default IS-IS values. Table 47.
PAGE 450
In IS-IS, neighbors form adjacencies only when they are same IS type. For example, a Level 1 router never forms an adjacency with a Level 2 router. A Level 1-2 router forms Level 1 adjacencies with a neighboring Level 1 router and forms Level 2 adjacencies with a neighboring Level 2 router. NOTE: Even though you enable IS-IS globally, enable the IS-IS process on an interface for the IS-IS process to exchange protocol information and form adjacencies. To configure IS-IS globally, use the following commands.
PAGE 451
To view the IS-IS configuration, enter the show isis protocol command in EXEC Privilege mode or the show config command in ROUTER ISIS mode. DellEMC#show isis protocol IS-IS Router: System Id: EEEE.EEEE.EEEE IS-Type: level-1-2 Manual area address(es): 47.0004.004d.0001 Routing for area address(es): 21.2223.2425.2627.2829.3031.3233 47.0004.004d.
PAGE 452
2. Exclude this router from other router’s SPF calculations. ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode set-overload-bit 3. Set the minimum interval between SPF calculations. ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode spf-interval [level-l | level-2 | interval] [initial_wait_interval [second_wait_interval]] Use this command for IPv6 route computation only when you enable multi-topology. If using single-topology mode, to apply to both IPv4 and IPv6 route computations, use the spf-interval command in CONFIG ROUTER ISIS mode. 4.
PAGE 453
graceful-restart t3 {adjacency | manual seconds} ○ adjacency: the restarting router receives the remaining time value from its peer and adjusts its T3 value so if user has configured this option. ○ manual: allows you to specify a fixed value that the restarting router should use. The range is from 50 to 120 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. NOTE: If this timer expires before the synchronization has completed, the restarting router sends the overload bit in the LSP.
PAGE 454
Restart Capable Neighbors: 2, In Start: 0, In Restart: 0 DellEMC# Changing LSP Attributes IS-IS routers flood link state PDUs (LSPs) to exchange routing information. LSP attributes include the generation interval, maximum transmission unit (MTU) or size, and the refresh interval. You can modify the LSP attribute defaults, but it is not necessary. To change the defaults, use any or all of the following commands. ● Set interval between LSP generation.
PAGE 455
example, if you configure the metric as narrow, and a link state PDU (LSP) with wide metrics is received, the route is not installed. Dell EMC Networking OS supports the following IS-IS metric styles. Table 48. Metric Styles Metric Style Characteristics Cost Range Supported on IS-IS Interfaces narrow Sends and accepts narrow or old TLVs (Type, Length, Value). 0 to 63 wide Sends and accepts wide or new TLVs. 0 to 16777215 transition Sends both wide (new) and narrow (old) TLVs.
PAGE 456
○ default-metric: the range is from 0 to 63 if the metric-style is narrow, narrow-transition, or transition. The range is from 0 to 16777215 if the metric style is wide or wide transition. ● Assign a metric for an IPv6 link or interface. INTERFACE mode isis ipv6 metric default-metric [level-1 | level-2] ○ default-metric: the range is from 0 to 63 for narrow and transition metric styles. The range is from 0 to 16777215 for wide metric styles. The default is 10. The default level is level-1.
PAGE 457
The default is Level 1-2 router. When the IS-type is Level 1-2, the software maintains two Link State databases, one for each level. To view the Link State databases, use the show isis database command. DellEMC#show isis database IS-IS Level-1 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum B233.00-00 0x00000003 0x07BF eljefe.00-00 * 0x00000009 0xF76A eljefe.01-00 * 0x00000001 0x68DF eljefe.02-00 * 0x00000001 0x2E7F Force10.
PAGE 458
○ For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. ● Apply a configured prefix list to all outgoing IPv4 IS-IS routes. ROUTER ISIS mode distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp as-number | connected | ospf process-id | rip | static] You can configure one of the optional parameters: ○ connected: for directly connected routes. ○ ospf process-id: for OSPF routes only. ○ rip: for RIP routes only. ○ static: for user-configured routes. ○ bgp: for BGP routes only.
PAGE 459
Redistributing IPv4 Routes In addition to filtering routes, you can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the IS-IS process. With the redistribute command syntax, you can include BGP, OSPF, RIP, static, or directly connected routes in the IS-IS process. NOTE: Do not route iBGP routes to IS-IS unless there are route-maps associated with the IS-IS redistribution. To add routes from other routing instances or protocols, use the following commands.
PAGE 460
redistribute ospf process-id [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2] [metric value] [match external {1 | 2} | match internal] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map mapname] Configure the following parameters: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ process-id: the range is from 1 to 65535. level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: assign all redistributed routes to a level. The default is level-2. metric value: the range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. metric value: the range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0.
PAGE 461
no set-overload-bit When the bit is set, a 1 is placed in the OL column in the show isis database command output. The overload bit is set in both the Level-1 and Level-2 database because the IS type for the router is Level-1-2. DellEMC#show isis database IS-IS Level-1 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum B233.00-00 0x00000003 0x07BF eljefe.00-00 * 0x0000000A 0xF963 eljefe.01-00 * 0x00000001 0x68DF eljefe.02-00 * 0x00000001 0x2E7F Force10.
PAGE 462
Dell EMC Networking OS displays debug messages on the console. To view which debugging commands are enabled, use the show debugging command in EXEC Privilege mode. To disable a specific debug command, enter the keyword no then the debug command. For example, to disable debugging of IS-IS updates, use the no debug isis updates-packets command. To disable all IS-IS debugging, use the no debug isis command. To disable all debugging, use the undebug all command.
PAGE 463
Table 49. Metric Value When the Metric Style Changes (continued) Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value wide transition truncated value (the truncated value appears in the LSP only). The original isis metric value is displayed in the show config and show runningconfig commands and is used if you change back to transition metric style. NOTE: A truncated value is a value that is higher than 63, but set back to 63 because the higher value is not supported.
PAGE 464
Table 50. Metric Value when the Metric Style Changes Multiple Times (continued) Beginning Metric Style Next Metric Style Resulting Metric Value Next Metric Style Final Metric Value wide transition transition truncated value wide transition original value is recovered wide transition truncated value narrow default value (10). A message is sent to the logging buffer wide transition transition truncated value narrow transition default value (10).
PAGE 465
You can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes. NOTE: Whenever you make IS-IS configuration changes, clear the IS-IS process (re-started) using the clear isis command. The clear isis command must include the tag for the ISIS process. The following example shows the response from the router: DellEMC#clear isis * % ISIS not enabled.
PAGE 466
metric-style wide level-2 net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.00 DellEMC(conf-router_isis)# IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology DellEMC(conf-if-te-3/17/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/17/1 ipv6 address 24:3::1/76 ipv6 router isis no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-3/17/1)# DellEMC(conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.
PAGE 467
24 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by the Dell EMC Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic.
PAGE 468
NOTE: There is no configuration on the interface because that condition is required for an interface to be part of a LAG. ● You can configure link dampening on individual members of a LAG. LACP Modes Dell EMC Networking OS provides three modes for configuration of LACP — Off, Active, and Passive. ● Off — In this state, an interface is not capable of being part of a dynamic LAG. LACP does not run on any port that is configured to be in this state.
PAGE 469
● ● ● ● Configuring the LAG Interfaces as Dynamic Setting the LACP Long Timeout Monitoring and Debugging LACP Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking Creating a LAG To create a dynamic port channel (LAG), use the following command. First you define the LAG and then the LAG interfaces. ● Create a dynamic port channel (LAG). CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel ● Create a dynamic port channel (LAG).
PAGE 470
Setting the LACP Long Timeout PDUs are exchanged between port channel (LAG) interfaces to maintain LACP sessions. PDUs are transmitted at either a slow or fast transmission rate, depending upon the LACP timeout value. The timeout value is the amount of time that a LAG interface waits for a PDU from the remote system before bringing the LACP session down. The default timeout value is 1 second. You can configure the default timeout value to be 30 seconds.
PAGE 471
Figure 61. Shared LAG State Tracking To avoid packet loss, redirect traffic through the next lowest-cost link (R3 to R4). Dell EMC Networking OS has the ability to bring LAG 2 down if LAG 1 fails, so that traffic can be redirected. This redirection is what is meant by shared LAG state tracking. To achieve this functionality, you must group LAG 1 and LAG 2 into a single entity, called a failover group.
PAGE 472
Figure 62. Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking The following are shared LAG state tracking console messages: ● 2d1h45m: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Po 1 ● 2d1h45m: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Po 2 To view the status of a failover group member, use the show interface port-channel command.
PAGE 473
LACP Basic Configuration Example The screenshots in this section are based on the following example topology. Two routers are named ALPHA and BRAVO, and their hostname prompts reflect those names. Figure 63. LACP Basic Configuration Example Configure a LAG on ALPHA The following example creates a LAG on ALPHA.
PAGE 474
0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics 136 packets, 16718 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 15 over 64-byte pkts, 121 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 136 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 Vlans, 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec,0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec,0 packets/sec, 0.
PAGE 475
Figure 65.
PAGE 476
Figure 66.
PAGE 477
Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#switch Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#show config ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#exit Bravo(conf)#int tengig 3/21/1 Bravo(conf)#no ip address Bravo(conf)#no switchport Bravo(conf)#shutdown Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21/1)#port-channel-protocol lacp Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21/1-lacp)#port-channel 10 mode active Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21/1-lacp)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21/1)#end ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/21/1 no ip addre
PAGE 478
Figure 67.
PAGE 479
Figure 68.
PAGE 480
Figure 69. Inspecting the LAG Status Using the show lacp command The point-to-point protocol (PPP) is a connection-oriented protocol that enables layer two links over various different physical layer connections. It is supported on both synchronous and asynchronous lines, and can operate in Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex mode. It was designed to carry IP traffic but is general enough to allow any type of network layer datagram to be sent over a PPP connection.
PAGE 481
25 Layer 2 This chapter describes the Layer 2 features supported on the device. Topics: • • • • • Manage the MAC Address Table MAC Learning Limit NIC Teaming Configure Redundant Pairs Far-End Failure Detection Manage the MAC Address Table You can perform the following management tasks in the MAC address table.
PAGE 482
Configuring a Static MAC Address A static entry is one that is not subject to aging. Enter static entries manually. To create a static MAC address entry, use the following command. ● Create a static MAC address entry in the MAC address table. CONFIGURATION mode mac-address-table static Displaying the MAC Address Table To display the MAC address table, use the following command. ● Display the contents of the MAC address table.
PAGE 483
Setting the MAC Learning Limit To set a MAC learning limit on an interface, use the following command. ● Specify the number of MAC addresses that the system can learn off a Layer 2 interface. INTERFACE mode mac learning-limit address_limit Three options are available with the mac learning-limit command: ○ dynamic ○ no-station-move ○ station-move NOTE: An SNMP trap is available for mac learning-limit station-move. No other SNMP traps are available for MAC Learning Limit, including limit violations.
PAGE 484
mac learning-limit no-station-move The no-station-move option, also known as “sticky MAC,” provides additional port security by preventing a station move. When you configure this option, the first entry in the table is maintained instead of creating an entry on the new interface. nostation-move is the default behavior. Entries created before you set this option are not affected. To display a list of all interfaces with a MAC learning limit, use the following command.
PAGE 485
station-move-violation shutdown-both ● Display a list of all of the interfaces configured with MAC learning limit or station move violation. CONFIGURATION mode show mac learning-limit violate-action NOTE: When the MAC learning limit (MLL) is configured as no-station-move, the MLL will be processed as static entries internally. For static entries, the MAC address will be installed in all port-pipes, irrespective of the VLAN membership.
PAGE 486
CONFIGURATION mode mac port-security NIC Teaming NIC teaming is a feature that allows multiple network interface cards in a server to be represented by one MAC address and one IP address in order to provide transparent redundancy, balancing, and to fully utilize network adapter resources. The following illustration shows a topology where two NICs have been teamed together.
PAGE 487
Figure 71. Configuring the mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp Command Configure Redundant Pairs Networks that employ switches that do not support the spanning tree protocol (STP) — for example, networks with digital subscriber line access multiplexers (DSLAM) — cannot have redundant links between switches because they create switching loops (as shown in the following illustration).
PAGE 488
Figure 72. Configuring Redundant Layer 2 Pairs without Spanning Tree You configure a redundant pair by assigning a backup interface to a primary interface with the switchport backup interface command. Initially, the primary interface is active and transmits traffic and the backup interface remains down. If the primary fails for any reason, the backup transitions to an active Up state. If the primary interface fails and later comes back up, it remains as the backup interface for the redundant pair.
PAGE 489
As shown in the previous illustration, interface 1/11/1 is a backup interface for 1/11/2, and 1/11/2 is in the Down state. If 1/11/1 fails, 1/11/2 transitions to the Up state, which makes the backup link active. A message similar to the following message appears whenever you configure a backup port.
PAGE 490
DellEMC(conf-if-po-1)# DellEMC# DellEMC#show interfaces switchport backup Interface Status Paired Interface Port-channel 1 Active Port-chato mannel 2 Port-channel 2 Standby Port-channel 1 DellEMC# Status Standby Active DellEMC(conf-if-po-1)#switchport backup interface tengigabitethernet 1/2/1 Apr 9 00:16:29: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-L2BKUP_WARN: Do not run any Layer2 protocols on Po 1 and Te 1/2/1 DellEMC(conf-if-po-1)# Far-End Failure Detection Far-end failure detection (FEFD) is a protocol that senses r
PAGE 491
FEFD State Changes FEFD has two operational modes, Normal and Aggressive. When you enable Normal mode on an interface and a far-end failure is detected, no intervention is required to reset the interface to bring it back to an FEFD operational state. When you enable Aggressive mode on an interface in the same state, manual intervention is required to reset the interface.
PAGE 492
fefd-global To report interval frequency and mode adjustments, use the following commands. 1. Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3. INTERFACE mode ip address ip address, switchport 2. Enable the necessary ports administratively. INTERFACE mode no shutdown 3. Enable fefd globally. CONFIGURATION mode fefd-global {interval | mode} To display information about the state of each interface, use the show fefd command in EXEC privilege mode.
PAGE 493
3. INTERFACE mode fefd {disable | interval | mode} DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 no ip address switchport fefd mode normal no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#do show fefd | grep 1/1/1 Te 1/1 Normal 3 Unknown Debugging FEFD To debug FEFD, use the first command. To provide output for each packet transmission over the FEFD enabled connection, use the second command. ● Display output whenever events occur that initiate or disrupt an FEFD enabled connection.
PAGE 494
link with its peer 494 Layer 2
PAGE 495
26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) This chapter describes how to configure and use the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP). Topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 802.
PAGE 496
Figure 74. Type, Length, Value (TLV) Segment TLVs are encapsulated in a frame called an LLDP data unit (LLDPDU) (shown in the following table), which is transmitted from one LLDP-enabled device to its LLDP-enabled neighbors. LLDP is a one-way protocol. LLDP-enabled devices (LLDP agents) can transmit and/or receive advertisements, but they cannot solicit and do not respond to advertisements. There are five types of TLVs. All types are mandatory in the construction of an LLDPDU except Optional TLVs.
PAGE 497
Optional TLVs The Dell EMC Networking OS supports these optional TLVs: management TLVs, IEEE 802.1 and 802.3 organizationally specific TLVs, and TIA-1057 organizationally specific TLVs. Management TLVs A management TLV is an optional TLVs sub-type. This kind of TLV contains essential management information about the sender. Organizationally Specific TLVs A professional organization or a vendor can define organizationally specific TLVs.
PAGE 498
Table 54. Optional TLV Types (continued) Type TLV Description port belongs (and the untagged VLAN to which a port belongs if the port is in Hybrid mode). 127 Protocol Identity Indicates the protocols that the port can process. Dell EMC Networking OS does not currently support this TLV. 127 MAC/PHY Configuration/Status Indicates the capability and current setting of the duplex status and bit rate, and whether the current settings are the result of auto-negotiation.
PAGE 499
TIA Organizationally Specific TLVs The Dell EMC Networking system is an LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device (Device Type 4). Network connectivity devices are responsible for: ● transmitting an LLDP-MED capability TLV to endpoint devices ● storing the information that endpoint devices advertise The following table describes the five types of TIA-1057 Organizationally Specific TLVs. Table 55.
PAGE 500
Table 55. TIA-1057 (LLDP-MED) Organizationally Specific TLVs (continued) Type SubType TLV Description 127 11 Inventory — Asset ID Indicates a user specified device number to manage inventory. 127 12–255 Reserved — LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV The LLDP-MED capabilities TLV communicates the types of TLVs that the endpoint device and the network connectivity device support. LLDP-MED network connectivity devices must transmit the Network Policies TLV.
PAGE 501
LLDP-MED Network Policies TLV A network policy in the context of LLDP-MED is a device’s VLAN configuration and associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 configurations. LLDP-MED network policies TLV include: ● ● ● ● VLAN ID VLAN tagged or untagged status Layer 2 priority DSCP value An integer represents the application type (the Type integer shown in the following table), which indicates a device function for which a unique network policy is defined.
PAGE 502
Extended Power via MDI TLV The extended power via MDI TLV enables advanced PoE management between LLDP-MED endpoints and network connectivity devices. Advertise the extended power via MDI on all ports that are connected to an 802.3af powered, LLDP-MED endpoint device. ● Power Type — there are two possible power types: power source entity (PSE) or power device (PD). The Dell EMC Networking system is a PSE, which corresponds to a value of 0, based on the TIA-1057 specification.
PAGE 503
● 802.1X controlled ports do not allow LLDPDUs until the connected device is authenticated. CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations All LLDP configuration commands are available in PROTOCOL LLDP mode, which is a sub-mode of the CONFIGURATION mode and INTERFACE mode. ● Configurations made at the CONFIGURATION level are global; that is, they affect all interfaces on the system.
PAGE 504
To undo an LLDP configuration, precede the relevant command with the keyword no. Enabling LLDP on Management Ports LLDP on management ports is enabled by default. To enable LLDP on management ports, use the following command. 1. Enter Protocol LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION mode protocol lldp 2. Enter LLDP management-interface mode. LLDP-MANAGEMENT-INTERFACE mode management-interface 3. Enable LLDP.
PAGE 505
● For TIA-1057 TLVs: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ guest-voice guest-voice-signaling location-identification power-via-mdi softphone-voice streaming-video video-conferencing video-signaling voice voice-signaling In the following example, LLDP is enabled globally. R1 and R2 are transmitting periodic LLDPDUs that contain management, 802.1, and 802.3 TLVs. Figure 80.
PAGE 506
The system processes each LLDP frame to retrieve the OUI, subtype, and data length, and stores the retrieved data of organizational specific unrecognized LLDP TLVs in a list. The stored list of organizational TLVs is removed when the neighbor is lost or neighbor ages out. The software assigns a temporary identification index for each unrecognized organizational specific LLDP TLVs upon receiving more than one TLV with the same OUI and subtype, but with different organizationally defined information strings.
PAGE 507
Viewing Information Advertised by Adjacent LLDP Neighbors To view brief information about adjacent devices or to view all the information that neighbors are advertising, use the following commands. ● Display brief information about adjacent devices. show lldp neighbors ● Display all of the information that neighbors are advertising.
PAGE 508
Operational MAU type: unknown UnknownTLVList: OrgUnknownTLVList: ((f8-b1-56), 24, 1) ((f8-b1-56), 23, 1) ((f8-b1-56), 22, 1) ((f8-b1-56), 21, 7) ((00-80-c2), 7, 5) --------------------------------------------------------------------------Following note is applicable only in platforms that support 25G interfaces: NOTE: Since different port types are shown in two letters, the 25G interface is represented as tf (Twentyfive) in show lldp neighbors output.
PAGE 509
Total Multiple Neighbors Detected: 0 Total Frames Discarded: 0 Total In Error Frames: 0 Total Unrecognized TLVs: 1056 Total TLVs Discarded: 0 Next packet will be sent after 16 seconds The neighbors are given below: ----------------------------------------------------------------------Remote Chassis ID Subtype: Mac address (4) Remote Chassis ID: 4c:76:25:f4:ab:01 Remote Port Subtype: Interface name (5) Remote Port ID: fortyGigE 1/2/8/1 Local Port ID: FortyGigE 1/1/2 Locally assigned remote Neighbor Index: 1
PAGE 510
R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description hello 25 no disable R1(conf-lldp)#no hello R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)# Configuring LLDP Notification Interval This implementa
PAGE 511
tx Tx only R1(conf-lldp)#mode tx R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description mode tx no disable R1(conf-lldp)#no mode R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)# Configuring the Time to
PAGE 512
Debugging LLDP You can view the TLVs that your system is sending and receiving. To view the TLVs, use the following commands. ● View a readable version of the TLVs. debug lldp brief ● View a readable version of the TLVs plus a hexadecimal version of the entire LLDPDU, including unrecognized TLVs. debug lldp detail To stop viewing the LLDP TLVs sent and received by the system, use the no debug lldp command. Figure 81.
PAGE 513
Relevant Management Objects Dell EMC Networking OS supports all IEEE 802.1AB MIB objects. The following tables list the objects associated with: ● ● ● ● received and transmitted TLVs the LLDP configuration on the local agent IEEE 802.1AB Organizationally Specific TLVs received and transmitted LLDP-MED TLVs Table 59.
PAGE 514
Table 60.
PAGE 515
Table 61. LLDP 802.
PAGE 516
Table 62.
PAGE 517
27 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network load balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems (OSs). NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
PAGE 518
Limitations of the NLB Feature The following limitations apply to switches on which you configure NLB: ● The NLB Unicast mode uses switch flooding to transmit all packets to all the servers that are part of the VLAN. When a large volume of traffic is processed, the clustering performance might be impacted in a small way. This limitation is applicable to switches that perform unicast flooding in the software. ● The ip vlan-flooding command applies globally across the system and for all VLANs.
PAGE 519
There might be some ARP table entries that are resolved through ARP packets, which had the Ethernet MAC SA different from the MAC information inside the ARP packet. This unicast data traffic flooding occurs only for those packets that use these ARP entries. Enabling a Switch for Multicast NLB To enable a switch for Multicast NLB mode, perform the following steps: 1.
PAGE 520
28 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Protocol Overview MSDP is a Layer 3 protocol that connects IPv4 protocol-independent multicast-sparse mode (PIM-SM) domains. A domain in the context of MSDP is a contiguous set of routers operating PIM within a common boundary defined by an exterior gateway protocol, such as border gateway protocol (BGP).
PAGE 521
Figure 83.
PAGE 522
Implementation Information The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of MSDP is in accordance with RFC 3618 and Anycast RP is in accordance with RFC 3446. Configure Multicast Source Discovery Protocol Configuring MSDP is a four-step process. 1. Enable an exterior gateway protocol (EGP) with at least two routing domains. Refer to the following figures. The MSDP Sample Configurations show the OSPF-BGP configuration used in this chapter for MSDP.
PAGE 523
Figure 84.
PAGE 524
Figure 85.
PAGE 525
Figure 86.
PAGE 526
Figure 87. Configuring MSDP Enable MSDP Enable MSDP by peering RPs in different administrative domains. 1. Enable MSDP. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-msdp 2. Peer PIM systems in different administrative domains. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer connect-source R3(conf)#ip multicast-msdp R3(conf)#ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
PAGE 527
Multicast sources in remote domains are stored on the RP in the source-active cache (SA cache). The system does not create entries in the multicast routing table until there is a local receiver for the corresponding multicast group. R3#show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.
PAGE 528
Clearing the Source-Active Cache To clear the source-active cache, use the following command. ● Clear the SA cache of all, local, or rejected entries, or entries for a specific group. CONFIGURATION mode clear ip msdp sa-cache [group-address | local | rejected-sa] Enabling the Rejected Source-Active Cache To cache rejected sources, use the following command. Active sources can be rejected because the RPF check failed, the SA limit is reached, the peer RP is unreachable, or the SA message has a format error.
PAGE 529
Figure 88.
PAGE 530
Figure 89.
PAGE 531
Figure 90. MSDP Default Peer, Scenario 4 Specifying Source-Active Messages To specify messages, use the following command. ● Specify the forwarding-peer and originating-RP from which all active sources are accepted without regard for the RPF check. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp default-peer ip-address list If you do not specify an access list, the peer accepts all sources that peer advertises. All sources from RPs that the ACL denies are subject to the normal RPF check. DellEMC(conf)#ip msdp peer 10.0.50.
PAGE 532
DellEMC#ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 3 rejected SAs received, cache-size 32766 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 00:33:18 229.0.50.64 24.0.50.64 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.65 24.0.50.65 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.66 24.0.50.66 200.0.1.50 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 Reason Rpf-Fail Rpf-Fail Rpf-Fail Limiting the Source-Active Messages from a Peer To limit the source-active messages from a peer, use the following commands. 1.
PAGE 533
Preventing MSDP from Caching a Remote Source To prevent MSDP from caching a remote source, use the following commands. 1. OPTIONAL: Cache sources that the SA filter denies in the rejected SA cache. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp cache-rejected-sa 2. Prevent the system from caching remote sources learned from a specific peer based on source and group. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp sa-filter list out peer list ext-acl As shown in the following example, R1 is advertising source 10.11.4.2.
PAGE 534
MSDP Source-Active Cache - 1 entries GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 239.0.0.1 10.11.4.2 192.168.0.1 local R3(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache MSDP Source-Active Cache - 1 entries GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 239.0.0.1 10.11.4.2 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.1 Expire 70 UpTime 00:27:20 Expire 1 UpTime 00:10:29 [Router 3] R3(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache R3(conf)# To display the configured SA filters for a peer, use the show ip msdp peer command from EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 535
CONFIGURATION mode clear ip msdp peer peer-address R3(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.3(639) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Established Up/Down Time: 00:04:26 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 5/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Input (S,G) filter: myremotefilter Output (S,G) filter: none R3(conf)#do clear ip msdp peer 192.168.0.1 R3(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 0.0.0.
PAGE 536
Anycast RP relieves these limitations by allowing multiple RPs per group, which can be distributed in a topologically significant manner according to the locations of the sources and receivers. 1. All the RPs serving a given group are configured with an identical anycast address. 2. Sources then register with the topologically closest RP. 3. RPs use MSDP to peer with each other using a unique address. Figure 91.
PAGE 537
4. Peer each RP with every other RP using MSDP, specifying the unique Loopback address as the connect-source. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer 5. Advertise the network of each of the unique Loopback addresses throughout the network. ROUTER OSPF mode network Reducing Source-Active Message Flooding RPs flood source-active messages to all of their peers away from the RP.
PAGE 538
! ip ip ip ip ip multicast-msdp msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 1 msdp peer 192.168.0.22 connect-source Loopback 1 msdp mesh-group AS100 192.168.0.22 msdp originator-id Loopback 1! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 The following example shows an R2 configuration for MSDP with Anycast RP. ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.
PAGE 539
ip address 10.11.6.34/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.3/32 area 0 redistribute static redistribute connected redistribute bgp 200 ! router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.22 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.22 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.22 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.22 no shutdown ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
PAGE 540
! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 MSDP Sample Configuration: R2 Running-Config ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/11/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.21/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.0.23/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.0.2/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.1.
PAGE 541
redistribute connected redistribute bgp 200 ! router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.2 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.2 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.2 no shutdown ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.1 connect-source Loopback 0 ! ip route 192.168.0.2/32 10.11.0.23 MSDP Sample Configuration: R4 Running-Config ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
PAGE 542
29 Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol Dell Networking OS Supports Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is a Layer 3 protocol that IPv6 routers use to learn of the multicast receivers that are directly connected to them and the groups in which the receivers are interested. Multicast routing protocols (like PIM) use the information learned from MLD to route multicast traffic to all interested receivers.
PAGE 543
Joining a Multicast Group The Querier periodically sends a General Query to the all-nodes multicast address FF02::1. A host that wants to join a multicast group responds to the general query with a report that contains the group address; the report is also addressed to the group (in the IPv6 Destination Address field). To avoid duplicate reporting, any host that hears a report from another host for the same group in which it itself is interested cancels its report for that group.
PAGE 544
| | * * | | +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +. -+ . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ Version 2 multicast listener reports are sent by IP nodes to report (to neighboring routers) the current multicast listening state, or changes in the multicast listening state, of their interfaces.
PAGE 545
| | * Source Address [1] * | | * * | | +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +-+ . . . . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | . . . Auxiliary Data . . .
PAGE 546
To adjust the query response time, use the following command: INTERFACE Mode ipv6 mld query-max-resp-time Configuring MLD Version To configure MLD version on the system, follow this procedure: Select the MLD version INTERFACE Mode ipv6 mld version {1 | 2} If you do not configure the MLD version, the system defaults to version 2. The ipv6 mld version command is applicable for MLD snooping-enabled interfaces.
PAGE 547
INTERFACE Mode ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval Displaying MLD groups table Display MLD groups. Group information can be filtered. To display MLD groups, use the following command: EXEC Privilege show ipv6 mld groups Dell#show ipv6 mld groups Total Number of Groups: 1 MLD Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Ff08::12 Vlan 10 MLDv2 Uptime 00:00:12 Expires 00:02:05 Last Reporter 1::2 Displaying MLD Interfaces Display MLD interfaces.
PAGE 548
30 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) — specified in IEEE 802.1Q-2003 — is a rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)-based spanning tree variation that improves per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). MSTP allows multiple spanning tree instances and allows you to map many VLANs to one spanning tree instance to reduce the total number of required instances. Protocol Overview MSTP — specified in IEEE 802.
PAGE 549
• • • • • • • Modifying Global Parameters Modifying the Interface Parameters Setting STP path cost as constant Configuring an EdgePort Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change MSTP Sample Configurations Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations Spanning Tree Variations The Dell EMC Networking OS supports four variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 63. Spanning Tree Variations Dell EMC Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .
PAGE 550
● Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes ● Configuring Spanning Trees as Hitless Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Globally MSTP is not enabled by default. To enable MSTP globally, use the following commands. When you enable MSTP, all physical, VLAN, and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the MSTI 0. ● Within an MSTI, only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled.
PAGE 551
no disable MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200-300 All bridges in the MSTP region must have the same VLAN-to-instance mapping. To view which instance a VLAN is mapped to, use the show spanning-tree mst vlan command from EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 552
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e809.c24a Designated port id is 128.384, designated path cost 20000 Number of transitions to forwarding state 1 BPDU (MRecords): sent 39291, received 7547 The port is not in the Edge port mode Influencing MSTP Root Selection MSTP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the probability that it becomes the root bridge. To change the bridge priority, use the following command.
PAGE 553
● Change the region revision number. PROTOCOL MSTP mode revision number To view the current region name and revision, use the show spanning-tree mst configuration command from EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 554
To view the current values for MSTP parameters, use the show running-config spanning-tree mstp command from EXEC privilege mode.
PAGE 555
The range is from 0 to 240, in increments of 16. The default is 128. To view the current values for these interface parameters, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode. Setting STP path cost as constant You can set the path cost to be constant for port-channel regardless of the operation status of the port-channel member ports. To set the STP path cost, use the port-channel path-cost custom command from the PROTOCOL SPANNING-TREE mode.
PAGE 556
no ip address switchport spanning-tree mstp edge-port spanning-tree MSTI 1 priority 144 no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change Dell EMC Networking OS has an optimized MAC address flush mechanism for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ that flushes addresses only when necessary, which allows for faster convergence during topology changes. However, you may activate the flushing mechanism defined by 802.
PAGE 557
MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 ! (Step 2) interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1,31/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/21,31/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/21,31/1 no shutdown Router 2 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1.
PAGE 558
tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3/1,1/1/4/1 no shutdown (Step 1) protocol spanning-tree mstp no disable name Tahiti revision 123 MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 ! (Step 2) interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/11/1,31/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/11/1,31/1 no shutdown ! interface
PAGE 559
no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/5/1,1/1/5/2 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/5/1,1/1/5/2 no shutdown (Step 1) protocol spanning-tree mstp no disable name Tahiti revision 123 MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 ! (Step 2) interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/11/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/21/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged Ten
PAGE 560
switchport protected 0 exit interface 1/0/32 no shutdown spanning-tree port mode enable switchport protected 0 exit (Step 3) interface vlan 100 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 200 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 300 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations To debut and verify MSTP configuration, use the following commands. ● Display BPDUs. EXEC Privilege mode debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu ● Display MSTP-triggered topology change messages.
PAGE 561
protocol spanning-tree mstp name Tahiti revision 123 MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 The following example shows viewing the debug log of a successful MSTP configuration. DellEMC#debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu MSTP debug bpdu is ON DellEMC# 4w0d4h : MSTP: Sending BPDU on Te 2/21/1 : ProtId: 0, Ver: 3, Bpdu Type: MSTP, Flags 0x6e CIST Root Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e, Ext Path Cost: 0 Regional Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.
PAGE 562
31 Multicast Features NOTE: Multicast routing is supported on secondary IP addresses; it is not supported on IPv6. NOTE: Multicast routing is supported across default and non-default virtual routing and forwarding (VRFs).
PAGE 563
Protocol Ethernet Address RIP 01:00:5e:00:00:09 NTP 01:00:5e:00:01:01 VRRP 01:00:5e:00:00:12 PIM-SM 01:00:5e:00:00:0d ● ● ● ● The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of MTRACE is in accordance with IETF draft draft-fenner-traceroute-ipm. Multicast is not supported on secondary IP addresses. If you enable multicast routing, egress Layer 3 ACL is not applied to multicast data traffic. Multicast traffic can be forwarded to a maximum of 15 VLANs with the same outgoing interface.
PAGE 564
● Limit the total number of multicast routes on the system. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-limit The range is from 1 to 16000. The default is 4000. NOTE: The IN-L3-McastFib CAM partition stores multicast routes and is a separate hardware limit that exists per portpipe. Any software-configured limit may supersede this hardware space limitation. The opposite is also true, the CAM partition might not be exhausted at the time the system-wide route limit is reached using the ip multicast-limit command.
PAGE 565
Figure 94. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 65. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description Location Description 1/21/1 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31/1 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
PAGE 566
Table 65. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description (continued) Location Description 2/11/1 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31/1 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1/1 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.1/24 no shutdown 3/11/1 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.
PAGE 567
Initially, a single PIM-SM tree called a shared tree to distribute traffic. It is called shared because all traffic for the group, regardless of the source, or the location of the source, must pass through the RP. The shared tree is unidirectional; that is, all multicast traffic flows only from the RP to the receivers. Once a receiver receives traffic from the RP, PM-SM switches to SPT to forward multicast traffic, which connects the receiver directly to the source.
PAGE 568
Figure 95. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 67. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description Location Description 1/21/1 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31/1 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
PAGE 569
Table 67. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description (continued) Location Description 2/11/1 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31/1 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1/1 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
PAGE 570
Understanding Multicast Traceroute (mtrace) Multicast Traceroute (mtrace) is a multicast diagnostic facility used for tracing multicast paths. Mtrace enables you to trace the path that a multicast packet takes from its source to the destination. When you initiate mtrace from a source to a destination, an mtrace Query packet with IGMP type 0x1F is sent to the last-hop multicast router for the given destination. The mtrace query packet is forwarded hop-by-hop untill it reaches the last-hop router.
PAGE 571
● MTRACE Transit — when a Dell EMC Networking system is an intermediate router between the source and destination in an MTRACE query, Dell EMC Networking OS computes the RPF neighbor for the source, fills in the request, and forwards the request to the RPF neighbor. When a Dell EMC Networking system is the last hop to the destination, Dell EMC Networking OS sends a response to the query. To print the network path, use the following command.
PAGE 572
Table 68. mtrace Command Output — Explained (continued) Command Output Description From source (?) to destination (?) In case the provided source or destination IP can be resolved to a hostname the corresponding name will be displayed. In cases where the IP cannot be resolved, it is displayed as (?) 0 1.1.1.1 --> Destination The first row in the table corresponds to the destination provided by the user. -1 1.1.1.1 PIM Reached RP/Core 103.103.103.
PAGE 573
Table 69. Supported Error Codes (continued) Error Code Error Name Description 0x81 NO_SPACE There is not enough room to insert another response data block in the packet. mtrace Scenarios This section describes various scenarios that may result when an mtrace command is issued. The following table describes various scenarios when the mtrace command is issued: Table 70.
PAGE 574
Table 70. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario You invoke a weak mtrace request by specifying only the source without specifying the mulicast tree or multicast group information for the source. Mtrace traces a path towards the source by using the RPF neighbor at each node. Output R1>mtrace 103.103.103.3 Type Ctrl-C to abort. Querying reverse path for source 103.103.103.
PAGE 575
Table 70. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario When you issue the mtrace command with the source and multicast group information, if a multicast route is not present on a particular node, then the NO ROUTE error code is displayed on the node. In this scenario, the Source Network/Mask column for that particular node displays the the value as default.
PAGE 576
Table 70. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario Output ----------------------------------------------------------------- If the destination provided in the command is not a valid receiver for the multicast group, the last hop router for the destination provides the WRONG LAST HOP error code. If the last-hop router contains a path to the source, the path is traced irrespective of the incorrect destination.
PAGE 577
Table 70. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario Output 0 1.1.1.1 --> Destination -1 * * * * ----------------------------------------------------------------Timed out receiving responses Perhaps no local router has a route for source, the receiver is not a member of the multicast group or the multicast ttl is too low. While traversing the path from source to destination, if the mtrace packet exhausts the maximum buffer size of the packet, then NO SPACE error is displayed in the output.
PAGE 578
Table 70. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario Output Querying reverse path for source 6.6.6.6 to destination 4.4.4.5 via RPF From source (?) to destination (?) ---------------------------------------------------------------|Hop| OIF IP |Proto| Forwarding Code |Source Network/Mask| ---------------------------------------------------------------0 4.4.4.5 --> Destination -1 4.4.4.4 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -2 20.20.20.2 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -3 10.10.10.1 PIM RPF Interface 6.6.6.
PAGE 579
32 Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol Dell Networking OS Supports Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is a Layer 3 protocol that IPv6 routers use to learn of the multicast receivers that are directly connected to them and the groups in which the receivers are interested. Multicast routing protocols (like PIM) use the information learned from MLD to route multicast traffic to all interested receivers.
PAGE 580
Joining a Multicast Group The Querier periodically sends a General Query to the all-nodes multicast address FF02::1. A host that wants to join a multicast group responds to the general query with a report that contains the group address; the report is also addressed to the group (in the IPv6 Destination Address field). To avoid duplicate reporting, any host that hears a report from another host for the same group in which it itself is interested cancels its report for that group.
PAGE 581
| | * * | | +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +. -+ . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ Version 2 multicast listener reports are sent by IP nodes to report (to neighboring routers) the current multicast listening state, or changes in the multicast listening state, of their interfaces.
PAGE 582
| | * Source Address [1] * | | * * | | +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +-+ . . . . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | . . . Auxiliary Data . . .
PAGE 583
To adjust the query response time, use the following command: INTERFACE Mode ipv6 mld query-max-resp-time Clearing MLD groups Clear a specific group or all groups on an interface from the multicast routing table. To clear MLD groups, use the following command: EXEC Privilege clear ipv6 mld groups Debugging MLD Display Dell Networking OS messages about the MLD process.
PAGE 584
show ipv6 mld groups Dell#show ipv6 mld groups Total Number of Groups: 1 MLD Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Ff08::12 Vlan 10 MLDv2 Uptime 00:00:12 Expires 00:02:05 Last Reporter 1::2 Displaying MLD Interfaces Display MLD interfaces.
PAGE 585
NOTE: Under the default configuration, there is no need to configure ipv6 mld snooping for any VLAN. Configure the switch as a querier Hosts that do not support unsolicited reporting wait for a general query before sending a membership report. When the multicast source and receivers are in the same VLAN, multicast traffic is not routed, and so there is no querier.
PAGE 586
33 Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol Dell Networking OS Supports Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is a Layer 3 protocol that IPv6 routers use to learn of the multicast receivers that are directly connected to them and the groups in which the receivers are interested. Multicast routing protocols (like PIM) use the information learned from MLD to route multicast traffic to all interested receivers.
PAGE 587
Joining a Multicast Group The Querier periodically sends a General Query to the all-nodes multicast address FF02::1. A host that wants to join a multicast group responds to the general query with a report that contains the group address; the report is also addressed to the group (in the IPv6 Destination Address field). To avoid duplicate reporting, any host that hears a report from another host for the same group in which it itself is interested cancels its report for that group.
PAGE 588
| | * * | | +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +. -+ . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ Version 2 multicast listener reports are sent by IP nodes to report (to neighboring routers) the current multicast listening state, or changes in the multicast listening state, of their interfaces.
PAGE 589
| | * Source Address [1] * | | * * | | +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +-+ . . . . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | . . . Auxiliary Data . . .
PAGE 590
To adjust the query response time, use the following command: INTERFACE Mode ipv6 mld query-max-resp-time Clearing MLD groups Clear a specific group or all groups on an interface from the multicast routing table. To clear MLD groups, use the following command: EXEC Privilege clear ipv6 mld groups Debugging MLD Display Dell Networking OS messages about the MLD process.
PAGE 591
show ipv6 mld groups Dell#show ipv6 mld groups Total Number of Groups: 1 MLD Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Ff08::12 Vlan 10 MLDv2 Uptime 00:00:12 Expires 00:02:05 Last Reporter 1::2 Displaying MLD Interfaces Display MLD interfaces.
PAGE 592
NOTE: Under the default configuration, there is no need to configure ipv6 mld snooping for any VLAN. Configure the switch as a querier Hosts that do not support unsolicited reporting wait for a general query before sending a membership report. When the multicast source and receivers are in the same VLAN, multicast traffic is not routed, and so there is no querier.
PAGE 593
34 Object Tracking IPv4 or IPv6 object tracking is available on Dell EMC Networking OS. Object tracking allows the Dell EMC Networking OS client processes, such as virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP), to monitor tracked objects (for example, interface or link status) and take appropriate action when the state of an object changes. NOTE: In Dell EMC Networking OS release version 8.4.1.0, object tracking is supported only on VRRP.
PAGE 594
Figure 96. Object Tracking Example When you configure a tracked object, such as an IPv4/IPv6 a route or interface, you specify an object number to identify the object. Optionally, you can also specify: ● UP and DOWN thresholds used to report changes in a route metric. ● A time delay before changes in a tracked object’s state are reported to a client. Track Layer 2 Interfaces You can create an object to track the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface.
PAGE 595
Track IPv4 and IPv6 Routes You can create an object that tracks an IPv4 or IPv6 route entry in the routing table. Specify a tracked route by its IPv4 or IPv6 address and prefix-length. Optionally specify a tracked route by a virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance name if the route to be tracked is part of a VRF. The next-hop address is not part of the definition of the tracked object.
PAGE 596
Set Tracking Delays You can configure an optional UP and/or DOWN timer for each tracked object to set the time delay before a change in the state of a tracked object is communicated to clients. The configured time delay starts when the state changes from UP to DOWN or the opposite way. If the state of an object changes back to its former UP/DOWN state before the timer expires, the timer is cancelled and the client is not notified.
PAGE 597
OBJECT TRACKING mode delay {[up seconds] [down seconds]} Valid delay times are from 0 to 180 seconds. The default is 0. 3. (Optional) Identify the tracked object with a text description. OBJECT TRACKING mode description text The text string can be up to 80 characters. 4. (Optional) Display the tracking configuration and the tracked object’s status.
PAGE 598
The default is 0. 3. (Optional) Identify the tracked object with a text description. OBJECT TRACKING mode description text The text string can be up to 80 characters. 4. (Optional) Display the tracking configuration and the tracked object’s status.
PAGE 599
priority over a higher value. The resulting scaled value is compared against the configured threshold values to determine the state of a tracked route as follows: ○ If the scaled metric for a route entry is less than or equal to the UP threshold, the state of a route is UP. ○ If the scaled metric for a route is greater than or equal to the DOWN threshold or the route is not entered in the routing table, the state of a route is DOWN. The UP and DOWN thresholds are user-configurable for each tracked route.
PAGE 600
2 changes, last change 00:02:49 Tracked by: DellEMC#configure DellEMC(conf)#track 4 ip route 3.1.1.
PAGE 601
2. Configure object tracking on the metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id {ip route ip-address/prefix-len | ipv6 route ipv6-address/prefix-len} metric threshold [vrf vrf-name] Valid object IDs are from 1 to 500. Enter an IPv4 address in dotted decimal format. Valid IPv4 prefix lengths are from /0 to /32. Enter an IPv6 address in X:X:X:X::X format. Valid IPv6 prefix lengths are from /0 to /128. (Optional) E-Series only: For an IPv4 route, you can enter a VRF name. 3.
PAGE 602
● Display the configuration and status of currently tracked Layer 2 or Layer 3 interfaces, IPv4 or IPv6 routes, and a VRF instance. show track [object-id [brief] | interface [brief] [vrf vrf-name] | ip route [brief] [vrf vrf-name] | resolution | vrf vrf-name [brief] | brief] ● Use the show running-config track command to display the tracking configuration of a specified object or all objects that are currently configured on the router.
PAGE 603
Example of Viewing Object Tracking Configuration DellEMC#show running-config track track 1 ip route 23.0.0.0/8 reachability track 2 ipv6 route 2040::/64 metric threshold delay down 3 delay up 5 threshold metric up 200 track 3 ipv6 route 2050::/64 reachability track 4 interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/4/1 ip routing track 5 ip route 192.168.0.
PAGE 604
35 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Open shortest path first (OSPFv2 for IPv4) and OSPF version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. This chapter provides a general description of OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) and OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) as supported in the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS). NOTE: The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) are the same between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.
PAGE 605
Figure 97. Autonomous System Areas Area Types The backbone of the network is Area 0. It is also called Area 0.0.0.0 and is the core of any AS. All other areas must connect to Area 0. An OSPF backbone is responsible for distributing routing information between areas. It consists of all area border routers, networks not wholly contained in any area, and their attached routers. NOTE: If you configure two non-backbone areas, then you must enable the B bit in OSPF.
PAGE 606
Networks and Neighbors As a link-state protocol, OSPF sends routing information to other OSPF routers concerning the state of the links between them. The state (up or down) of those links is important. Routers that share a link become neighbors on that segment. OSPF uses the Hello protocol as a neighbor discovery and keep alive mechanism. After two routers are neighbors, they may proceed to exchange and synchronize their databases, which creates an adjacency.
PAGE 607
Backbone Router (BR) A backbone router (BR) is part of the OSPF Backbone, Area 0. This includes all ABRs. It can also include any routers that connect only to the backbone and another ABR, but are only part of Area 0, such as Router I in the previous example. Area Border Router (ABR) Within an AS, an area border router (ABR) connects one or more areas to the backbone. The ABR keeps a copy of the link-state database for every area it connects to, so it may keep multiple copies of the link state database.
PAGE 608
● Type 3: Summary LSA (OSPFv2), Inter-Area-Prefix LSA (OSPFv3) — An ABR takes information it has learned on one of its attached areas and can summarize it before sending it out on other areas it is connected to. The link-state ID of the Type 3 LSA is the destination network number. ● Type 4: AS Border Router Summary LSA (OSPFv2), Inter-Area-Router LSA (OSPFv3) — In some cases, Type 5 External LSAs are flooded to areas where the detailed next-hop information may not be available.
PAGE 609
Figure 99. Priority and Cost Examples OSPF with Dell EMC Networking OS The Dell EMC Networking OS supports up to 128,000 OSPF routes for OSPFv2. Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.4(0.0) and later support only one OSPFv2 process per VRF. Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.7(0.0) and later support OSPFv3 in VRF. Also, on OSPFv3, Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one OSPFv3 process per VRF. OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 can co-exist but you must configure them individually.
PAGE 610
OSPF graceful restart understands that in a modern router, the control plane and data plane functionality are separate, restarting the control plane functionality (such as the failover of the active RPM to the backup in a redundant configuration), does not necessarily have to interrupt the forwarding of data packets.
PAGE 611
Multi-Process OSPFv2 with VRF Multi-process OSPF with VRF is supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. Only one OSPFv2 process per VRF is supported. Multi-process OSPF allows multiple OSPFv2 processes on a single router. Multiple OSPFv2 processes allow for isolating routing domains, supporting multiple route policies and priorities in different domains, and creating smaller domains for easier management. The system supports up to 16 OSPFv2 processes.
PAGE 612
LSType:Type-5 AS External(5) Age:1 Seq:0x8000000c id:170.1.2.0 Adv:6.1.0.0 Netmask:255.255.255.0 fwd:0.0.0.0 E2, tos:0 metric:0 RFC 2328 is supported by default on Dell EMC Networking OS and it is indicated in the show ip ospf command output. DellEMC#show ip ospf Routing Process ospf 1 with ID 2.2.2.
PAGE 613
Configuration Information The interfaces must be in Layer 3 mode (assigned an IP address) and enabled so that they can send and receive traffic. The OSPF process must know about these interfaces. To make the OSPF process aware of these interfaces, they must be assigned to OSPF areas. You must configure OSPF GLOBALLY on the system in CONFIGURATION mode. NOTE: Loop back routes are not installed in the Route Table Manager (RTM) as non-active routes.
PAGE 614
Enabling OSPFv2 To enable Layer 3 routing, assign an IP address to an interface (physical or Loopback). By default, OSPF, similar to all routing protocols, is disabled. You must configure at least one interface for Layer 3 before enabling OSPFv2 globally. If implementing multi-process OSPF, create an equal number of Layer 3 enabled interfaces and OSPF process IDs. For example, if you create four OSPFv2 process IDs, you must have four interfaces with Layer 3 enabled. 1. Assign an IP address to an interface.
PAGE 615
Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs Number of area in this router is 0, normal 0 stub 0 nssa 0 DellEMC# Assigning an OSPFv2 Area After you enable OSPFv2, assign the interface to an OSPF area. Set up OSPF areas and enable OSPFv2 on an interface with the network command. You must have at least one AS area: Area 0. This is the backbone area. If your OSPF network contains more than one area, configure a backbone area (Area ID 0.0.0.0).
PAGE 616
Example of Viewing Active Interfaces and Assigned Areas DellEMC>show ip ospf 1 interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/17/1 is up, line protocol is up Internet Address 10.2.2.1/24, Area 0.0.0.0 Process ID 1, Router ID 11.1.2.1, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 11.1.2.1, Interface address 10.2.2.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 0.0.0.0, Interface address 0.0.0.
PAGE 617
3. Enter ROUTER OSPF mode. CONFIGURATION mode router ospf process-id [vrf] Process ID is the ID assigned when configuring OSPFv2 globally. 4. Configure the area as a stub area. CONFIG-ROUTER-OSPF-id mode area area-id stub [no-summary] Use the keywords no-summary to prevent transmission into the area of summary ASBR LSAs. Area ID is the number or IP address assigned when creating the area.
PAGE 618
Hello due in 13:39:46 Neighbor Count is 0, Adjacent neighbor count is 0 TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/1 is up, line protocol is down Internet Address 10.1.3.100/24, Area 2.2.2.2 Process ID 34, Router ID 10.1.2.100, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 10 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.1.2.100, Interface address 10.1.3.100 Backup Designated Router (ID) 0.0.0.0, Interface address 0.0.0.
PAGE 619
Number of area in this router is 0, normal 0 stub 0 nssa 0 DellEMC# Changing OSPFv2 Parameters on Interfaces In Dell EMC Networking OS, you can modify the OSPF settings on the interfaces. Some interface parameter values must be consistent across all interfaces to avoid routing errors. For example, set the same time interval for the hello packets on all routers in the OSPF network to prevent misconfiguration of OSPF neighbors.
PAGE 620
ip ospf transmit-delay seconds ○ seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535 (the default is 1 second). The transmit delay must be the same on all routers in the OSPF network. To view interface configurations, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION INTERFACE mode. To view interface status in the OSPF process, use the show ip ospf interface command in EXEC mode. The bold lines in the example show the change on the interface. The change is reflected in the OSPF configuration.
PAGE 621
● mode — the situation or situations that trigger a graceful restart. ● role — the role or roles the configured router can perform. NOTE: By default, OSPFv2 graceful restart is disabled. To enable and configure OSPFv2 graceful restart, use the following commands. 1. Enable OSPFv2 graceful-restart globally and set the grace period. CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF- id mode graceful-restart grace-period seconds The seconds range is from 40 and 3000.
PAGE 622
Creating Filter Routes To filter routes, use prefix lists. OSPF applies prefix lists to incoming or outgoing routes. Incoming routes must meet the conditions of the prefix lists. If they do not, OSPF does not add the route to the routing table. Configure the prefix list in CONFIGURATION PREFIX LIST mode prior to assigning it to the OSPF process. ● Create a prefix list and assign it a unique name. CONFIGURATION mode ip prefix-list prefix-name You are in PREFIX LIST mode.
PAGE 623
router ospf 34 network 10.1.2.32 0.0.0.255 area 2.2.2.2 network 10.1.3.24 0.0.0.255 area 3.3.3.3 distribute-list dilling in DellEMC(conf-router_ospf)# Troubleshooting OSPFv2 Use the information in this section to troubleshoot OSPFv2 operation on the switch. Be sure to check the following, as these questions represent typical issues that interrupt an OSPFv2 process. NOTE: The following tasks are not a comprehensive; they provide some examples of typical troubleshooting checks.
PAGE 624
○ database-timers rate-limit: view the LSAs currently in the queue. DellEMC#show run ospf ! router ospf 4 router-id 4.4.4.4 network 4.4.4.0/28 area 1 ! ipv6 router ospf 999 default-information originate always router-id 10.10.10.10 DellEMC# Sample Configurations for OSPFv2 The following configurations are examples for enabling OSPFv2. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations.
PAGE 625
ip address 192.168.10.100/24 no shutdown OSPF Area 0 — Te 3/1/1 and 3/2/1 router ospf 33333 network 192.168.20.0/24 area 0 network 10.1.1.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.13.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 30 ip address 192.168.20.100/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/3/1 ip address 10.1.1.2/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/3/2 ip address 10.2.13.3/24 no shutdown OSPF Area 0 — Te 2/1/1 and 2/2/1 router ospf 22222 network 192.168.30.0/24 area 0 network 10.1.11.0/24 area 0 network 10.
PAGE 626
3. No-summary – To act as totally stubby area — NSSA area can be converted intoa totally stubby area to reduce the number of Type-3 LSAs. Once it is configured, NSSA ABR will inject Type-3 LSAs into the NSSA area for default routes. The remaining Type-3 LSAs are not allowed inside this area. Configuration Task List for OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) This section describes the configuration tasks for Open Shortest Path First version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) on the switch.
PAGE 627
INTERFACE mode ipv6 ospf interface-cost ○ interface-cost:The range is from 1 to 65535. Default cost is based on the bandwidth. ● Specify how the OSPF interface cost is calculated based on the reference bandwidth method. The cost of an interface is calculated as Reference Bandwidth/Interface speed. ROUTER OSPFv3 auto-cost [reference-bandwidth ref-bw] To return to the default bandwidth or to assign cost based on the interface type, use the no auto-cost [referencebandwidth ref-bw] command.
PAGE 628
router-id {number} ○ number: the IPv4 address. The format is A.B.C.D. NOTE: Enter the router-id for an OSPFv3 router as an IPv4 IP address. ● Disable OSPF. CONFIGURATION mode no ipv6 router ospf process-id ● Reset the OSPFv3 process. EXEC Privilege mode clear ipv6 ospf process Assigning OSPFv3 Process ID and Router ID to a VRF To assign, disable, or reset OSPFv3 on a non-default VRF, use the following commands. ● Enable the OSPFv3 process on a non-default VRF and enter OSPFv3 mode.
PAGE 629
● Specify whether some or all some of the interfaces are passive. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode passive-interface {interface-type} Interface: identifies the specific interface that is passive. ○ ○ ○ ○ For For For For a a a a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 630
By default, OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA. To enable OSPFv3 graceful restart, enter the ipv6 router ospf process-id command to enter OSPFv3 configuration mode. Then configure a grace period using the graceful-restart grace-period command. The grace period is the time that the OSPFv3 neighbors continue to advertise the restarting router as though it is fully adjacent.
PAGE 631
The following example shows the show run ospf command. DellEMC#show run ospf ! router ospf 1 router-id 200.1.1.1 log-adjacency-changes graceful-restart grace-period 180 network 20.1.1.0/24 area 0 network 30.1.1.0/24 area 0 ! ipv6 router ospf 1 log-adjacency-changes graceful-restart grace-period 180 The following example shows the show ipv6 ospf database database-summary command. DellEMC#show ipv6 ospf database database-summary ! OSPFv3 Router with ID (200.1.1.
PAGE 632
IPsec is a set of protocols developed by the internet engineering task force (IETF) to support secure exchange of packets at the IP layer. IPsec supports two encryption modes: transport and tunnel. ● Transport mode — encrypts only the data portion (payload) of each packet, but leaves the header untouched. ● Tunnel mode — is more secure and encrypts both the header and payload. On the receiving side, an IPsec-compliant device decrypts each packet.
PAGE 633
NOTE: To encrypt all keys on a router, use the service password-encryption command in Global Configuration mode. However, this command does not provide a high level of network security. To enable key encryption in an IPsec security policy at an interface or area level, specify 7 for [key-encryption-type] when you enter the ipv6 ospf authentication ipsec or ipv6 ospf encryption ipsec command.
PAGE 634
● Enable IPsec encryption for OSPFv3 packets on an IPv6-based interface. INTERFACE mode ipv6 ospf encryption {null | ipsec spi number esp encryption-algorithm [key-encryptiontype] key authentication-algorithm [key-authentication-type] key} ○ null: causes an encryption policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the interface. ○ ipsec spi number: is the security policy index (SPI) value. The range is from 256 to 4294967295.
PAGE 635
no area area-id authentication ipsec spi number ● Display the configuration of IPSec authentication policies on the router. show crypto ipsec policy Configuring IPsec Encryption for an OSPFv3 Area To configure, remove, or display IPsec encryption in an OSPFv3 area, use the following commands. Prerequisite: Before you enable IPsec encryption in an OSPFv3 area, first enable OSPFv3 globally on the router (refer to Configuration Task List for OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6)).
PAGE 636
● Display security associations set up for OSPFv3 links in IPsec authentication and encryption policies on the router. EXEC Privilege show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 [interface interface] To display information on the SAs used on a specific interface, enter interface interface, where interface is one of the following values: ○ ○ ○ ○ For For For For a a a a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 637
STATUS : ACTIVE outbound ah sas spi : 500 (0x1f4) transform : ah-md5-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE inbound esp sas outbound esp sas Interface: TenGigabitEthernet 1/2/1 Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe40:4d11 IPSecv6 policy name: OSPFv3-1-600 inbound ah sas outbound ah sas inbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE outbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) tr
PAGE 638
show ipv6 route [vrf vrf-name] summary ● View the summary information for the OSPFv3 database. EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 ospf [vrf vrf-name] database ● View the configuration of OSPFv3 neighbors. EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 ospf [vrf vrf-name] neighbor ● View debug messages for all OSPFv3 interfaces.
PAGE 639
SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.5.0 = INTEGER: 2 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.6.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.7.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.8.0 = Counter32: 10088 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.9.0 = Counter32: 10076 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.10.0 = Gauge32: 7 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.11.0 = INTEGER: -1 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.12.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.13.0 = INTEGER: 2 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.14.0 = Gauge32: 100000 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.15.
PAGE 640
36 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows a switch to make routing decisions based on policies applied to an interface. Topics: • • • • Overview Implementing PBR Configuration Task List for Policy-based Routing Sample Configuration Overview When a router receives a packet, the router decides where to forward the packet based on the destination address in the packet, which is used to look up an entry in a routing table.
PAGE 641
● ● ● ● Destination IP address and mask Source port Destination port TCP Flags After you apply a redirect-list to an interface, all traffic passing through it is subjected to the rules defined in the redirect-list. Traffic is forwarded based on the following: ● ● ● ● Next-hop addresses are verified. If the specified next hop is reachable, traffic is forwarded to the specified next-hop. If the specified next-hops are not reachable, the normal routing table is used to forward the traffic.
PAGE 642
PBR Exceptions (Permit) To create an exception to a redirect list, use thepermit command. Exceptions are used when a forwarding decision should be based on the routing table rather than a routing policy. The Dell EMC Networking OS assigns the first available sequence number to a rule configured without a sequence number and inserts the rule into the PBR CAM region next to the existing entries. Because the order of rules is important, ensure that you configure any necessary sequence numbers.
PAGE 643
● ● ● ● source ip-address or any or host ip-address is the Source’s IP address FORMAT: A.B.C.D/NN, or ANY or HOST IP address destination ip-address or any or host ip-address is the Destination’s IP address FORMAT: A.B.C.D/NN, or ANY or HOST IP address To delete a rule, use the no redirect command.
PAGE 644
multiple seq redirect commands with the same source and destination address and specify a different next-hop IP address. In this way, the recursive routes are used as different forwarding routes for dynamic failover. If the primary path goes down and the recursive route is removed from the routing table, the seq redirect command is ignored and the next command in the list with a different route is used.
PAGE 645
EXEC mode show ip redirect-list redirect-list-name 2. View the redirect list entries programmed in the CAM. EXEC mode show cam pbr show cam-usage List the redirect list configuration using the show ip redirect-list redirect-list-name command. The noncontiguous mask displays in dotted format (x.x.x.x). The contiguous mask displays in /x format. DellEMC#show ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel IP redirect-list explicit_tunnel: Defined as: seq 5 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.
PAGE 646
06081 0 N/A TCP 0x10 00:00:00:00:00:09 8/1 0 40 234.234.234.234 255.234.234.234 222.222.222.222/24 Sample Configuration You can use the following example configuration to set up a PBR. These are not comprehensive directions but are intended to give you a guidance with typical configurations. You can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. Make the necessary changes to support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on.
PAGE 647
seq 10 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.0/24 any seq 15 permit ip any any Assign Redirect-List GOLD to Interface 2/11 EDGE_ROUTER(conf)#int Te 2/11/1 EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Te-2/11/1)#ip add 192.168.3.
PAGE 648
3 4 IP Host reachability IP Host reachability 42.1.1.2/32 43.1.1.2/32 Up Up 00:00:59 00:00:59 Apply the Redirect Rule to an Interface: DellEMC# DellEMC(conf)#int TenGigabitEthernet 2/28 DellEMC(conf-if-te-2/28)#ip redirect-group redirect_list_with_track DellEMC(conf-if-te-2/28)#end Verify the Applied Redirect Rules: DellEMC#show ip redirect-list redirect_list_with_track IP redirect-list redirect_list_with_track Defined as: seq 5 redirect 42.1.1.2 track 3 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.
PAGE 649
2 Interface ipv6 routing DellEMC# Tunnel 2 Up 00:00:00 Create a Redirect-list with Track Objects pertaining to Tunnel Interfaces: DellEMC#configure terminal DellEMC(conf)#ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#redirect tunnel 1 track DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#redirect tunnel 1 track DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#redirect tunnel 1 track 144.144.144.
PAGE 650
37 PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) Protocol-independent multicast sparse-mode (PIM-SM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic to a subnet only after a request using a PIM Join message; this behavior is the opposite of PIM-Dense mode, which forwards multicast traffic to all subnets until a request to stop.
PAGE 651
2. The last-hop DR sends a PIM Join message to the RP. All routers along the way, including the RP, create an (*,G) entry in their multicast routing table, and the interface on which the message was received becomes the outgoing interface associated with the (*,G) entry. This process constructs an RPT branch to the RP. 3. If a host on the same subnet as another multicast receiver sends an IGMP report for the same multicast group, the gateway takes no action.
PAGE 652
3. Enable PIM-SM on an interface. Enable multicast routing. CONFIGURATION mode {ip | ipv6} multicast-routing [vrf vrf-name] Related Configuration Tasks The following are related PIM-SM configuration tasks. ● ● ● ● Configuring S,G Expiry Timers Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point Configuring a Designated Router Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains Enable PIM-SM You must enable PIM-SM on each participating interface. 1. Enable IPv4 or IPv6 multicast routing on the system.
PAGE 653
Following is an example of show ip pim neighbor command output: DellEMC#show Neighbor Address 127.87.5.5 127.87.3.5 127.87.50.
PAGE 654
Configuring S,G Expiry Timers You can configure a global expiry time (for all [S,G] entries). By default, [S,G] entries expire in 210 seconds. When you create, delete, or update an expiry time, the changes are applied when the keep alive timer refreshes. To configure a global expiry time, use the following command. Enable global expiry timer for S, G entries. CONFIGURATION mode {ip | ipv6} pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer seconds The range is from 211 to 86,400 seconds. The default is 210.
PAGE 655
Overriding Bootstrap Router Updates PIM-SM routers must know the address of the RP for each group for which they have (*,G) entry. This address is obtained automatically through the bootstrap router (BSR) mechanism or a static RP configuration. Use the following command if you have configured a static RP for a group. If you do not use the override option with the following command, the RPs advertised in the BSR updates take precedence over any statically configured RPs.
PAGE 656
INTERFACE mode {ip | ipv6} pim query-interval seconds ● Display the current value of these parameter.
PAGE 657
Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains A PIM domain is a contiguous set of routers that all implement PIM and are configured to operate within a common boundary defined by PIM multicast border routers (PMBRs). PMBRs connect each PIM domain to the rest of the Internet. Create multicast boundaries and domains by filtering inbound and outbound bootstrap router (BSR) messages per interface. The following command is applied to the subsequent inbound and outbound updates.
PAGE 658
show ip pim bsr-router Example: DellEMC# show ip pim bsr-router PIMv2 Bootstrap information This system is the Bootstrap Router (v2) BSR address: 7.7.7.7 (?) BSR Priority: 0, Hash mask length: 30 Next bootstrap message in 00:00:08 This system is a candidate BSR Candidate BSR address: 7.7.7.
PAGE 659
38 PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) PIM source-specific mode (PIM-SSM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic from a single source to a subnet. In the other versions of protocol independent multicast (PIM), a receiver subscribes to a group only. The receiver receives traffic not just from the source in which it is interested but from all sources sending to that group.
PAGE 660
Related Configuration Tasks ● Use PIM-SSM with IGMP Version 2 Hosts Enabling PIM-SSM To enable PIM-SSM, follow these steps. 1. Create an ACL that uses permit rules to specify what range of addresses should use SSM. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard name 2. Enter the ip pim ssm-range command and specify the ACL you created. CONFIGURATION mode ip pim ssm-range acl-name To display address ranges in the PIM-SSM range, use the show ip pim ssm-range command from EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 661
Configuring PIM-SSM with IGMPv2 R1(conf)#do show run pim ! ip pim rp-address 10.11.12.2 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 ip pim ssm-range ssm R1(conf)#do show run acl ! ip access-list standard map seq 5 permit host 239.0.0.2 ! ip access-list standard ssm seq 5 permit host 239.0.0.2 R1(conf)#ip igmp ssm-map map 10.11.5.2 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime Expires 239.0.0.
PAGE 662
1. C-BSRs flood their candidacy throughout the domain in a BSM. Each message contains a BSR priority value, and the C-BSR with the highest priority value becomes the BSR. 2. Each C-RP unicasts periodic Candidate-RP-Advertisements to the BSR. Each message contains an RP priority value and the group ranges for which it is a C-RP. 3. The BSR collects the most efficient group-to-RP mappings and periodically updates it to all PIM routes in the network. 4.
PAGE 663
Enabling RP to Server Specific Multicast Groups When you configure an RP candidate, its advertisement is sent to the entire multicast address range and the group-to-RP mapping is advertised for the entire range of multicast address. Starting with Dell EMC Networking OS 9.11.0.0, you can configure an RP candidate for a specified range of multicast group address. The Configured multicast group ranges are used by the BSR protocol to advertise the candidate RPs in the bootstrap messages.
PAGE 664
39 Port Monitoring Port monitoring (also referred to as mirroring ) allows you to monitor ingress and/or egress traffic on specified ports. The mirrored traffic can be sent to a port to which a network analyzer is connected to inspect or troubleshoot the traffic. Mirroring is used for monitoring Ingress or Egress or both Ingress and Egress traffic on a specific port(s). This mirrored traffic can be sent to a port where a network sniffer can connect and monitor the traffic.
PAGE 665
Port Monitoring Port monitoring is supported on both physical and logical interfaces, such as VLAN and port-channel interfaces. The source port (MD) with monitored traffic and the destination ports (MG) to which an analyzer can be attached must be on the same switch. You can configure up to 128 source ports in a monitoring session. Only one destination port is supported in a monitoring session. The platform supports multiple source-destination statements in a single monitor session.
PAGE 666
Similarly, if BPDUs are transmitted, the MG port receives them tagged with the VLAN ID 4095. This behavior might result in a difference between the number of egress packets on the MD port and monitored packets on the MG port. Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: The platform continues to mirror outgoing traffic even after an MD participating in spanning tree protocol (STP) transitions from the forwarding to blocking. Configuring Port Monitoring To configure port monitoring, use the following commands. 1.
PAGE 667
N/A N/A 0 1 Po 10 N/A Vl 40 N/A Te 1/2/1 No Te 1/3/1 No rx Port 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 No rx Flow 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 No NOTE: Source as VLAN is achieved via Flow based mirroring. Please refer section Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring. In the following example, the host and server are exchanging traffic which passes through the uplink interface 1/1/1.
PAGE 668
Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 3 ingress traffic. You can specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. NOTE: Flow-based monitoring is supported for known unicast egress traffic. 1. Create a monitoring session. CONFIGURATION mode monitor session session-id 2.
PAGE 669
--------- ---------------- --------- ------- ---- ----------- --------0 Te 1/1/1 Te 1/2/1 rx interface No N/A N/A yes --------0.0.0.0 -------0.0.0.0 ---0 --0 Configuring IPv6 Flow-Based Mirroring This section describes how to configure IPv6 flow-based mirroring in the monitor session. You can configure IPv6 flow-based mirroring under monitor session. The IPv6 flow-based mirroring is supported in SPAN, RSPAN, and ERSPAN monitor sessions. By default, all mirror ACLs is considered as implicit permit. .
PAGE 670
DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#seq 5 permit icmp any any count bytes monitor DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#seq 10 permit ipv6 10::/64 any count bytes monitor DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#seq 15 deny udp any any count bytes DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#seq 20 deny tcp any any count bytes DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#exit DellEMC(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#ipv6 access-group testflow in The following is sample running-configuration of IPv6 flow-based mirroring with ACLs applied to monitor sessions
PAGE 671
In a remote-port mirroring session, monitored traffic is tagged with a VLAN ID and switched on a user-defined, non-routable L2 VLAN. The VLAN is reserved in the network to carry only mirrored traffic, which is forwarded on all egress ports of the VLAN. Each intermediate switch that participates in the transport of mirrored traffic must be configured with the reserved L2 VLAN.
PAGE 672
● You can configure any switch in the network with source ports and destination ports, and allow it to function in an intermediate transport session for a reserved VLAN at the same time for multiple remote-port mirroring sessions. You can enable and disable individual mirroring sessions. ● BPDU monitoring is not required to use remote port mirroring.
PAGE 673
Restrictions When you configure remote port mirroring, the following restrictions apply: ● You can configure the same source port to be used in multiple source sessions. ● You cannot configure a source port channel or source VLAN in a source session if the port channel or VLAN has a member port that is configured as a destination port in a remote-port mirroring session.
PAGE 674
2. A source session that consists of multiple source ports, port channels, and VLANs which are associated with the dedicated VLAN and located on different source switches 3. A destination session that consists of multiple destination ports associated with the dedicated VLAN and located on different destination switches Configuring a RSPAN VLAN for RPM Following are the steps for configuring a RSPAN VLAN for RPM. You must repeat the below mentioned steps on source, intermediate, and destination switches. 1.
PAGE 675
monitor session session-id 2. Associate the Layer 2 VLAN used to transport monitored traffic with this destination session. MONITOR SESSION mode source remote-vlan vlan-id destination interface direction {rx | tx | both} 3. (Optional) Configure destination ports so that the VLAN tag is added to the monitored traffic. MONITOR SESSION mode tagged destination interface To configure destination ports as untagged ports, enter the untagged destinationcommand.
PAGE 676
DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-1)#no disable DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-1)#exit Configuring Remote Port Mirroring on an intermediate switch Following is a sample configuration of RPM on an intermediate switch.
PAGE 677
Following is a sample configuration of RPM on a destination switch.
PAGE 678
DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-3)#source remote-vlan 30 destination tengigabitethernet 1/8 DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-3)#tagged destination tengigabitethernet 1/8 DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-3)#end Encapsulated Remote Port Monitoring Encapsulated Remote Port Monitoring (ERPM) copies traffic from source ports/port-channels or source VLANs and forwards the traffic using routable GRE-encapsulated packets to the destination IP address specified in the session.
PAGE 679
Table 72. Configuration steps for ERPM (continued) Step Command Purpose 6 no disable Enter the no disable command to enable the ERPM session. The following example shows an ERPM configuration: DellEMC(conf)#monitor session 0 type erpm DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-0)#source tengigabitethernet 1/9/1 direction rx DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-0)#source port-channel 1 direction tx DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-0)#erpm source-ip 1.1.1.1 dest-ip 7.1.1.
PAGE 680
ERPM Behavior on a typical Dell EMC Networking OS The Dell EMC Networking OS is designed to support only the Encapsulation of the data received / transmitted at the specified source port (Port A). An ERPM destination session / decapsulation of the ERPM packets at the destination Switch are not supported. Figure 103.
PAGE 681
○ Either have a Linux server's ethernet port ip as the ERPM destination ip or connect the ingress interface of the server to the ERPM MirrorToPort. The analyzer should listen in the forward/egress interface. If there is only one interface, one can choose the ingress and forward interface to be same and listen in the tx direction of the interface. ○ Download/ Write a small script (for example: erpm.py) such that it will strip the given ERPM packet starting from the bit where GRE header ends.
PAGE 682
VLT Fail-over Scenario Consider a scenario where port monitoring is configured to mirror traffic on the source port or LAG of a VLT device to a destination port on an other device on the network. A fail-over occurs when the primary VLT device fails causing the secondary VLT device to take over. At the time of failover, the mirrored packets are dropped for some time. This time period is equivalent to the gracious VLT failover recovery time.
PAGE 683
Table 73. RPM over VLT Scenarios (continued) Scenario RPM Restriction Recommended Solution device:source remote vlan destination orphan port. Mirroring VLT LAG across VLT Peers — In this scenario, the VLT LAG on the primary VLT peer is mirrored to an orphan port on the secondary VLT peer through the ICL LAG. The packet analyzer is connected to the secondary VLT peer. No restrictions apply to the RPM session.
PAGE 684
40 Private VLANs (PVLAN) The private VLAN (PVLAN) feature is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. For syntax details about the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Private VLANs commands chapter in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Private VLANs extend the Dell EMC Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same virtual local area network (VLAN).
PAGE 685
PVLAN port types include: ● Community port — a port that belongs to a community VLAN and is allowed to communicate with other ports in the same community VLAN and with promiscuous ports. ● Host port — in the context of a private VLAN, is a port in a secondary VLAN: ○ The port must first be assigned that role in INTERFACE mode. ○ A port assigned the host role cannot be added to a regular VLAN. ● Isolated port — a port that, in Layer 2, can only communicate with promiscuous ports that are in the same PVLAN.
PAGE 686
Configuration Task List The following sections contain the procedures that configure a private VLAN. ● ● ● ● Creating Creating Creating Creating PVLAN Ports a Primary VLAN a Community VLAN an Isolated VLAN Creating PVLAN ports PVLAN ports are ports that will be assigned to the PVLAN. 1. Access INTERFACE mode for the port that you want to assign to a PVLAN. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface 2. Enable the port. INTERFACE mode no shutdown 3. Set the port in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE mode switchport 4.
PAGE 687
CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 2. Enable the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no shutdown 3. Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to primary. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mode primary 4. Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan vlan-list The list of secondary VLANs can be: ● Specified in comma-delimited (VLAN-ID,VLAN-ID) or hyphenated-range format (VLAN-ID-VLAN-ID). ● Specified with this command even before they have been created.
PAGE 688
You can enter the interfaces singly or in range format, either comma-delimited (slot/port,port,port) or hyphenated (slot/ port-port). You can only add host (isolated) ports to the VLAN. Creating an Isolated VLAN An isolated VLAN is a secondary VLAN of a primary VLAN. An isolated VLAN port can only talk with the promiscuous ports in that primary VLAN. 1. Access INTERFACE VLAN mode for the VLAN that you want to make an isolated VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 2. Enable the VLAN.
PAGE 689
Private VLAN Configuration Example The following example shows a private VLAN topology. Figure 104. Sample Private VLAN Topology The following configuration is based on the example diagram for the Z9500: ● ● ● ● ● Te Te Te Te Te 1/1 and Te 1/23 are configured as promiscuous ports, assigned to the primary VLAN, VLAN 4000. 1/25 is configured as a PVLAN trunk port, also assigned to the primary VLAN 4000. 1/24 and Te 1/47 are configured as host ports and assigned to the isolated VLAN, VLAN 4003.
PAGE 690
● The S4810 ports would have the same intra-switch communication characteristics as described for the Z9500. ● For transmission between switches, tagged packets originating from host PVLAN ports in one secondary VLAN and destined for host PVLAN ports in the other switch travel through the promiscuous ports in the local VLAN 4000 and then through the trunk ports (1/25 in each switch). Inspecting the Private VLAN Configuration The standard methods of inspecting configurations also apply in PVLANs.
PAGE 691
G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack NUM * 1 100 P 200 I 201 Status Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Description Q Ports primary VLAN in PVLAN T Te 1/19/1-2 isolated VLAN in VLAN 200 T Te 1/21/1 The following example shows viewing a private VLAN configuration.
PAGE 692
41 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN).
PAGE 693
Figure 105. Per-VLAN Spanning Tree The Dell EMC Networking OS supports three other variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 74. Spanning Tree Variations Dell EMC Networking OS Supports Dell EMC Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 802 .
PAGE 694
Configure Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus Configuring PVST+ is a four-step process. 1. 2. 3. 4. Configure interfaces for Layer 2. Place the interfaces in VLANs. Enable PVST+. Optionally, for load balancing, select a nondefault bridge-priority for a VLAN.
PAGE 695
Influencing PVST+ Root Selection As shown in the previous per-VLAN spanning tree illustration, all VLANs use the same forwarding topology because R2 is elected the root, and all TenGigabitEthernet ports have the same cost. The following per-VLAN spanning tree illustration changes the bridge priority of each bridge so that a different forwarding topology is generated for each VLAN. This behavior demonstrates how you can use PVST+ to achieve load balancing. Figure 106.
PAGE 696
Current root has priority 4096, Address 0001.e80d.b6d6 Number of topology changes 5, last change occurred 00:34:37 ago on Te 1/32/1 Port 375 (TenGigabitEthernet 1/22/1) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.375 Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated port id is 128.
PAGE 697
● Port priority — influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost. The following tables lists the default values for port cost by interface. Table 75.
PAGE 698
CAUTION: Configure EdgePort only on links connecting to an end station. EdgePort can cause loops if you enable it on an interface connected to a network. To enable EdgePort on an interface, use the following command. ● Enable EdgePort on an interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree pvst edge-port [bpduguard | shutdown-on-violation] The EdgePort status of each interface is given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command, as previously shown.
PAGE 699
Figure 107. PVST+ with Extend System ID ● Augment the bridge ID with the VLAN ID. PROTOCOL PVST mode extend system-id DellEMC(conf-pvst)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 brief VLAN 5 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32773, Address 0001.e832.73f7 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32773 (priority 32768 sys-id-ext 5), Address 0001.e832.
PAGE 700
no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/22,32/1 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 100 bridge-priority 4096 Example of PVST+ Configuration (R2) interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/12/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/32/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/12,32/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/12,32/1 no shutd
PAGE 701
42 Quality of Service (QoS) This chapter describes how to use and configure Quality of Service service (QoS) features on the switch. Differentiated service is accomplished by classifying and queuing traffic, and assigning priorities to those queues. Table 76.
PAGE 702
Table 76. Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) Support for Port-Based, Policy-Based Features (continued) Feature Direction Create Output Policy Maps Egress Specify an Aggregate QoS Policy Egress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing Weighted Random Early Detection Egress Create WRED Profiles Egress Figure 108.
PAGE 703
• • • • • • Configuring Policy-Based Rate Shaping Configuring Weights and ECN for WRED Configuring WRED and ECN Attributes Guidelines for Configuring ECN for Classifying and Color-Marking Packets Applying Layer 2 Match Criteria on a Layer 3 Interface Enabling Buffer Statistics Tracking Implementation Information The Dell EMC Networking QoS implementation complies with IEEE 802.1p User Priority Bits for QoS Indication.
PAGE 704
dot1p-priority DellEMC#configure terminal DellEMC(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#switchport DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#dot1p-priority 1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#end Honoring dot1p Priorities on Ingress Traffic By default, Dell EMC Networking OS does not honor dot1p priorities on ingress traffic. You can configure this feature on physical interfaces and port-channels, but you cannot configure it on individual interfaces in a port channel.
PAGE 705
Configuring Port-Based Rate Shaping Rate shaping buffers, rather than drops, traffic exceeding the specified rate until the buffer is exhausted. If any stream exceeds the configured bandwidth on a continuous basis, it can consume all of the buffer space that is allocated to the port. Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: Rate shaping is effectively rate limiting because of its smaller buffer size.
PAGE 706
Policy-Based QoS Configurations Policy-based QoS configurations consist of the components shown in the following example. Figure 109. Constructing Policy-Based QoS Configurations Classify Traffic Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality of service policies to different types of traffic. For both class maps, Layer 2 and Layer 3, Dell EMC Networking OS matches packets against match criteria in the order that you configure them.
PAGE 707
class-map match-any 2. Create a match-all class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-all 3. Specify your match criteria. CLASS MAP mode [seq sequence number] match {ip | ipv6 | ip-any} After you create a class-map, Dell EMC Networking OS places you in CLASS MAP mode. Match-any class maps allow up to five ACLs. Match-all class-maps allow only one ACL. NOTE: Within a class-map, the match rules are installed in the sequence number order. 4. Link the class-map to a queue.
PAGE 708
3. Specify your match criteria. CLASS MAP mode [seq sequence number] match mac After you create a class-map, Dell EMC Networking OS places you in CLASS MAP mode. Match-any class maps allow up to five access-lists. Match-all class-maps allow only one. You can match against only one VLAN ID. 4. Link the class-map to a queue.
PAGE 709
ip access-list extended AF1-FB1 seq 5 permit ip host 23.64.0.2 any seq 10 deny ip any any ! ip access-list extended AF1-FB2 seq 5 permit ip host 23.64.0.3 any seq 10 deny ip any any ! ip access-list extended AF2 seq 5 permit ip host 23.64.0.5 any seq 10 deny ip any any In the previous example, the ClassAF1 does not classify traffic as intended. Traffic matching the first match criteria is classified to Queue 1, but all other traffic is classified to Queue 0 as a result of CAM entry 20419.
PAGE 710
● If two rate three color policer is configured along with this feature then, ○ x < CIR – will be marked as “Green” ○ CIR < x< PIR – will be marked as “Yellow” ○ PIR < x – will be marked as “Red” But ‘Green’ packets matching the specific match criteria for which ‘color-marking’ is configured will be over-written and marked as “Yellow”. Create a QoS Policy There are two types of QoS policies — input and output. Input QoS policies regulate Layer 3 and Layer 2 ingress traffic.
PAGE 711
set mac-dot1p Constraints The systems supporting this feature should use only the default global dot1p to queue mapping configuration as described in Dot1p to Queue Mapping Requirement. Creating an Output QoS Policy To create an output QoS policy, use the following commands. 1. Create an output QoS policy. CONFIGURATION mode qos-policy-output 2.
PAGE 712
When you assign a percentage to one queue, note that this change also affects the amount of bandwidth that is allocated to other queues. Therefore, whenever you are allocating bandwidth to one queue, Dell EMC Networking recommends evaluating your bandwidth requirements for all other queues as well. ● Assign each queue a bandwidth percentage ranging from 1 to 100%, in increments of 1%. bandwidth-percentage Specifying WRED Drop Precedence You can configure the WRED drop precedence in an output QoS policy.
PAGE 713
CONFIG-INTERFACE mode qos dscp-color-policy color-map-name Example: Create a DSCP Color Map The following example creates a DSCP color map profile, color-awareness policy, and applies it to interface 1/11.
PAGE 714
Display summary information about a color policy for a specific interface. DellEMC# show qos dscp-color-policy summary tengigabitethernet 1/10/1 Interface dscp-color-map TE 1/10/1 mapONE Display detailed information about a color policy for a specific interface DellEMC# show qos dscp-color-policy detail tengigabitethernet 1/10/1 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/10/1 Dscp-color-map mapONE yellow 4,7 red 20,30 Create Policy Maps There are two types of policy maps: input and output.
PAGE 715
Table 79.
PAGE 716
● Layer 2 or Layer 3 service policies supersede dot1p service classes. ● Create service classes. INTERFACE mode service-class dynamic dot1p Guaranteeing Bandwidth to dot1p-Based Service Queues To guarantee bandwidth to dot1p-based service queues, use the following command. Apply this command in the same way as the bandwidth-percentage command in an output QoS policy (refer to Allocating Bandwidth to Queue).
PAGE 717
Specifying an Aggregate QoS Policy To specify an aggregate QoS policy, use the following command. ● Specify an aggregate QoS policy. POLICY-MAP-OUT mode policy-aggregate Applying an Output Policy Map to an Interface To apply an output policy map to an interface, use the following command. ● Apply an input policy map to an interface. INTERFACE mode service-policy output You can apply the same policy map to multiple interfaces, and you can modify a policy map after you apply it.
PAGE 718
Enter the name for the policy map in character format (32 characters maximum). Queue Classification Requirements for PFC Functionality Queue classification requirements for PFC functionality are mentioned below: ● On untagged ports, Queue classification must be based on DSCP. ● On tagged ports, Queue classification must be based on Dot1p. Layer 3 classification configurations should not be present on the port.
PAGE 719
You will also be able to mark both DSCP and Dot1p in the L3 Input Qos Policy: DellEMC(conf)#qos-policy-input qos-input DellEMC(conf-qos-policy-in)#set mac-dot1p 2 DellEMC(conf-qos-policy-in)#set ip-dscp 5 DellEMC(conf-qos-policy-in)# Weighted Random Early Detection Weighted random early detection (WRED) is a congestion avoidance mechanism that drops packets to prevent buffering resources from being consumed.
PAGE 720
Applying a WRED Profile to Traffic After you create a WRED profile, you must specify to which traffic Dell EMC Networking OS should apply the profile. Dell EMC Networking OS assigns a color (also called drop precedence) — red, yellow, or green — to each packet based on it DSCP value before queuing it. DSCP is a 6–bit field. Dell EMC Networking uses the first three bits (LSB) of this field (DP) to determine the drop precedence. ● DP values of 110 and 100, 101 map to yellow; all other values map to green.
PAGE 721
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 UCAST 1708252734 2340972 874625399808 1198000301 1357413570 0 694995747840 4 UCAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 UCAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 UCAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 UCAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 UCAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 UCAST 1132 1 143063 217 0 0 0 10 MCAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 MCAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 MCAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 MCAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 MCAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 MCAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 MCA
PAGE 722
CAM entries the policy-map would consume; the test cam-usage command is useful because it provides this measurement. ● Verify that there are enough available CAM entries.
PAGE 723
QOS-POLICY-OUT mode DellEMC(config-qos-policy-out)# rate shape pps peak-rate burst-packets committed pps committed-rate burst-packets 4. Alternatively, configure the committed rate and committed burst size in bytes. QOS-POLICY-OUT mode DellEMC(config-qos-policy-out)# rate shape Kbps peak-rate burst-KB committed Kbps committed-rate burst-KB Configuring Weights and ECN for WRED The WRED congestion avoidance functionality drops packets to prevent buffering resources from being consumed.
PAGE 724
● When WRED is configured on the global service-pool (regardless of whether ECN on global service-pool is configured), and one or more queues are enabled with both WRED and ECN, ECN marking takes effect. The packets are ECN marked up to shared- buffer limits as determined by the shared-ratio for that global service-pool. WRED/ECN configurations for the queues that belong to backplane ports are common to all the backplane ports and cannot be specified separately for each backplane port granularity.
PAGE 725
DellEMC(conf-wred) #threshold min 300 max 400 max-drop-rate 80 4. Create a global buffer pool that is a shared buffer pool accessed by multiple queues when the minimum guaranteed buffers for the queue are consumed.
PAGE 726
policy-map-input ecn_0_pmap service-queue 0 class-map ecn_0_cmap Applying this policy-map “ecn_0_pmap” will mark all the packets with ‘ecn == 0’ as yellow packets on queue0 (default queue). Classifying Incoming Packets Using ECN and Color-Marking Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) is a capability that enhances WRED by marking the packets instead of causing WRED to drop them when the threshold value is exceeded.
PAGE 727
● PSH ● RST ● URG You can now use the ‘ecn’ match qualifier along with the above TCP flag for classification.
PAGE 728
match ip access-group dscp_40_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_40 ! class-map match-any class_dscp_50 match ip access-group dscp_50_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_50 ! policy-map-input pmap_dscp_40_50 service-queue 2 class-map class_dscp_40 service-queue 3 class-map class_dscp_50 Approach with explicit ECN match qualifiers for ECN packets: ! ip access-list standard dscp_50_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 1 seq 10 permit any dscp 50 ecn 2 seq 15 permit any dscp 50 ec
PAGE 729
INTERFACE mode DellEMC(conf-if-fo-1/49/1)# service-policy input l2p layer2 Managing Hardware Buffer Statistics The memory management unit (MMU) is 12.2 MB in size. It contains approximately 60,000 cells, each of which is 208 bytes in size. MMU also has another portion of 3 MB allocated to it. The entire MMU space is shared across a maximum of 104 logical ports to support the egress admission-control functionality to implement scheduling and shaping on per-port and per-queue levels.
PAGE 730
EXEC/EXEC Privilege mode DellEMC#show hardware stack-unit 1 buffer-stats-snapshot unit 3 resource interface all queue mcast 3 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 1 (interface Fo 1/144) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 5 (interface Fo 1/148) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 9 (interface Fo 1/152) ------------------
PAGE 731
--------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------UCAST 0 0 UCAST 1 0 UCAST 2 0 UCAST 3 0 UCAST 4 0 UCAST 5 0 UCAST 6 0 UCAST 7 0 UCAST 8 0 UCAST 9 0 UCAST 10 0 UCAST 11 0 MCAST 0 0 MCAST 1 0 MCAST 2 0 MCAST 3 0 MCAST 4 0 MCAST 5 0 MCAST 6 0 MCAST 7 0 MCAST 8 0 Quality of Service (QoS) 731
PAGE 732
43 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections and is based on a distance-vector algorithm. RIP is based on a distance-vector algorithm; it tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections. RIP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter.
PAGE 733
Table 82. RIP Defaults Feature Default Interfaces running RIP ● Listen to RIPv1 and RIPv2 ● Transmit RIPv1 RIP timers ● ● ● ● Auto summarization Enabled ECMP paths supported 16 update timer = 30 seconds invalid timer = 180 seconds holddown timer = 180 seconds flush timer = 240 seconds Configuration Information By default, RIP is disabled in Dell EMC Networking OS. To configure RIP, you must use commands in two modes: ROUTER RIP and INTERFACE.
PAGE 734
The Dell EMC Networking OS default is to send RIPv1 and to receive RIPv1 and RIPv2. To change the RIP version globally, use the version command in ROUTER RIP mode. To view the global RIP configuration, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode or the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. DellEMC(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 10.0.0.0 DellEMC(conf-router_rip)# When the RIP process has learned the RIP routes, use the show ip rip database command in EXEC mode to view those routes.
PAGE 735
29.0.0.0/8 31.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 31.0.0.0/8 192.162.2.0/24 [120/1] via 192.162.2.0/24 192.161.1.0/24 [120/1] via 192.161.1.0/24 192.162.3.0/24 [120/1] via 192.162.3.0/24 auto-summary 29.10.10.12, 00:00:26, Fa 1/49 auto-summary 29.10.10.12, 00:01:21, Fa 1/49 auto-summary 29.10.10.12, 00:00:27, Fa 1/49 auto-summary 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/49 auto-summary To disable RIP globally, use the no router rip command in CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 736
To view the current RIP configuration, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode or the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. Adding RIP Routes from Other Instances In addition to filtering routes, you can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the RIP process. With the redistribute command, you can include open shortest path first (OSPF), static, or directly connected routes in the RIP process. To add routes from other routing instances or protocols, use the following commands.
PAGE 737
Sending updates every 30 seconds, next due in 23 Invalid after 180 seconds, hold down 180, flushed after 240 Output delay 8 milliseconds between packets Automatic network summarization is in effect Outgoing filter for all interfaces is Incoming filter for all interfaces is Default redistribution metric is 1 Default version control: receive version 2, send version 2 Interface Recv Send TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 2 2 Routing for Networks: 10.0.0.
PAGE 738
To confirm that the default route configuration is completed, use the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. Summarize Routes Routes in the RIPv2 routing table are summarized by default, thus reducing the size of the routing table and improving routing efficiency in large networks. By default, the autosummary command in ROUTER RIP mode is enabled and summarizes RIP routes up to the classful network boundary. If you must perform routing between discontiguous subnets, disable automatic summarization.
PAGE 739
EXEC privilege mode Enable debugging of RIP. The following example shows the confirmation when you enable the debug function. DellEMC#debug ip rip RIP protocol debug is ON DellEMC# To disable RIP, use the no debug ip rip command. RIP Configuration Example The examples in this section show the command sequence to configure RIPv2 on the two routers shown in the following illustration — Core 2 and Core 3. The host prompts used in the following example reflect those names.
PAGE 740
● To display Core 2 RIP activity, use the show ip protocols command. The following example shows the show ip rip database command to view the learned RIP routes on Core 2. Core2(conf-router_rip)#end 00:12:24: %RPM0-P:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console Core2#show ip rip database Total number of routes in RIP database: 7 10.11.30.0/24 [120/1] via 10.11.20.1, 00:00:03, TenGigabitEthernet 2/3/1 10.300.10.0/24 directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 2/4/1 10.200.10.
PAGE 741
10.11.20.0 10.11.10.0 Routing Information Sources: Gateway Distance Last Update 10.11.20.1 120 00:00:12 Distance: (default is 120) Core2# RIP Configuration on Core3 The following example shows how to configure RIPv2 on a host named Core3. Core3(conf)#router rip Core3(conf-router_rip)#version 2 Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 192.168.1.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 192.168.2.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.30.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.20.
PAGE 742
Gateway of last resort is not set Destination Gateway Dist/Metric Last Change ----------- ------- --------------------R 10.11.10.0/24 via 10.11.20.2, Te 3/21/1 120/1 00:01:14 C 10.11.20.0/24 Direct, Te 3/21/1 0/0 00:01:53 C 10.11.30.0/24 Direct, Te 3/11/1 0/0 00:06:00 R 10.200.10.0/24 via 10.11.20.2, Te 3/21/1 120/1 00:01:14 R 10.300.10.0/24 via 10.11.20.2, Te 3/21/1 120/1 00:01:14 C 192.168.1.0/24 Direct, Te 3/23/1 0/0 00:06:53 C 192.168.2.
PAGE 743
10.11.10.0 10.11.20.0 The following example shows viewing the RIP configuration on Core 3. ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1/1 ip address 10.11.30.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/2/1 ip address 10.11.20.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/4/1 ip address 192.168.1.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/5/1 ip address 192.168.2.1/24 no shutdown ! router rip version 2 network 10.11.20.0 network 10.11.30.0 network 192.168.1.0 network 192.168.2.
PAGE 744
44 Remote Monitoring (RMON) RMON is an industry-standard implementation that monitors network traffic by sharing network monitoring information. RMON provides both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring facility and long-term statistics collection on Dell EMC Networking Ethernet interfaces. RMON operates with the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and monitors all nodes on a local area network (LAN) segment. RMON monitors traffic passing through the router and segment traffic not destined for the router.
PAGE 745
[no] rmon alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold [value event-number] falling-threshold value event-number [owner string] OR [no] rmon hc-alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold value event-number falling-threshold value event-number [owner string] Configure the alarm using the following optional parameters: ○ number: alarm number, an integer from 1 to 65,535, the value must be unique in the RMON Alarm Table.
PAGE 746
In the following example, the configuration creates RMON event number 1, with the description “High ifOutErrors”, and generates a log entry when an alarm triggers the event. The user nms1 owns the row that is created in the event table by this command. This configuration also generates an SNMP trap when the event is triggered using the SNMP community string “eventtrap”.
PAGE 747
The following command example enables an RMON MIB collection history group of statistics with an ID number of 20 and an owner of john, both the sampling interval and the number of buckets use their respective defaults.
PAGE 748
45 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1w — that is essentially the same as spanning-tree protocol (STP) but provides faster convergence and interoperability with switches configured with STP and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP).
PAGE 749
● ● ● ● ● ● Prevent Network Disruptions with BPDU Guard Influencing RSTP Root Selection Configuring Spanning Trees as Hitless Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes Configuring Fast Hellos for Link State Detection Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change Important Points to Remember ● RSTP is disabled by default. ● Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one Rapid Spanning Tree (RST) instance.
PAGE 750
To verify that an interface is in Layer 2 mode and enabled, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode. The bold lines indicate that the interface is in Layer 2 mode. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# Enabling Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable RSTP globally on all participating bridges; it is not enabled by default.
PAGE 751
Figure 112. Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled Globally To view the interfaces participating in RSTP, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. DellEMC#show spanning-tree rstp Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.cbb4 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 0 Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
PAGE 752
The port is not in the Edge port mode Port 380 (TenGigabitEthernet 2/4/1) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.380 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.
PAGE 753
Table 84.
PAGE 754
● Port priority — influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost. To change the port cost or priority of an interface, use the following commands. ● Change the port cost of an interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree rstp cost cost The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is listed in the previous table. ● Change the port priority of an interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree rstp priority priority-value The range is from 0 to 15.
PAGE 755
in the hardware after a BPDU violation. BPDUs are dropped in the software after receiving the BPDU violation. This feature is the same as PortFast mode in Spanning Tree. CAUTION: Configure EdgePort only on links connecting to an end station. If you enable EdgePort on an interface connected to a network, it can cause loops.
PAGE 756
NOTE: The hello time is encoded in BPDUs in increments of 1/256ths of a second. The standard minimum hello time in seconds is 1 second, which is encoded as 256. Millisecond. hello times are encoded using values less than 256; the millisecond hello time equals (x/1000)*256. When you configure millisecond hellos, the default hello interval of 2 seconds is still used for edge ports; the millisecond hello interval is not used.
PAGE 757
46 Software-Defined Networking (SDN) The Dell EMC Networking OS supports software-defined networking (SDN). For more information, see the SDN Deployment Guide.
PAGE 758
47 Security This chapter describes several ways to provide security to the Dell EMC Networking system. For details about all the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Reference Guide.
PAGE 759
● Enable AAA accounting and create a record for monitoring the accounting function. CONFIGURATION mode aaa accounting {commands level | dot1x | exec | rest | suppress | system} {default | name} {start-stop | wait-start | stop-only} {radius | tacacs+} The variables are: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ system: sends accounting information of any other AAA configuration. exec: sends accounting information when a user has logged in to EXEC mode.
PAGE 760
CONFIG-LINE-VTY mode accounting commands 15 com15 accounting exec execAcct DellEMC(config-line-vty)# accounting commands 15 com15 DellEMC(config-line-vty)# accounting exec execAcct Monitoring AAA Accounting Dell EMC Networking OS does not support periodic interim accounting because the periodic command can cause heavy congestion when many users are logged in to the network. No specific show command exists for TACACS+ accounting.
PAGE 761
Sample dot1x accounting records The following lists the sample EAP and MAB accounting records EAP START accounting record: Fri May 10 12:20:43 2019 NAS-IP-Address = 10.16.133.
PAGE 762
NAS-Port = 1010 NAS-Port-Id = "GigabitEthernet 1/11" Service-Type = Call-Check Acct-Session-Time = 21 Acct-Session-Id = "00-11-22-33-44-55-4" Acct-Multi-Session-Id = "00-11-22-33-44-55-00-11-33-44-77-88-5e-50-d6-5cc" Acct-Link-Count = 1 Acct-Terminate-Cause = Lost-Carrier Acct-Status-Type = Stop Event-Timestamp = "May 10 2019 23:30:42 CDT" Tmp-String-9 = "ai:" Acct-Unique-Session-Id = "5a761462ef63b815707de5fa1c5ef348" Timestamp = 1557549042 RADIUS Accounting attributes The following tables describe the va
PAGE 763
Table 86. RADIUS Accounting Stop Record Attributes for CLI user (continued) RADIUS Attribute code RADIUS Attribute Description 46 Acct-Session Time Time the user has received the service. 49 Acct-Terminate-Cause Reason for session termination. 61 NAS-Port-Type ASYNC - for Console session. VIRTUAL - for telnet/SSH session. Table 87.
PAGE 764
Table 89. RADIUS Accounting Stop Record Attributes for dot1x supplicant (continued) RADIUS Attribute code RADIUS Attribute Description 4 NAS-IP-Address IPv4 address of the NAS. 95 NAS-IPv6–Address IPv6 address of the NAS. Session Identification Attributes 1 User-Name User name/ Supplicant MAC Address (for MAB). 5 NAS-Port Port on which session is terminated. 6 Service-Type Framed (2) for EAP /Call check (10) for MAB. 8 Framed-IP-Address IPv4 address of supplicant.
PAGE 765
Table 90. Use cases for dot1x supplicant to trigger RADIUS Accounting Start/Stop records (continued) dot1x event Accounting type Attributes Configure Port control to force unauth Stop Stop record attributes with termination cause as port-reinitialized (21). Interface Host mode change (single/multihost/multiauth) Stop Stop record attributes with termination cause as port-reinitialized (21).
PAGE 766
Configure Login Authentication for Terminal Lines You can assign up to five authentication methods to a method list. Dell EMC Networking OS evaluates the methods in the order in which you enter them in each list. If the first method list does not respond or returns an error, Dell EMC Networking OS applies the next method list until the user either passes or fails the authentication. If the user fails a method list, Dell EMC Networking OS does not apply the next method list.
PAGE 767
○ method1 [... method4]: any of the following: RADIUS, TACACS, enable, line, none. If you do not set the default list, only the local enable is checked. This setting has the same effect as issuing an aaa authentication enable default enable command. Enabling AAA Authentication — RADIUS To enable authentication from the RADIUS server, and use TACACS as a backup, use the following commands. 1. Enable RADIUS and set up TACACS as backup. CONFIGURATION mode aaa authentication enable default radius tacacs 2.
PAGE 768
The re-authentication is also applicable for authenticated 802.1x devices. When there is a change in the authetication servers, the supplicants connected to all the ports are forced to re-authenticate. 1. Enable the re-authentication mode. CONFIGURATION mode aaa reauthentication enable 2. You are prompted to force the users to re-authenticate while adding or removing a RADIUS/TACACS+ server.
PAGE 769
Privilege Levels Overview Limiting access to the system is one method of protecting the system and your network. However, at times, you might need to allow others access to the router and you can limit that access to a subset of commands. In Dell EMC Networking OS, you can configure a privilege level for users who need limited access to the system. Every command in Dell EMC Networking OS is assigned a privilege level of 0, 1, or 15. You can configure up to 16 privilege levels in Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 770
○ privilege level The range is from 0 to 15. ○ Secret:Specify the secret for the user To view username, use the show users command in EXEC Privilege mode. Configuring the Enable Password Command To configure Dell EMC Networking OS, use the enable command to enter EXEC Privilege level 15. After entering the command, Dell EMC Networking OS requests that you enter a password. Privilege levels are not assigned to passwords, rather passwords are assigned to a privilege level.
PAGE 771
enable password [level level] [encryption-mode] password Configure the optional and required parameters: ● level level: specify a level from 0 to 15. Level 15 includes all levels. ● encryption-type: enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. ● password: enter a string up to 32 characters long. To change only the password for the enable command, configure only the password parameter. 3. Configure level and commands for a mode or reset a command’s level.
PAGE 772
exit Exit from the EXEC no Negate a command show Show running system information terminal Set terminal line parameters traceroute Trace route to destination DellEMC#confi DellEMC(conf)#? end Exit from Configuration mode exit Exit from Configuration mode no Reset a command snmp-server Modify SNMP parameters DellEMC(conf)# Specifying LINE Mode Password and Privilege You can specify a password authentication of all users on different terminal lines.
PAGE 773
RADIUS Remote authentication dial-in user service (RADIUS) is a distributed client/server protocol. This protocol transmits authentication, authorization, and configuration information between a central RADIUS server and a RADIUS client (the Dell EMC Networking system). The system sends user information to the RADIUS server and requests authentication of the user and password. The RADIUS server returns one of the following responses: ● Access-Accept — the RADIUS server authenticates the user.
PAGE 774
Auto-Command You can configure the system through the RADIUS server to automatically execute a command when you connect to a specific line. The auto-command command is executed when the user is authenticated and before the prompt appears to the user. ● Automatically execute a command. auto-command Privilege Levels Through the RADIUS server, you can configure a privilege level for the user to enter into when they connect to a session. This value is configured on the client system. ● Set a privilege level.
PAGE 775
Applying the Method List to Terminal Lines To enable RADIUS AAA login authentication for a method list, apply it to a terminal line. To configure a terminal line for RADIUS authentication and authorization, use the following commands. ● Enter LINE mode. CONFIGURATION mode line {aux 0 | console 0 | vty number [end-number]} ● Enable AAA login authentication for the specified RADIUS method list.
PAGE 776
CONFIGURATION mode radius-server deadtime seconds ○ seconds: the range is from 0 to 2147483647. The default is 0 seconds. ● Configure a key for all RADIUS communications between the system and RADIUS server hosts. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server key [encryption-type] key ○ encryption-type: enter 7 to encrypt the password. Enter 0 to keep the password as plain text. ○ key: enter a string. The key can be up to 42 characters long. You cannot use spaces in the key.
PAGE 777
aaa authentication login default radius local 2. Specify the protocol for authentication. CONFIGURATION mode aaa radius auth-method mschapv2 3. Establish a host address and password. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server host H key K 4. Log in to switch using console or telnet or ssh with a valid user role. When 1-factor authentication is used, the authentication succeeds enabling you to access the switch.
PAGE 778
disconnect-user operations using DMs, if all NAS identification attributes match, and more than one session matches all of the session identification attributes, then a CoA-request or a disconnect-message request applies to all matching sessions. The following tables describe the various types of attributes that identify the NAS and the user sessions: Table 91. NAS Identification Attributes Attribute code Attribute Description 4 NAS-IP-Address IPv4 address of the NAS.
PAGE 779
Table 96. CoA EAP/MAB Session(s) Re-authenticate (continued) Radius Attribute code Radius Attribute Description Mandatory 4 NAS-IP-Address IPv4 address of the NAS. No 95 NAS-IPv6–Address IPv6 address of the NAS. No Session Identification Attributes 5 NAS-Port Port on which session is terminated Yes, If Calling-Station-Id attribute is not provided 31 Calling-Station-Id The link address from which session is connected.
PAGE 780
Table 99. DM EAP/MAB Session(s) disconnect (continued) Radius Attribute code Radius Attribute Description Mandatory 95 NAS-IPv6–Address IPv6 address of the NAS. No Session Identification Attributes 5 NAS-Port Port on which session is terminated Yes, if Calling-Station-Id attribute is not provided 31 Calling-Station-Id The link address from which session is connected.
PAGE 781
Table 101. Error-cause Values (continued) Serial Number Error-cause Scenarios 3 NAS Identification Mismatch(403) ● CoA request containing NAS-IP-Address or NAS-IPV6-Address that does not match NAS. 4 Administratively Prohibited(501) ● NAS is configured to ignore the CoA or DM request. Also, dot1x is not configured on the NAS-Port. 5 Session Context Not Found(503) ● CoA or DM request containing session identification attributes that does not match any of the NAS user sessions.
PAGE 782
○ Disconnect-Request (40) ○ CoA-Request (43) ● discards the duplicate packets, if NAS is currently processing the original packet. NAS identifies the duplicate packet with the following fields: ○ Source IP address ○ Source UDP port ○ Identifier ○ VRF ID ● discards the packets, if length of the packet is shorter than the length field value. ● discards the packets, if length of the packet is shorter than 20 or longer than 4096.
PAGE 783
client host-name Dell(conf-dynamic-auth#)client testhost Configuring the port number You can configure the port number on which the NAS receives CoA or DM requests. This setting enables you to specify an optional port number on which to receive CoA or DM requests. The default value is 3799. Enter the following command to configure the port number: port port-number The range for the port number value that you can specify is from 1 to 65535.
PAGE 784
Configuring CoA to bounce 802.1x enabled ports Dell EMC Networking OS provides RADIUS extension commands that enables you to configure port bounce settings for the 802.1x enabled port. Before configuring port bounce settings on a 802.1x enabled port, ensure that the following prerequisites are satisfied: ● Shared key is configured in NAS for DAC. ● NAS server listens on the Management IP UDP port 3799 (default) or the port configured through CLI. ● The user is logged-in through 802.
PAGE 785
● sends a CoA-Nak with an error-cause of 402 (missing attribute), if the CoA request does not contain both the callingstation-id as well as the NAS-port attribute. ● sends a CoA-Ack if the re-authentication of the 802.1x session is successful. ● sends a CoA-Nak with an error-cause value of 506 (resource unavailable), if it is unable to initiate the re-authentication process. ● sends a CoA-Nak if user authentication fails due to unresponsive supplicant or RADIUS server.
PAGE 786
1. Enter the following command to configure the dynamic authorization feature: radius dynamic-auth 2. Enter the following command to disable the 802.1x enabled physical port: coa-disable-port NAS administratively shuts down the 802.1x enabled port that is hosting the session. You can re-enable this port only through a non-RADIUS mechanism or through bounce-port request.
PAGE 787
NAS considers the new replay protection window value from next window period. The range is from 1 to 10 minutes. The default is 5 minutes. Dell(conf-dynamic-auth#)replay-prot-window 10 Rate-limiting RADIUS packets NAS enables you to allow or reject RADIUS dynamic authorization packets based on the rate-limiting value that you specify. NAS lets you to configure number of RADIUS dynamic authorization packets allowed per minute. The default value is 30 packets per minute.
PAGE 788
CONFIGURATION mode tacacs-server host {ip-address | host} Enter the IP address or host name of the TACACS+ server. Use this command multiple times to configure multiple TACACS+ server hosts. 2. Enter a text string (up to 16 characters long) as the name of the method list you wish to use with the TACAS+ authentication method. CONFIGURATION mode aaa authentication login {method-list-name | default} tacacs+ [...method3] The TACACS+ method must not be the last method specified. 3. Enter LINE mode.
PAGE 789
Monitoring TACACS+ To view information on TACACS+ transactions, use the following command. ● View TACACS+ transactions to troubleshoot problems. EXEC Privilege mode debug tacacs+ TACACS+ Remote Authentication The system takes the access class from the TACACS+ server. Access class is the class of service that restricts Telnet access and packet sizes.
PAGE 790
Password: DellEMC# Command Authorization The AAA command authorization feature configures Dell EMC Networking OS to send each configuration command to a TACACS server for authorization before it is added to the running configuration. By default, the AAA authorization commands configure the system to check both EXEC mode and CONFIGURATION mode commands. Use the no aaa authorization config-commands command to enable only EXEC mode command checking.
PAGE 791
The following example uses the ip ssh server version 2 command to enable SSH version 2 and the show ip ssh command to confirm the setting. DellEMC(conf)#ip ssh server version 2 DellEMC(conf)#do show ip ssh SSH server : enabled. SSH server version : v2. SSH server vrf : default. SSH server ciphers : 3des-cbc,aes128-cbc,aes192-cbc,aes256-cbc,aes128-ctr,aes192ctr,aes256-ctr. SSH server macs : hmac-md5,hmac-md5-96,hmac-sha1,hmac-sha1-96,hmacsha2-256,hmac-sha2-256-96.
PAGE 792
● show ip ssh client-pub-keys : display the client public keys used in host-based authentication. ● show ip ssh rsa-authentication : display the authorized-keys for the RSA authentication. DellEMC#copy scp: flash: Address or name of remote host []: 10.10.10.1 Port number of the server [22]: 99 Source file name []: test.
PAGE 793
● diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1 ● diffie-hellman-group1-sha1 ● diffie-hellman-group14-sha1 When FIPS is enabled, the default is diffie-hellman-group14-sha1. Example of Configuring a Key Exchange Algorithm The following example shows you how to configure a key exchange algorithm.
PAGE 794
● hmac-sha1-96 ● hmac-sha2-256 The default list of HMAC algorithm is in the following order: ● hmac-sha2-256 ● hmac-sha1 ● hmac-sha1-96 ● hmac-md5 ● hmac-md5-96 When FIPS is enabled, the default HMAC algorithm is hmac-sha2-256, hmac-sha1, hmac-sha1-96. Example of Configuring a HMAC Algorithm The following example shows you how to configure a HMAC algorithm list.
PAGE 795
● aes256-cbc ● aes128-ctr ● aes192-ctr ● aes256-ctr The default cipher list is in the given order: aes256-ctr, aes256-cbc, aes192-ctr, aes192-cbc, aes128-ctr, aes128-cbc, 3des-cbc. Example of Configuring a Cipher List The following example shows you how to configure a cipher list. DellEMC(conf)#ip ssh cipher aes128-ctr aes128-cbc 3des-cbc Configuring DNS in the SSH Server Dell EMC Networking provides support to enable the DNS in SSH server configuration for host-based authentication.
PAGE 796
SSH server macs : hmac-md5,hmac-md5-96,hmac-sha1,hmac-sha1-96,hmacsha2-256,hmac-sha2-256-96. SSH server kex algorithms : diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1,diffie-hellman-group1sha1,diffie-hellman-group14-sha1. Password Authentication : enabled. Hostbased Authentication : disabled. RSA Authentication : disabled. Vty Encryption HMAC Remote IP Using RSA Authentication of SSH The following procedure authenticates an SSH client based on an RSA key using RSA authentication. This method uses SSH version 2. 1.
PAGE 797
no ip ssh password-authentication or no ip ssh rsa-authentication 6. Enable host-based authentication. CONFIGURATION mode ip ssh hostbased-authentication enable 7. Bind shosts and rhosts to host-based authentication. CONFIGURATION mode ip ssh pub-key-file flash://filename or ip ssh rhostsfile flash://filename The following example shows creating shosts. admin@Unix_client# cd /etc/ssh admin@Unix_client# ls moduli sshd_config ssh_host_dsa_key.pub ssh_host_key.pub ssh_host_rsa_key.
PAGE 798
Enable host-based authentication on the server (Dell EMC Networking system) and the client (Unix machine). The following message appears if you attempt to log in via SSH and host-based is disabled on the client. In this case, verify that host-based authentication is set to “Yes” in the file ssh_config (root permission is required to edit this file): permission denied (host based). If the IP address in the RSA key does not match the IP address from which you attempt to log in, the following message appears.
PAGE 799
can assign different access classes to different users by username. Until users attempt to log in, does not know if they will be assigned a VTY line. This means that incoming users always see a login prompt even if you have excluded them from the VTY line with a deny-all access class. After users identify themselves, retrieves the access class from the local database and applies it. ( then can close the connection if a user is denied access.
PAGE 800
DellEMC(config-line-vty)#access-class sourcemac DellEMC(config-line-vty)#end Role-Based Access Control With Role-Based Access Control (RBAC), access and authorization is controlled based on a user’s role. Users are granted permissions based on their user roles, not on their individual user ID. User roles are created for job functions and through those roles they acquire the permissions to perform their associated job function.
PAGE 801
NOTE: When you enter a user role, you have already been authenticated and authorized. You do not need to enter an enable password because you will be automatically placed in EXEC Priv mode. For greater security, the ability to view event, audit, and security system log is associated with user roles. For information about these topics, see Audit and Security Logs.
PAGE 802
login authentication test authorization exec test To enable role-based only AAA authorization, enter the following command in Configuration mode: DellEMC(conf)#aaa authorization role-only System-Defined RBAC User Roles By default, the Dell EMC Networking OS provides 4 system defined user roles. You can create up to 8 additional user roles. NOTE: You cannot delete any system defined roles.
PAGE 803
modify command permissions. The security administrator and roles inherited by security administrator can only modify permissions for commands they already have access to. ● Make sure you select the correct role you want to inherit. ● If you inherit a user role, you cannot modify or delete the inheritance. If you want to change or remove the inheritance, delete the user role and create it again. If the user role is in use, you cannot delete the user role. 1.
PAGE 804
The following example denies the netadmin role from using the show users command and then verifies that netadmin cannot access the show users command in exec mode. Note that the netadmin role is not listed in the Role access: secadmin,sysadmin, which means the netadmin cannot access the show users command.
PAGE 805
By default, the system defined role, secadmin, is not allowed to configure protocols. The following example first grants the secadmin role to configure protocols and then removes access to configure protocols. DellEMC(conf)#role configure addrole secadmin protocol DellEMC(conf)#role configure deleterole secadmin protocol Example: Resets Only the Security Administrator role to its original setting. The following example resets only the secadmin role to its original setting.
PAGE 806
that have only privilege levels are denied access to the system because they do not have a role. For information about role only mode, see Configuring Role-based Only AAA Authorization. NOTE: Authentication services only validate the user ID and password combination. To determine which commands are permitted for users, configure authorization. For information about how to configure authorization for roles, see Configure AAA Authorization for Roles.
PAGE 807
line vty 2 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 3 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 4 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 5 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 6 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 7 login
PAGE 808
In the following example, you create an AV pair for a user-defined role. You must also define a role, using the userrole myrole inherit command on the switch to associate it with this AV pair. Force10-avpair= ”shell:role=myrole“ The string, “myrole”, is associated with a TACACS+ user group. The user IDs are associated with the user group. Role Accounting This section describes how to configure role accounting and how to display active sessions for roles.
PAGE 809
Display Information About User Roles This section describes how to display information about user roles and consists of the following topics: ● Displaying User Roles ● Displaying Information About Roles Logged into the Switch ● Displaying Active Accounting Sessions for Roles Displaying User Roles To display user roles using the show userrole command in EXEC Privilege mode, use the show userroles and show users commands in EXEC privilege mode.
PAGE 810
*3 vty 1 4 vty 2 sec1 ml1 secadmin netadmin 14 12 idle idle 172.31.1.4 172.31.1.5 Two Factor Authentication (2FA) Two factor authentication also known as 2FA, strengthens the login security by providing one time password (OTP) in addition to username and password. 2FA supports RADIUS authentications with Console, Telnet, and SSHv2. To perform 2FA, follow these steps: ● When the Network access server (NAS) prompts for the username and password, provide the inputs.
PAGE 811
Challenge Response Auth : enabled. Vty Encryption 2 aes128-cbc 4 aes128-cbc * 5 aes128-cbc DellEMC# HMAC hmac-md5 hmac-md5 hmac-md5 Remote IP 10.16.127.141 10.16.127.141 10.16.127.141 SMS-OTP Mechanism A short message service one time password (SMS-OTP) is a free RADIUS module to implement two factor authentication. There are multiple 2FA mechanisms that can be deployed with the RADIUS.
PAGE 812
Table 103. Suppressed ICMP message types (continued) ICMPv4 message types Address mask request (17) Address mask reply (18) NOTE: The Dell EMC Networking OS does not suppress the ICMP message type echo request (8). Table 104.
PAGE 813
Dell EMC Networking OS Image Verification Dell EMC Networking OS comes with the OS image verification and the startup configuration verification features. When enabled, these features check the integrity of The OS image and the startup configuration that the system uses while the system reboots and loads only if they are intact. Important Points to Remember ● ● ● ● The OS image verification feature is disabled by default on the Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 814
Startup Configuration Verification Dell EMC Networking OS comes with startup configuration verification feature. When enabled, it checks the integrity of the startup configuration that the system uses while the system reboots and loads only if it is intact. Important Points to Remember ● ● ● ● ● The startup configuration verification feature is disabled by default on the Dell EMC Networking OS. The feature is supported for startup configuration files stored in the local system only.
PAGE 815
Configuring the root User Password For added security, you can change the root user password. If you configure the secure-cli command on the system, the Dell EMC Networking OS resets any previously-configured root access password without displaying any warning message. With the secure-cli command enabled on the system, the CONFIGURATION mode does not display the root access password option. To change the default root user password, follow these steps: ● Change the default root user password.
PAGE 816
* Warning - boot-access password will enable password protection in * * GRUB. Keep it safe. Forgetting this password and the CLI password * * may result in switch becoming inaccessible. * *********************************************************************** Do you want to configure boot-access password? Proceed [yes/no]:yes DellEMC(conf)# Enabling User Lockout for Failed Login Attempts You can configure the system to lock out local users for a specific period for unsuccessful login attempts.
PAGE 817
48 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging provides the ability to add a second VLAN ID tag in an Ethernet frame and is referred to as VLAN stacking in the Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • • • • VLAN Stacking VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence Dynamic Mode CoS for VLAN Stacking Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Provider Backbone Bridging VLAN Stacking VLAN stacking, also called Q-in-Q, is defined in IEEE 802.1ad — Provider Bridges, which is an amendment to IEEE 802.
PAGE 818
Figure 113. VLAN Stacking in a Service Provider Network Important Points to Remember ● Interfaces that are members of the Default VLAN and are configured as VLAN-Stack access or trunk ports do not switch untagged traffic. To switch traffic, add these interfaces to a non-default VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN. ● Dell EMC Networking cautions against using the same MAC address on different customer VLANs, on the same VLAN-Stack VLAN.
PAGE 819
Related Configuration Tasks ● ● ● ● Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag Configuring Dell EMC Networking OS Options for Trunk Ports Debugging VLAN Stacking VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks Creating Access and Trunk Ports To create access and trunk ports, use the following commands. ● Access port — a port on the service provider edge that directly connects to the customer. An access port may belong to only one service provider VLAN.
PAGE 820
2 3 4 5 6 Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Active DellEMC# M Po1(Te 1/2/1-1/3/3) M Te 3/13/1 Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag The tag protocol identifier (TPID) field of the S-Tag is user-configurable. To set the S-Tag TPID, use the following command. ● Select a value for the S-Tag TPID. CONFIGURATION mode vlan-stack protocol-type The default is 9100. To display the S-Tag TPID for a VLAN, use the show running-config command from EXEC privilege mode.
PAGE 821
G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack NUM * 1 100 101 103 Status Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Description Q Ports U Te 1/1/1 T Te 1/1/1 M Te 1/1/1 Debugging VLAN Stacking To debug VLAN stacking, use the following command. ● Debug the internal state and membership of a VLAN and its ports. debug member The port notations are as follows: ● ● ● ● ● MT — stacked trunk MU — stacked access port T — 802.1Q trunk port U — 802.
PAGE 822
system is able to differentiate between 0x8100 and untagged traffic and maps each to the appropriate VLAN, as shown by the packet originating from Building A. Therefore, a mismatched TPID results in the port not differentiating between tagged and untagged traffic. Figure 114.
PAGE 823
Figure 115.
PAGE 824
Figure 116. Single and Double-Tag TPID Mismatch VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence VLAN stacking packet-drop precedence is supported on the switch. The drop eligible indicator (DEI) bit in the S-Tag indicates to a service provider bridge which packets it should prefer to drop when congested. Enabling Drop Eligibility Enable drop eligibility globally before you can honor or mark the DEI value. When you enable drop eligibility, DEI mapping or marking takes place according to the defaults.
PAGE 825
Table 105. Drop Eligibility Behavior (continued) Ingress Egress DEI Disabled DEI Enabled Trunk Port Trunk Port Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI. Retain outer tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0. Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0 Set outer tag CFI to 0 Access Port Trunk Port To enable drop eligibility globally, use the following command. ● Make packets eligible for dropping based on their DEI value.
PAGE 826
To display the DEI-marking configuration, use the show interface dei-mark [interface slot/port/subport ] in EXEC Privilege mode. DellEMC#show interface dei-mark Default CFI/DEI Marking: 0 Interface Drop precedence CFI/DEI -------------------------------Te 1/1/1 Green 0 Te 1/1/1 Yellow 1 Te 2/9/1 Yellow 0 Te 2/10/1 Yellow 0 Dynamic Mode CoS for VLAN Stacking One of the ways to ensure quality of service for customer VLAN-tagged frames is to use the 802.
PAGE 827
Examples of QoS Interface Configuration and Rate Policing policy-map-input in layer2 service-queue 3 class-map a qos-policy 3 ! class-map match-any a layer2 match mac access-group a ! mac access-list standard a seq 5 permit any ! qos-policy-input 3 layer2 rate-police 40 Likewise, in the following configuration, packets with dot1p priority 0–3 are marked as dot1p 7 in the outer tag and queued to Queue 3. Rate policing is according to qos-policy-input 3.
PAGE 828
NOTE: Because dot1p-mapping marks and queues packets, the only remaining applicable QoS configuration is rate metering. You may use Rate Shaping or Rate Policing. Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Spanning tree bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) use a reserved destination MAC address called the bridge group address, which is 01-80-C2-00-00-00. Only spanning-tree bridges on the local area network (LAN) recognize this address and process the BPDU.
PAGE 829
Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: In Dell EMC Networking OS versions prior to 8.2.1.0, the MAC address that Dell EMC Networking systems use to overwrite the Bridge Group Address on ingress was non-configurable. The value of the L2PT MAC address was the Dell EMC Networking-unique MAC address, 01-01-e8-00-00-00.
PAGE 830
EXEC Privilege mode show cam-profile 2. Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system. CONFIGURATION mode protocol-tunnel enable 3. Tunnel BPDUs the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode protocol-tunnel stp Specifying a Destination MAC Address for BPDUs By default, Dell EMC Networking OS uses a Dell EMC Networking-unique MAC address for tunneling BPDUs. You can configure another value. To specify a destination MAC address for BPDUs, use the following command.
PAGE 831
Provider Backbone Bridging IEEE 802.1ad—Provider Bridges amends 802.1Q—Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks so that service providers can use 802.1Q architecture to offer separate VLANs to customers with no coordination between customers, and minimal coordination between customers and the provider. 802.
PAGE 832
49 sFlow sFlow is a standard-based sampling technology embedded within switches and routers which is used to monitor network traffic. It is designed to provide traffic monitoring for high-speed networks with many switches and routers.
PAGE 833
● If the global sampling rate is non-default, for example 256, and if the sampling rate is not configured on the interface, the sampling rate of the interface is the global non-default sampling rate, that is, 256. To avoid the back-off, either increase the global sampling rate or configure all the line card ports with the desired sampling rate even if some ports have no sFlow configured.
PAGE 834
Te 1/2/1: configured rate 131072, actual rate 131072 DellEMC# If you did not enable any extended information, the show output displays the following (shown in bold).
PAGE 835
Example of the show sflow command when the sflow max-header-size extended is configured globally DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/10/1)#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Egress Management Interface sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 86400 Global default extended maximum header size: 256 bytes Global extended information enabled: none 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 100.1.1.12, Agent IP addr: 100.1.1.
PAGE 836
Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 133.33.33.53, Agent IP addr: 133.33.33.116, UDP port: 6343 77 UDP packets exported 0 UDP packets dropped 165 sFlow samples collected 69 sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling Stack-unit 1 Port set 0 H/W sampling rate 8192 Displaying Show sFlow on an Interface To view sFlow information on a specific interface, use the following command.
PAGE 837
● Identify sFlow collectors to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded. CONFIGURATION mode sflow collector ip-address agent-addr ip-address [number [max-datagram-size number] ] | [max-datagram-size number ] The default UDP port is 6343. The default max-datagram-size is 1400. Changing the Polling Intervals The sflow polling-interval command configures the polling interval for an interface in the maximum number of seconds between successive samples of counters sent to the collector.
PAGE 838
● Enable extended sFlow. sflow [extended-switch] [extended-router] [extended-gateway] enable By default packing of any of the extended information in the datagram is disabled. ● Confirm that extended information packing is enabled. show sflow The bold line shows that extended sflow setting is enabled for extended switch.
PAGE 839
Table 106. Extended Gateway Summary (continued) IP SA IP DA srcAS and srcPeerAS dstAS and dstPeerAS Description BGP static/connected/IGP — — Exported Exported Prior to Dell EMC Networking OS version 7.8.1.0, extended gateway data is not exported because IP DA is not learned via BGP. Version 7.8.1.0 allows extended gateway information in cases where the source and destination IP addresses are learned by different routing protocols, and for cases where is source is reachable over ECMP.
PAGE 840
50 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is designed to manage devices on IP networks by monitoring device operation, which might require administrator intervention. NOTE: On Dell EMC Networking routers, standard and private SNMP management information bases (MIBs) are supported, including all Get and a limited number of Set operations (such as set vlan and copy cmd).
PAGE 841
Protocol Overview Network management stations use SNMP to retrieve or alter management data from network elements. A datum of management information is called a managed object; the value of a managed object can be static or variable. Network elements store managed objects in a database called a management information base (MIB). MIBs are hierarchically structured and use object identifiers to address managed objects, but managed objects also have a textual name called an object descriptor.
PAGE 842
You cannot modify the FIPS mode if SNMPv3 users are already configured and present in the system. An error message is displayed if you attempt to change the FIPS mode by using the fips mode enable command in Global Configuration mode. You can enable or disable FIPS mode only if SNMPv3 users are not previously set up. If previously configured users exist on the system, you must delete the existing users before you change the FIPS mode.
PAGE 843
SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is a user-based security model that provides password authentication for user security and encryption for data security and privacy. Three sets of configurations are available for SNMP read/write operations: no password or privacy, password privileges, password and privacy privileges. You can configure a maximum of 16 users even if they are in different groups.
PAGE 844
CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server user name group-name 3 noauth auth md5 auth-password ● Configure an SNMP group (password privileges only). CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server group groupname {oid-tree} auth read name write name ● Configure an SNMPv3 view. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server view view-name 3 noauth {included | excluded} NOTE: To give a user read and write privileges, repeat this step for each privilege type. ● Configure an SNMP group (with password or privacy privileges).
PAGE 845
● Read the value of many objects at once. snmpwalk -v version -c community agent-ip {identifier.instance | descriptor.instance} In the following example, the value “4” displays in the OID before the IP address for IPv4. For an IPv6 IP address, a value of “16” displays. > snmpget -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.161 sysUpTime.0 DISMAN-EVENT-MIB::sysUpTimeInstance = Timeticks: (32852616) 3 days, 19:15:26.16 > snmpget -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.161 .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.
PAGE 846
snmp-server location text You may use up to 55 characters. The default is None. ● (From a management station) Identify the system manager along with this person’s contact information (for example, an email address or phone number). CONFIGURATION mode snmpset -v version -c community agent-ip sysContact.0 s “contact-info” You may use up to 55 characters. The default is None.
PAGE 847
snmp coldstart snmp linkdown snmp linkup SNMP_COLD_START: Agent Initialized - SNMP COLD_START. SNMP_WARM_START:Agent Initialized - SNMP WARM_START. PORT_LINKDN:changed interface state to down:%d PORT_LINKUP:changed interface state to up:%d Enabling a Subset of SNMP Traps You can enable a subset of Dell EMC Networking enterprise-specific SNMP traps using one of the following listed command options. To enable a subset of Dell EMC Networking enterprise-specific SNMP traps, use the following command.
PAGE 848
envmon fan FAN_TRAY_BAD: Major alarm: fantray %d is missing or down FAN_TRAY_OK: Major alarm cleared: fan tray %d present FAN_BAD: Minor alarm: some fans in fan tray %d are down FAN_OK: Minor alarm cleared: all fans in fan tray %d are good vlt Enable VLT traps. vrrp Enable VRRP state change traps xstp %SPANMGR-5-STP_NEW_ROOT: New Spanning Tree Root, Bridge ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.fc35.
PAGE 849
MAJOR_SFM: Major alarm: Switch fabric down MAJOR_SFM_CLR: Major alarm cleared: Switch fabric up MINOR_SFM: MInor alarm: No working standby SFM MINOR_SFM_CLR: Minor alarm cleared: Working standby SFM present TASK SUSPENDED: SUSPENDED - svce:%d - inst:%d - task:%s RPM0-P:CP %CHMGR-2-CARD_PARITY_ERR ABNORMAL_TASK_TERMINATION: CRASH - task:%s %s CPU_THRESHOLD: Cpu %s usage above threshold. Cpu5SecUsage (%d) CPU_THRESHOLD_CLR: Cpu %s usage drops below threshold.
PAGE 850
SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.47.2.0.1, SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.6.1.1.2.0 = INTEGER: 5 Trap SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (1489064) 4:08:10.64, SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.47.2.0.1, SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.6.1.1.2.0 = INTEGER: 6 Trap SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (1489568) 4:08:15.68,SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.47.2.0.1, SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.6.1.1.2.
PAGE 851
Following example shows the SNMP trap that is sent when connectivity to the syslog server is resumed: DISMAN-EVENT-MIB::sysUpTimeInstance = Timeticks: (10230) 0:01:42.30 SNMPv2MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.30.1.1.2 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.30.1.1 = STRING: "REACHABLE: Syslog server 10.11.226.121 (port: 9140) is reachable"SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.6.1.1.2.
PAGE 852
Table 109. MIB Objects for Copying Configuration Files via SNMP (continued) MIB Object copyDestFileLocation OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.6 Object Values Description 3 = startup-config ● If copySourceFileType is running-config or startupconfig, the default copyDestFileLocation is flash. ● If copyDestFileType is a binary, you must specify copyDestFileLocation and copyDestFileName. 1 = flash Specifies the location of destination file.
PAGE 853
● index must be unique to all previously executed snmpset commands. If an index value has been used previously, a message like the following appears. In this case, increment the index value and enter the command again. Error in packet. Reason: notWritable (that object does not support modification) Failed object: FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copySrcFileType.101 ● To complete the command, use as many MIB objects in the command as required by the MIB object descriptions shown in the previous table.
PAGE 854
The following example shows how to copy configuration files from a UNIX machine using the object name. > snmpset -c public -v 2c -m ./f10-copy-config.mib 10.11.131.162 copySrcFileType.7 i 3 copyDestFileType.7 i 2 FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copySrcFileType.7 = INTEGER: runningConfig(3) FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copyDestFileType.7 = INTEGER: startupConfig(2) The following example shows how to copy configuration files from a UNIX machine using OID. >snmpset -c public -v 2c 10.11.131.162 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.2.
PAGE 855
Copy a Binary File to the Startup-Configuration To copy a binary file from the server to the startup-configuration on the Dell EMC Networking system via FTP, use the following command. ● Copy a binary file from the server to the startup-configuration on the Dell EMC Networking system via FTP. snmpset -v 2c -c public -m ./f10-copy-config.mib force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 1 copySrcFileLocation.index i 4 copySrcFileName.index s filepath/ filename copyDestFileType.index i 3 copyServerAddress.
PAGE 856
index: the index value used in the snmpset command used to complete the copy operation. NOTE: You can use the entire OID rather than the object name. Use the form: OID.index. The following examples show the snmpget command to obtain a MIB object value. These examples assume that: ● ● ● ● the server OS is UNIX you are using SNMP version 2c the community name is public the file f10-copy-config.mib is in the current directory NOTE: In UNIX, enter the snmpset command for help using this command.
PAGE 857
MIB Support for Power Monitoring Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the information for Power Monitoring. The OIDs specific to Power Monitoring are appended to the DellITaMIbs. There are three separate DellITaMIbs available to display the current input power, average input power and average input-power start time. These statistics can also be obtained by using the CLI command: show environment . The following table lists the related MIB objects, OID and description for the same: Table 112.
PAGE 858
MIB Support to Display the Software Core Files Generated by the System Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the software core files generated by the system. The chSysSwCoresTable contains the list of software core files generated by the system. The following table lists the related MIB objects. Table 114. MIB Objects for Displaying the Software Core Files Generated by the System MIB Object OID Description chSysSwCoresTable 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.
PAGE 859
MIB Support to Display the Available Partitions on Flash Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the information of various partitions such as /flash, /tmp, /usr/ pkg, and /f10/ConfD. The dellNetFlashStorageTable table contains the list of all partitions on disk. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 115. MIB Objects to Display the Available Partitions on Flash MIB Object OID Description dellNetFlashPartitionNumber 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.1 Index for the table.
PAGE 860
.1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.1 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.4 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.5 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.1 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.4 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.5 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.1 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.4 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.
PAGE 861
= INTEGER: 2098693 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.10.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = INTEGER: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.20.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = INTEGER: 1258296320 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.20.1.1.1.32.1.4.20.1.1.1.1.4.20.1.1.1 = INTEGER: 1258296320 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.20.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = INTEGER: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.30.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.
PAGE 862
SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.80.80.80.0.24.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.1 = HexSTRING: 4C 76 25 F4 AB 02 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.80.80.80.0.24.1.4.20.1.1.1.1.4.20.1.1.1 = HexSTRING: 4C 76 25 F4 AB 02 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.80.80.80.0.24.1.4.30.1.1.1.1.4.30.1.1.1 = HexSTRING: 4C 76 25 F4 AB 02 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.90.90.90.0.24.0.0.0.0 = "" SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.90.90.90.1.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.
PAGE 863
STRING: "Po 20" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.10.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.10.1.1.1.32.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.10.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.20.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.20.1.1.1.32.1.4.20.1.1.1.1.4.20.1.1.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.
PAGE 864
Table 118. MIB Objects for entAliasMappingTable (continued) MIB Object OID Description entAliasMappingEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1 Contains information about a particular logical entity. entAliasLogicalIndexOrZero 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1.1 Contains a non–zero value and identifies the logical entity named by the same value of entLogicalIndex. entAliasMappingIdentifier 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1.
PAGE 865
Table 119. MIB Objects for Displaying the Details of FCS Error Ratio (continued) MIB Object OID Description dellNetFpIngPortBitMapZeroDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.8 Port bitmap zero drop condition. dellNetFpIngRxVLANDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.9 Rx VLAN drop condition. dellNetFpIngressFCSDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.10 Ingress FCS Drops. dellNetFpIngressMTUExceeds 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.11 Ingress MTUExceeds. dellNetFpMMUHOLDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.
PAGE 866
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1049860 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1049988 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1050116 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1050244 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1050372 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1050500 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1050629 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1051141 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1051653 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.
PAGE 867
Table 120. MIB Objects for LAG (continued) MIB Object OID Description dot3adAggEntry 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1 Contains a list of Aggregator parameters and indexed by the ifIndex of the Aggregator. dot3adAggMACAddress 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1 Contains a six octet read–only value carrying the individual MAC address assigned to the Aggregator. dot3adAggActorSystemPriority 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.
PAGE 868
● To view the LAG MIB generated by the system, use the following command. snmpbulkget -v 2c -c LagMIB 10.16.148.157 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1.1258356736 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.2.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.2.1258356736 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.3.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.3.1258356736 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.4.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.4.1258356736 iso.2.840.
PAGE 869
iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.3.1.2.0.4209668.6.9 = STRING: "Dell" iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.3.1.2.0.4209668.6.10 = STRING: "Dell" snmpget -v2c -c public 10.16.150.83 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.3.1.2.0.4209668.6.9 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.3.1.2.0.4209668.6.9 = STRING: "Dell" MIB Support to Display Organizational Specific Unrecognized LLDP TLVs The lldpRemOrgDefInfoTable contains organizationally defined information that is not recognized by the local neighbor. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 122.
PAGE 870
MIB support for Port Security Dell EMC Networking OS provides MIB objects to enable or disable port security feature on the physical and port channel interfaces. The port security DELL-NETWORKING-PORT-SECURITY-MIB object contains both the global and interface level MIB objects. Global MIB objects for port security This section describes about the scalar MIB objects of the global MIB dellNetPortSecGlobalObjects. The following table shows the scalar global MIB objects for port security. Table 123.
PAGE 871
Table 124. Interface level MIB Objects for Port Security (continued) MIB Object OID Access or Permission Description dellNetPortSecIfStationMove Enable 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.1.1.5 read-write Enable or disable station movement on the dynamically secured MAC addresses learnt on the interface. dellNetPortSecIfSecureMacVi olationAction 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.1.1.6 read-write Determines the action to be taken when MAC limit violation occurs in the system.
PAGE 872
MAC addresses cannot be retrieved using dellNetPortSecSecureStaticMacAddrTable and dellNetPortSecSecureMacAddrTable. These tables are valid only if port security feature is enabled globally in the system. Table 125. MIB Objects for configuring MAC addresses MIB Object OID Access or Permission Description dellNetPortSecIfSecureStatic MacRowStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.2.1.4 read-write Allows adding or deleting entries to or from the table dellNetPortSecSecureStaticM acAddrTable.
PAGE 873
snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.129.24 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.3.1.1.4.6.0.0.0.0.17.17.10 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.31.1.3.1.1.4.6.0.0.0.0.17.17.10 = INTEGER: 1 MIB Support for PFC Storm Control Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the information for PFC Storm Control. The OIDs specific to PFC Storm Control are appended to the dellNetFpStatsMib.
PAGE 874
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.2.2097157.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.2.2097157.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.2.2097413.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.2.2097413.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.2.2097669.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.2.2097669.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.2.2097925.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.2.2097925.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.3.2097157.
PAGE 875
These statistics can also be obtained by using the CLI command: show hardware pfc-nodrop-priority l2-dlf drops stackunit <> port-set <> . The following table lists the related MIB objects, OID and description for the same: Table 128. MIB Objects to Display the Information for PFC no-drop-priority L2Dlf Drop MIB Object OID Description dellNetFpPfcL2DlfDropCounterTable 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.22 Table to show the drop counters of pfcnodrop-priority l2-dlf drop. dellNetFpPfcL2DlfDropCounterEntry 1.3.6.
PAGE 876
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.2.1.1.3 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.2.1.1.4 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.3.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.3.1.1.2 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.3.1.1.3 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.3.1.1.4 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.4.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.4.1.1.2 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.4.1.1.3 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.4.1.1.
PAGE 877
Displaying the Ports in a VLAN Dell EMC Networking OS identifies VLAN interfaces using an interface index number that is displayed in the output of the show interface vlan command. Add Tagged and Untagged Ports to a VLAN The value dot1qVlanStaticEgressPorts object is an array of all VLAN members. The dot1qVlanStaticUntaggedPorts object is an array of only untagged VLAN members. All VLAN members that are not in dot1qVlanStaticUntaggedPorts are tagged.
PAGE 878
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Managing Overload on Startup If you are running IS-IS, you can set a specific amount of time to prevent ingress traffic from being received after a reload and allow the routing protocol upgrade process to complete. To prevent ingress traffic on a router while the IS reload is implemented, use the following command.
PAGE 879
MAC address indexes dot1dTpFdbTable only for a single forwarding database, while dot1qTpFdbTable has two indices — VLAN ID and MAC address — to allow for multiple forwarding databases and considering that the same MAC address is learned on multiple VLANs. The VLAN ID is added as the first index so that MAC addresses are read by the VLAN, sorted lexicographically. The MAC address is part of the OID instance, so in this case, lexicographic order is according to the most significant octet. Table 130.
PAGE 880
06 95 AC SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.5.1.3.1000.0.1.232.6.149.172.1 = INTEGER: 1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.5.1.4.1000.0.1.232.6.149.172.1 = INTEGER: 1 Example of Deriving the Interface Index Number If you know the interface index, use the following commands to find the interface number. DellEMC ~ $ snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.206.127 .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.2 | grep 2097156 IF-MIB::ifDescr.2097156 = STRING: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 DellEMC ~ $ snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.206.127 .1.3.6.
PAGE 881
● snmp mib community-map vrf1 context context1 ● snmp mib community-map vrf1 context context2 2. Configure snmp context under the VRF instances. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● sho run bgp router bgp 100 address-family ipv4 vrf vrf1 snmp context context1 neighbor 20.1.1.1 remote-as 200 neighbor 20.1.1.1 no shutdown exit-address-family address-family ipv4 vrf vrf2 snmp context context2 timers bgp 30 90 neighbor 30.1.1.1 remote-as 200 neighbor 30.1.1.
PAGE 882
Example of SNMP Walk Output for BGP timer configured for vrf2 (SNMPv2c) snmpwalk -v 2c -c vrf2 10.16.131.125 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.20.1.2.3 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.20.1.2.3.1.1.1.0.1.30.1.1.2.1.30.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.20.1.2.3.1.1.2.0.1.30.1.1.2.1.30.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.20.1.2.3.2.1.1.0.1.30.1.1.2.1.30.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.20.1.2.3.2.1.2.0.1.30.1.1.2.1.30.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.20.1.2.3.2.1.3.0.1.30.1.1.2.1.30.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.20.1.2.
PAGE 883
Example of Viewing Changed Interface State for Monitored Ports SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (8500842) 23:36:48.42 SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: IF-MIB::linkDown IF-MIB::ifIndex.33865785 = INTEGER: 33865785 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.1.1.4.1.2 = STRING: "OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Te 1/1/1" 2010-02-10 14:22:39 10.16.130.4 [10.16.130.4]: SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (8500842) 23:36:48.42 SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: IF-MIB::linkDown IF-MIB::ifIndex.
PAGE 884
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.11.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.12.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.13.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.14.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.15.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.16.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.17.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.18.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.19.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.
PAGE 885
Sample SNMP context configuration: DellEMC(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)#snmp context ospf1 DellEMC>show runnig-config ospf ! ipv6 router ospf 10 router-id 10.10.10.
PAGE 886
51 Storm Control Storm control allows you to control unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast traffic on Layer 2 and Layer 3 physical interfaces. Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) Behavior: Dell EMC Networking OS supports unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast control for Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. To view the storm control broadcast configuration show storm-control broadcast | multicast | unknownunicast | pfc-llfc[interface] command.
PAGE 887
● Configure the packets per second of multicast traffic allowed on C-Series or S-Series interface (ingress only) network only. INTERFACE mode storm-control multicast packets_per_second in ● Shut down the port if it receives the PFC/LLFC packets more than the configured rate. INTERFACE mode storm-control pfc-llfc pps in shutdown NOTE: PFC/LLFC storm control enabled interface disables the interfaces if it receives continuous PFC/LLFC packets.
PAGE 888
Detect PFC Storm The following section explains the procedure to detect the PFC storm. You can detect the PFC storm by polling the lossless queues in a port or priority periodically. When the queue depth is not equal to zero or when the queue has traffic after subsequent number of polling, then the port or priority is detected to have the PFC storm. ● Use the polling—interval {interval in milli-seconds} command to set the polling interval. The queue traffic and egress counters are polled.
PAGE 889
Te 0/0 Te 0/1 Te 0/2 Te 0/3 Te 0/4 Te 0/5 Te 0/80 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DellEMC# Storm Control 889
PAGE 890
52 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The spanning tree protocol (STP) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 891
● ● ● ● ● ● ● Modifying Global Parameters Modifying Interface STP Parameters Enabling PortFast Prevent Network Disruptions with BPDU Guard STP Root Guard Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes Configuring Spanning Trees as Hitless Important Points to Remember ● STP is disabled by default. ● The Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one spanning tree instance (0). For multiple instances, enable the multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) or per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+).
PAGE 892
Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode All interfaces on all switches that participate in spanning tree must be in Layer 2 mode and enabled. Figure 120. Example of Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode To configure and enable the interfaces for Layer 2, use the following command. 1. If the interface has been assigned an IP address, remove it. INTERFACE mode no ip address 2. Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE switchport 3. Enable the interface.
PAGE 893
no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable the spanning tree protocol globally; it is not enabled by default. When you enable STP, all physical, VLAN, and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the Spanning Tree topology. ● Only one path from any bridge to any other bridge participating in STP is enabled. ● Bridges block a redundant path by disabling one of the link ports. Figure 121.
PAGE 894
To view the spanning tree configuration and the interfaces that are participating in STP, use the show spanning-tree 0 command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. R2#show spanning-tree 0 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, address 0001.e826.ddb7 Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Current root has priority 32768, address 0001.e80d.
PAGE 895
Modifying Global Parameters You can modify the spanning tree parameters. The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hello-time, and max-age and overwrites the values set on other bridges participating in STP. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking recommends that only experienced network administrators change the spanning tree parameters. Poorly planned modification of the spanning tree parameters can negatively affect network performance. The following table displays the default values for STP. Table 134.
PAGE 896
Modifying Interface STP Parameters You can set the port cost and port priority values of interfaces in Layer 2 mode. ● Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port. ● Port priority — influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost. The default values are listed in Modifying Global Parameters.
PAGE 897
Prevent Network Disruptions with BPDU Guard Configure the Portfast (and Edgeport, in the case of RSTP, PVST+, and MSTP) feature on ports that connect to end stations. End stations do not generate BPDUs, so ports configured with Portfast/ Edgport (edgeports) do not expect to receive BDPUs. If an edgeport does receive a BPDU, it likely means that it is connected to another part of the network, which can negatively affect the STP topology.
PAGE 898
Figure 122. Enabling BPDU Guard Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior BPDU guard: ● is used on edgeports and blocks all traffic on edgeport if it receives a BPDU. ● drops the BPDU after it reaches the RP and generates a console message. Example of Blocked BPDUs DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/7/1)#do show spanning-tree rstp brief Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e805.fb07 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e85d.
PAGE 899
Selecting STP Root The STP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the likelihood that it becomes the root bridge. You can also specify that a bridge is the root or the secondary root. To change the bridge priority or specify that a bridge is the root or secondary root, use the following command. ● Assign a number as the bridge priority or designate it as the root or secondary root.
PAGE 900
Figure 123. STP Root Guard Prevents Bridging Loops Configuring Root Guard Enable STP root guard on a per-port or per-port-channel basis. Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: The following conditions apply to a port enabled with STP root guard: ● Root guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface except when used as a stacking port.
PAGE 901
To disable STP root guard on a port or port-channel interface, use the no spanning-tree 0 rootguard command in an interface configuration mode. To verify the STP root guard configuration on a port or port-channel interface, use the show spanning-tree 0 guard [interface interface] command in a global configuration mode. Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes To enable SNMP traps individually or collectively, use the following commands.
PAGE 902
As soon as a BPDU is received on an STP port in a Loop-Inconsistent state, the port returns to a blocking state. If you disable STP loop guard on a port in a Loop-Inconsistent state, the port transitions to an STP blocking state and restarts the max-age timer. Figure 124. STP Loop Guard Prevents Forwarding Loops Configuring Loop Guard Enable STP loop guard on a per-port or per-port channel basis.
PAGE 903
○ If a BPDU is received from a remote device, BPDU guard places the port in an Err-Disabled Blocking state and no traffic is forwarded on the port. ○ If no BPDU is received from a remote device, loop guard places the port in a Loop-Inconsistent Blocking state and no traffic is forwarded on the port. ● When used in a PVST+ network, STP loop guard is performed per-port or per-port channel at a VLAN level.
PAGE 904
53 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell EMC Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell EMC Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell EMC Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell EMC Networking Open Automation guide. Figure 125.
PAGE 905
Enable the SupportAssist service. CONFIGURATION mode support-assist activate DellEMC(conf)#support-assist activate This command guides you through steps to configure SupportAssist. Configuring SupportAssist Manually To manually configure SupportAssist service, use the following commands. 1. Accept the end-user license agreement (EULA). CONFIGURATION mode eula-consent {support-assist} {accept | reject} NOTE: Once accepted, you do not have to accept the EULA again.
PAGE 906
CONFIGURATION mode support-assist DellEMC(conf)#support-assist DellEMC(conf-supportassist)# 3. (Optional) Configure the contact information for the company. SUPPORTASSIST mode contact-company name {company-name}[company-next-name] ... [company-next-name] DellEMC(conf)#support-assist DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#contact-company name test DellEMC(conf-supportassist-cmpy-test)# 4. (Optional) Configure the contact name for an individual.
PAGE 907
[no] activity {full-transfer|core-transfer|event-transfer} DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#activity full-transfer DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#activity core-transfer DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-core-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#activity event-transfer DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# 2. Copy an action-manifest file for an activity to the system.
PAGE 908
SUPPORTASSIST ACTIVITY mode [no] enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-core-transfer)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-core-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# Configuring SupportAssist Company SupportAssist Company mode allows you to configure name, address and territory information of the company.
PAGE 909
[no] contact-person [first ] last DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#contact-person first john last doe DellEMC(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)# 2. Configure the email addresses to reach the contact person. SUPPORTASSIST PERSON mode [no] email-address primary email-address [alternate email-address] DellEMC(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)#email-address primary jdoe@mycompany.com DellEMC(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)# 3. Configure phone numbers of the contact person.
PAGE 910
[no] enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# 4. Configure the URL to reach the SupportAssist remote server. SUPPORTASSIST SERVER mode [no] url uniform-resource-locator DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#url https://192.168.1.1/index.htm DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# Viewing SupportAssist Configuration To view the SupportAssist configurations, use the following commands: 1.
PAGE 911
! server Dell enable url http://1.1.1.1:1337 DellEMC# 3. Display the EULA for the feature. EXEC Privilege mode show eula-consent {support-assist | other feature} DellEMC#show eula-consent support-assist SupportAssist EULA has been: Accepted Additional information about the SupportAssist EULA is as follows: By installing SupportAssist, you allow Dell to save your contact information (e.g.
PAGE 912
54 System Time and Date System time and date settings and the network time protocol (NTP) are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. You can set system times and dates and maintained through the NTP. They are also set through the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) command line interfaces (CLIs) and hardware settings. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports reaching an NTP server through different VRFs. You can configure a maximum of eight logging servers across different VRFs or the same VRF.
PAGE 913
Protocol Overview The NTP messages to one or more servers and processes the replies as received. The server interchanges addresses and ports, fills in or overwrites certain fields in the message, recalculates the checksum, and returns it immediately. Information included in the NTP message allows each client/server peer to determine the timekeeping characteristics of its other peers, including the expected accuracies of their clocks.
PAGE 914
To display the system clock state with respect to NTP, use the show ntp status command from EXEC Privilege mode. DellEMC#show ntp status Clock is synchronized, stratum 4, reference is 10.16.151.117, vrf-id is 0 frequency is -44.862 ppm, stability is 0.050 ppm, precision is -18 reference time deeef7ef.85eeaa10 Tue, Jul 10 2018 9:16:31.523 UTC clock offset is -0.167449 msec, root delay is 149.194 msec root dispersion is 54.557 msec, peer dispersion is 0.
PAGE 915
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ For For For For For For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 916
○ minpoll polling-interval: Enter the minpoll value. The range is from 4 to 16. ○ maxpoll polling-interval: Enter the maxpoll value. The range is from 4 to 16. 5. Configure the switch as NTP master. CONFIGURATION mode ntp master To configure the switch as NTP Server use the ntp master command. stratum number identifies the NTP Server's hierarchy. The following example shows configuring an NTP server. Dell EMC(conf)#show running-config ntp ! ntp master ntp server 10.16.127.
PAGE 917
● Originate Timestamp: The departure time on the server of its last NTP message. If the server becomes unreachable, the value is set to zero. ● Receive Timestamp — the arrival time on the client of the last NTP message from the server. If the server becomes unreachable, the value is set to zero. ● Transmit Timestamp — the departure time on the server of the current NTP message from the sender. ● Filter dispersion — the error in calculating the minimum delay from a set of sample data from a peer.
PAGE 918
The range for threshold-value is from 0 to 999. DellEMC(conf)#ntp offset-threshold 9 Dell EMC Networking OS Time and Date You can set the time and date using the Dell EMC Networking OS CLI. Configuration Task List The following is a configuration task list for configuring the time and date settings.
PAGE 919
￭￭ a number from 1 to 23 as the number of hours in addition to UTC for the timezone. a minus sign (-) then a number from 1 to 23 as the number of hours. DellEMC#conf DellEMC(conf)#clock timezone Pacific -8 DellEMC(conf)#01:40:19: %RPM0-P:CP %CLOCK-6-TIME CHANGE: Timezone configuration changed from "UTC 0 hrs 0 mins" to "Pacific -8 hrs 0 mins" DellEMC# Set Daylight Saving Time Dell EMC Networking OS supports setting the system to daylight saving time once or on a recurring basis every year.
PAGE 920
clock summer-time time-zone recurring start-week start-day start-month start-time endweek end-day end-month end-time [offset] ○ time-zone: Enter the three-letter name for the time zone. This name displays in the show clock output. ○ start-week: (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following as the week that daylight saving begins and then enter values for start-day through end-time: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ￭ week-number: Enter a number from 1 to 4 as the number of the week in the month to start daylight saving time.
PAGE 921
55 Tunneling Tunnel interfaces create a logical tunnel for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. Tunneling supports RFC 2003, RFC 2473, and 4213. DSCP, hop-limits, flow label values, open shortest path first (OSPF) v2, and OSPFv3 are supported. Internet control message protocol (ICMP) error relay, PATH MTU transmission, and fragmented packets are not supported.
PAGE 922
tunnel mode ipv6ip no shutdown The following sample configuration shows a tunnel configured in IPIP mode (IPv4 tunnel carries IPv4 and IPv6 traffic): DellEMC(conf)#interface tunnel 3 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel source 5::5 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel destination 8::9 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel mode ipv6 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#ip address 3.1.1.1/24 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#ipv6 address 3::1/64 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#show config ! interface Tunnel 3 ip address 3.1.1.
PAGE 923
The following sample configuration shows how to use the interface tunnel configuration commands. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 ip address 20.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 20:1::1/64 no shutdown DellEMC(conf)#interface tunnel 1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#ip unnumbered tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#ipv6 unnumbered tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel source 40.1.1.
PAGE 924
DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#show config ! interface Tunnel 1 ip address 1.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 1abd::1/64 tunnel source anylocal tunnel allow-remote 40.1.1.2 tunnel mode ipip decapsulate-any no shutdown Guidelines for Configuring Multipoint Receive-Only Tunnels ● You can configure up to eight remote end-points for a multipoint receive-only tunnel.
PAGE 925
56 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if used with network interface controller (NIC) teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link.
PAGE 926
Figure 127. Uplink Failure Detection How Uplink Failure Detection Works UFD creates an association between upstream and downstream interfaces. The association of uplink and downlink interfaces is called an uplink-state group. An interface in an uplink-state group can be a physical interface or a port-channel (LAG) aggregation of physical interfaces. An enabled uplink-state group tracks the state of all assigned upstream interfaces.
PAGE 927
Figure 128. Uplink Failure Detection Example If only one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, a specified number of downstream ports associated with the upstream interface are put into a Link-Down state. You can configure this number and is calculated by the ratio of the upstream port bandwidth to the downstream port bandwidth in the same uplink-state group.
PAGE 928
● If one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, either a user-configurable set of downstream ports or all the downstream ports in the group are put in an Operationally Down state with an UFD Disabled error. The order in which downstream ports are disabled is from the lowest numbered port to the highest.
PAGE 929
UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode downstream auto-recover The default is auto-recovery of UFD-disabled downstream ports is enabled. To disable auto-recovery, use the no downstream auto-recover command. 5. (Optional) Enter a text description of the uplink-state group. UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode description text The maximum length is 80 alphanumeric characters. 6. (Optional) Disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group.
PAGE 930
02:37:29: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed uplink state group state to down: Group 3 02:37:29: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Downstream interface set to UFD error-disabled: Fo 3/7 02:37:29: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Fo 3/7 02:38:31 : UFD: Group:3, UplinkState: UP 02:38:31: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: Changed uplink state group state to up: Group 3 02:38:53: Fo 3/4 02:38:53: Fo 3/5 02:38:53: Fo 3/6 02:38:53: Fo 3/7 02:38:53: 02:38:53: 02:38:53: 02:38:53: %RPM0
PAGE 931
DellEMC#show uplink-state-group detail (Up): Interface up (Dwn): Interface down (Dis): Interface disabled Uplink State Group : 1 Upstream Interfaces : Downstream Interfaces : Status: Enabled, Up Uplink State Group : 3 Status: Enabled, Up Upstream Interfaces : Te 1/6/1(Up) Te 1/7/1(Up) Downstream Interfaces : Te 3/1/1(Up) Te 3/3/1(Up) Te 3/5/1(Up) Te 3/6/1(Up) Uplink State Group : 5 Status: Enabled, Down Upstream Interfaces : Te 1/1/1(Dwn) Te 1/3/1(Dwn) Te 1/5/1(Dwn) Downstream Interfaces : Te 3/2/1(Dis) T
PAGE 932
downstream TenGigabitEthernet 1/22/1, 1/22/2, 1/22/3, 1/27/1-1/30/1 upstream TengigabitEthernet 1/31/1, 1/31/32 DellEMC(conf-uplink-state-group-16)# show configuration ! uplink-state-group 16 no enable description test downstream disable links all downstream TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 upstream TenGigabitEthernet 1/22/1 upstream Port-channel 8 Sample Configuration: Uplink Failure Detection The following example shows a sample configuration of UFD on a switch/router in which you configure as follows.
PAGE 933
(Up): Interface up (Dwn): Interface down (Dis): Interface disabled Uplink State Group : 3 Status: Enabled, Up Upstream Interfaces : Te 1/3/1(Up) Te 1/4/1(Dwn) Downstream Interfaces : Te 1/1/1(Dis) Te 1/2/1(Dwn) Te 1/5/1(Dwn) Te 1/9/1(Dwn) Te 1/11/1(Dwn) Te 1/12/1(Dwn) Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) 933
PAGE 934
57 Upgrade Procedures To find the upgrade procedures, go to the Dell EMC Networking OS Release Notes for your system type to see all the requirements needed to upgrade to the desired Dell EMC Networking OS version. To upgrade your system type, follow the procedures in the Dell EMC Networking OS Release Notes. You can download the release notes of your platform at https://www.force10networks.com. Use your login ID to log in to the website.
PAGE 935
58 Virtual LANs (VLANs) Virtual LANs (VLANs) are a logical broadcast domain or logical grouping of interfaces in a local area network (LAN) in which all data received is kept locally and broadcast to all members of the group. When in Layer 2 mode, VLANs move traffic at wire speed and can span multiple devices. The system supports up to 4093 portbased VLANs and one default VLAN, as specified in IEEE 802.1Q.
PAGE 936
NOTE: You cannot assign an IP address to the Default VLAN. To assign an IP address to a VLAN that is currently the Default VLAN, create another VLAN and assign it to be the Default VLAN. For more information about assigning IP addresses, refer to Assigning an IP Address to a VLAN. ● Untagged interfaces must be part of a VLAN. To remove an untagged interface from the Default VLAN, create another VLAN and place the interface into that VLAN.
PAGE 937
● The VLAN protocol identifier identifies the frame as tagged according to the IEEE 802.1Q specifications (2 bytes). ● Tag control information (TCI) includes the VLAN ID (2 bytes total). The VLAN ID can have 4,096 values, but two are reserved. NOTE: The insertion of the tag header into the Ethernet frame increases the size of the frame to more than the 1,518 bytes as specified in the IEEE 802.3 standard. Some devices that are not compliant with IEEE 802.3 may not support the larger frame size.
PAGE 938
Assigning Interfaces to a VLAN You can only assign interfaces in Layer 2 mode to a VLAN using the tagged and untagged commands. To place an interface in Layer 2 mode, use the switchport command. You can further designate these Layer 2 interfaces as tagged or untagged. For more information, see the Interfaces chapter and Configuring Layer 2 (Data Link) Mode.
PAGE 939
When you remove a tagged interface from a VLAN (using the no tagged interface command), it remains tagged only if it is a tagged interface in another VLAN. If the tagged interface is removed from the only VLAN to which it belongs, the interface is placed in the Default VLAN as an untagged interface. Moving Untagged Interfaces To move untagged interfaces from the Default VLAN to another VLAN, use the following commands. 1. Access INTERFACE VLAN mode of the VLAN to which you want to assign the interface.
PAGE 940
Assigning an IP Address to a VLAN VLANs are a Layer 2 feature. For two physical interfaces on different VLANs to communicate, you must assign an IP address to the VLANs to route traffic between the two interfaces. The shutdown command in INTERFACE mode does not affect Layer 2 traffic on the interface; the shutdown command only prevents Layer 3 traffic from traversing over the interface. NOTE: You cannot assign an IP address to the Default VLAN (VLAN 1).
PAGE 941
Enabling Null VLAN as the Default VLAN In a Carrier Ethernet for Metro Service environment, service providers who perform frequent reconfigurations for customers with changing requirements occasionally enable multiple interfaces, each connected to a different customer, before the interfaces are fully configured. This presents a vulnerability because both interfaces are initially placed in the native VLAN, VLAN 1, and for that period customers are able to access each other's networks.
PAGE 942
59 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Virtual link trunking (VLT) is a Dell EMC technology that provides two Dell EMC switches the ability to function as a single switch. VLT allows physical links between two Dell EMC switches to appear as a single virtual link to the network core or other switches such as Edge, Access, or top-of-rack (ToR). As a result, the two physical switches appear as a single switch to the connected devices.
PAGE 943
VLT not only overcomes this caveat, but also provides a multipath to the connected devices. In the example shown below, the two physical VLT peers appear as a single logical device to the connected devices. As the connected devices consider the VLT peers as a single switch, VLT eliminates STP-blocked ports. However, the two VLT devices are independent Layer2/Layer3 (L2/L3) switches for devices in the upstream network. Figure 131.
PAGE 944
Figure 132. Example of VLT Deployment VLT offers the following benefits: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Allows a single device to use a LAG across two upstream devices. Eliminates STP-blocked ports. Provides a loop-free topology. Uses all available uplink bandwidth. Provides fast convergence if either the link or a device fails. Optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP). Provides link-level resiliency. Assures high availability. Active-Active load sharing with VRRP.
PAGE 945
● VLT backup link — The backup link monitors the connectivity between the VLT peer switches. The backup link sends configurable, periodic keep alive messages between the VLT peer switches. ● VLT interconnect (VLTi) — The link used to synchronize states between the VLT peer switches. Both ends must be on 10G or 40G interfaces. ● VLT domain — This domain includes both the VLT peer devices, VLT interconnect, and all of the port channels in the VLT connected to the attached devices.
PAGE 946
Viewing the MAC Synchronization Between VLT Peers You can use the following commands to verify the MAC synchronization between VLT peers: VLT-10-PEER-1#show mac-address-table count MAC Entries for all vlans : Dynamic Address Count : 1007 Static Address (User-defined) Count : 1 Sticky Address Count : 0 Total Synced Mac from Peer(N): 503 Total MAC Addresses in Use: 1008 VLT-10-PEER-1#show vlt counter mac Total MAC VLT counters ---------------------L2 Total MAC-Address Count: 1007 VLT-10-PEER-1#show mac-addr
PAGE 947
that all the uplinks from servers to access and access to aggregation are in Active-Active Load Sharing mode. This example provides the highest form of resiliency, scaling, and load balancing in data center switching networks. The following example shows stacking at the access, VLT in aggregation, and Layer 3 at the core. Figure 134. VLT on Core Switches The aggregation layer is mostly in the L2/L3 switching/routing layer.
PAGE 948
Figure 135. Enhanced VLT Configure Virtual Link Trunking VLT requires that you enable the feature and then configure the same VLT domain, backup link, and VLT interconnect on both peer switches. Important Points to Remember WARNING: Do not add any VLANs to the VLT Interconnect. The VLTi interface manages VLAN tagged/untagged traffic automatically between peers. Manually adding any VLAN configuration has been shown to disrupt traffic flow.
PAGE 949
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● channels to or from a VLAN. You can manually add or remove a VLTi port-channel to a VLAN. In case a VLTi port-channel is manually removed from a VLAN, it is added back to the VLAN after reload of the VLTi peers. Use the lacp ungroup member-independent command only if the system connects to nodes using bare metal provisioning (BMP) to upgrade or boot from the network.
PAGE 950
Configuration Notes When you configure VLT, the following conditions apply. ● With VLT, when an L3 interface is created, the local DA of that interface is added as an L2 entry pointing to the ICL interface on the peer chassis. This ensures that the L3 packets reaching the peer, by LAG hashing on ToR, get forwarded to the actual chassis via ICL and then get routed. When this interface is removed, the entry pointing to ICL on the peer chassis is deleted.
PAGE 951
NOTE: If you configure the VLT system MAC address or VLT unit-id on only one of the VLT peer switches, the link between the VLT peer switches is not established. Each VLT peer switch must be correctly configured to establish the link between the peers. ○ If the link between the VLT peer switches is established, changing the VLT system MAC address or the VLT unit-id causes the link between the VLT peer switches to become disabled.
PAGE 952
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ￭ Ingress and egress QoS policies applied on VLT ports must be the same on both VLT peers. ￭ Apply the same ingress and egress QoS policies on VLTi (ICL) member ports to handle failed links. For detailed information about how to use VRRP in a VLT domain, see the following VLT and VRRP interoperability section. For information about configuring IGMP Snooping in a VLT domain, see VLT and IGMP Snooping.
PAGE 953
can configure another peer as the Primary Peer using the VLT domain domain-id role priority priority-value command. If the VLTi link fails, the status of the remote VLT Primary Peer is checked using the backup link. If the remote VLT Primary Peer is available, the Secondary Peer disables all VLT ports to prevent loops. If all ports in the VLTi link fail or if the communication between VLTi links fails, VLT checks the backup link to determine the cause of the failure.
PAGE 954
VLT and IGMP Snooping When configuring IGMP Snooping with VLT, ensure the configurations on both sides of the VLT trunk are identical to get the same behavior on both sides of the trunk. When you configure IGMP snooping on a VLT node, the dynamically learned groups and multicast router ports are automatically learned on the VLT peer node. VLT IPv6 The following features have been enhanced to support IPv6: ● VLT Sync — Entries learned on the VLT interface are synced on both VLT peers.
PAGE 955
Figure 136. PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT On each VLAN where the VLT peer nodes act as the first hop or last hop routers, one of the VLT peer nodes is elected as the PIM designated router. If you configured IGMP snooping along with PIM on the VLT VLANs, you must configure VLTi as the static multicast router port on both VLT peer switches. This ensures that for first hop routers, the packets from the source are redirected to the designated router (DR) if they are incorrectly hashed.
PAGE 956
If the VLT node elected as the designated router fails and you enable VLT Multicast Routing, multicast routes are synced to the other peer for traffic forwarding to ensure minimal traffic loss. If you did not enable VLT Multicast Routing, traffic loss occurs until the other VLT peer is selected as the DR. VLT Routing VLT Routing refers to the ability to run a dynamic routing protocol within a single VLT domain or between VLT domains (mVLT).
PAGE 957
If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as a proxy gateway for its connected VLT peer as shown in the image below. Even though the gateway address of the packet is different, Peer-1 routes the packet to its destination on behalf of Peer-2 to avoid sub-optimal routing. Figure 138. Packets with peer routing enabled Benefits of Peer Routing ● ● Avoids sub-optimal routing ● Reduces latency by avoiding another hop in the traffic path.
PAGE 958
Configuring VLT Unicast To enable and configure VLT unicast, follow these steps. 1. Enable VLT on a switch, then configure a VLT domain and enter VLT-domain configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id 2. Enable peer-routing. VLT DOMAIN mode peer-routing 3. Configure the peer-routing timeout. VLT DOMAIN mode peer-routing—timeout value value: Specify a value (in seconds) from 1 to 65535. The default value is infinity (without configuring the timeout).
PAGE 959
3. Configure the multicast peer-routing timeout. VLT DOMAIN mode multicast peer-routing—timeout value value: Specify a value (in seconds) from 1 to 1200. NOTE: Reduce the multicast peer-routing-timeout value to 10 seconds to clear the (S,G) entry in mroute in primary VLT peer. Also, the MLD leave packet must be sent after the unicast route convergence. 4. Configure a PIM-SM compatible VLT node as a designated router (DR). For more information, refer to Configuring a Designated Router. 5.
PAGE 960
Sample RSTP configuration The following is a sample of an RSTP configuration: Using the example shown in the Overview section as a sample VLT topology, the primary VLT switch sends BPDUs to an access device (switch or server) with its own RSTP bridge ID. BPDUs generated by an RSTP-enabled access device are only processed by the primary VLT switch. The secondary VLT switch tunnels the BPDUs that it receives to the primary VLT switch over the VLT interconnect.
PAGE 961
Configuring a VLT Interconnect To configure a VLT interconnect, follow these steps. 1. Configure the port channel for the VLT interconnect on a VLT switch and enter interface configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number Enter the same port-channel number configured with the peer-link port-channel command as described in Enabling VLT and Creating a VLT Domain. NOTE: To be included in the VLTi, the port channel must be in Default mode (no switchport or VLAN assigned). 2.
PAGE 962
4. Enable peer routing. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-routing If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as the proxy gateway for its peer. 5. (Optional) After you configure a VLT domain on each peer switch and connect (cable) the two VLT peers on each side of the VLT interconnect, the system elects a primary and secondary VLT peer device (see Primary and Secondary VLT Peers). To configure the primary and secondary roles before the election process, use the primary-priority command.
PAGE 963
CONFIGURATION mode delay-restore delay-restore-time The range is from 1 to 1200. The default is 90 seconds. Reconfiguring the Default VLT Settings (Optional) To reconfigure the default VLT settings, use the following commands. 1. Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 2.
PAGE 964
switchport 4. Add one or more port interfaces to the port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface interface: specify one of the following interface types: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. 5. Ensure that the port channel is active. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no shutdown 6.
PAGE 965
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. 3. Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 4. Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 5.
PAGE 966
port-channel-protocol lacp 14. Configure the LACP port channel mode. INTERFACE mode port-channel number mode [active] 15. Ensure that the interface is active. MANAGEMENT INTERFACE mode no shutdown 16. Enable peer routing. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-routing If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as the proxy gateway for its peer. 17. Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the VLT peer node in Domain 1. 18. Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the first VLT node in Domain 2. 19.
PAGE 967
12. Verify that VLT is running. EXEC mode show vlt brief or show vlt detail 13. Verify that the VLT LAG is running in both VLT peer units. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces interface In the following sample VLT configuration steps, VLT peer 1 is Dell-2, VLT peer 2 is Dell-4, and the ToR is S60-1. NOTE: If you use a third-party ToR unit, Dell EMC Networking recommends using static LAGs with VLT peers to avoid potential problems if you reboot the VLT peers.
PAGE 968
port-channel 2 mode active no shutdown configuring VLT peer lag in VLT Dell-2#show running-config interface port-channel 2 ! interface Port-channel 2 no ip address switchport vlt-peer-lag port-channel 2 no shutdown Dell-2#show interfaces port-channel 2 brief Codes: L - LACP Port-channel LAG 2 L Mode L2L3 Status up Uptime 03:33:14 Ports Te 1/4/1 (Up) In the ToR unit, configure LACP on the physical ports.
PAGE 969
Peer-Routing Peer-Routing-Timeout timer Multicast peer-routing timeout DellEMC# : Disabled : 0 seconds : 150 seconds Verify that the VLT LAG is up in VLT peer unit. Dell-2#show interfaces port-channel 2 brief Codes: L - LACP Port-channel LAG L 2 Mode L2L3 Status up Uptime 03:43:24 Ports Te 1/4/1 (Up) Dell-4#show interfaces port-channel 2 brief Codes: L - LACP Port-channel LAG L 2 Mode L2L3 Status up Uptime 03:33:31 Ports Te 1/18/1 (Up) PVST+ Configuration PVST+ is supported in a VLT domain.
PAGE 970
Po 1 128.2 128 Po 2 128.3 128 Te 1/10/1 128.230 128 128.230 Te 1/13/1 128.233 128 90b1.1cf4.9b79 128.233 Interface Name ---------Po 1 Po 2 Te 1/10/1 Te 1/10/3 DellEMC# Role -----Desg Desg Desg Desg 188 2000 2000 FWD(vltI) FWD(vlt) FWD 2000 FWD PortID -------128.2 128.3 128.230 128.233 Prio ---128 128 128 128 Cost ------188 2000 2000 2000 0 0 0 0 0 90b1.1cf4.9b79 128.2 90b1.1cf4.9b79 128.3 0 90b1.1cf4.
PAGE 971
Figure 139. Peer Routing Configuration Example Dell-1 Switch Configuration In the following output, RSTP is enabled with a bridge priority of 0. This ensures that Dell-1 becomes the root bridge. DellEMC#1#show run | find protocol protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 1,20,800,900 bridge-priority 0 The following output shows the existing VLANs.
PAGE 972
(The management interfaces are part of a default VRF and are isolated from the switch’s data plane.) In Dell-1, te 0/0 and te 0/1 are used for VLTi. DellEMC#1#sh run int te0/0 interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 description VLTi LINK no ip address no shutdown (VLTi Physical link) ! DellEMC#1#sh run int te0/1 interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 description VLTi LINK no ip address no shutdown (VLTi Physical link) The following example shows that te 0/0 and te 0/1 are included in port channel 10.
PAGE 973
Vlan 20 is used in Dell-1, Dell-2, and R1 to form OSPF adjacency. When OSPF is converged, the routing tables in all devices are synchronized. DellEMC#1#sh run int vlan 20 interface Vlan 20 description OSPF PEERING VLAN ip address 192.168.20.1/29 untagged Port-channel 1 no shutdown ! DellEMC#1#sh run int vlan 800 interface Vlan 800 description Client-VLAN ip address 192.168.8.1/24 tagged Port-channel 2 no shutdown The following output shows Dell-1 is configured with VLT domain 1.
PAGE 974
Use the show vlt detail command to verify that VLT is functional and that the correct VLANs are allowed. DellEMC#1#sh vlt detail Local LAG Id -----------1 2 Peer LAG Id ----------1 2 Local Status -----------UP UP Peer Status ----------UP UP Active VLANs ------------20 1, 800, 900 The following output displays the OSPF configuration in Dell-1 DellEMC#1#sh run | find router router ospf 1 router-id 172.17.1.1 network 192.168.9.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.8.0/24 area 0 network 172.17.1.
PAGE 975
0 0 90:b1:1c:f4:2c:bd 90:b1:1c:f4:29:f3 LOCAL_DA LOCAL_DA 00001 00001A The above output shows that the 90:b1:1c:f4:2c:bd MAC address belongs to Dell-1. The 90:b1:1c:f4:29:f3 MAC address belongs to Dell-2. Also note that these MAC addresses are marked with LOCAL_DA. This means, these are the local destination MAC addresses used by hosts when routing is required. Packets sent to this MAC address are directly forwarded to their destinations without being sent to the peer switch.
PAGE 976
no ip address port-channel-protocol LACP port-channel 2 mode active no shutdown Te 0/6 connects to the uplink switch R1. Dell-2#sh run int te0/6 interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/6 description To_CR1_fa0/13 no ip address port-channel-protocol LACP port-channel 1 mode active no shutdown Port channel 1 connects the uplink switch R1.
PAGE 977
Verify if VLT on Dell-1 is functional Dell-2#sh vlt brief VLT Domain Brief -----------------Domain ID: Role: Role Priority: 1 Secondary 55000 ICL Link Status: HeartBeat Status: VLT Peer Status: Local Unit Id: Version: Local System MAC address: Remote System MAC address: Configured System MAC address: Remote system version: Delay-Restore timer: Peer routing : Peer routing-Timeout timer: Multicast peer routing timeout: Up Up Up 1 6(3) 90:b1:1c:f4:29:f1 90:b1:1c:f4:2c:bb 90:b1:1c:f4:01:01 6(3) 90 seconds En
PAGE 978
The following output displays the routes learned using OSPF. Dell-2 also learns the routes to the loopback addresses on R1 through OSPF. Dell-2#show ip route ospf Destination Gateway ----------------O 2.2.2.2/24 via 192.168.20.3, O 3.3.3.2/24 via 192.168.20.3, O 4.4.4.2/24 via 192.168.20.3, O 172.15.1.1/32 via 192.168.20.3, O 172.16.1.2/32 via 192.168.20.
PAGE 979
network 172.15.1.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 192.168.20.0 0.0.0.7 area 0 CR1#show ip ospf neighbor (R1 is a DROTHER) Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface 172.16.1.2 1 FULL/BDR 00:00:31 192.168.20.2 Port-channel1 172.17.1.1 1 FULL/DR 00:00:38 192.168.20.1 Port-channel1 CR1#show ip route (Output Truncated) 2.0.0.0/24 is subnetted, 1 subnets C 2.2.2.0 is directly connected, Loopback2 3.0.0.0/24 is subnetted, 1 subnets C 3.3.3.0 is directly connected, Loopback3 O 192.168.8.0/24 [110/2] via 192.168.
PAGE 980
Figure 140. eVLT Configuration Example eVLT Configuration Step Examples In Domain 1, configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 1. Domain_1_Peer1#configure Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#interface port-channel 1 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-po-1)# channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 1/8/1-1/8/2 Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#vlt domain 1000 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-link port-channel 1 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-vlt-domain)# back-up destination 10.16.130.
PAGE 981
Configure eVLT on Peer 2. Domain_1_Peer2(conf)#interface port-channel 100 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# switchport Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# vlt-peer-lag port-channel 100 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown Add links to the eVLT port-channel on Peer 2.
PAGE 982
PIM-Sparse Mode Configuration Example The following sample configuration shows how to configure the PIM Sparse mode designated router functionality on the VLT domain with two VLT port-channels that are members of VLAN 4001. For more information, refer to PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT. Examples of Configuring PIM-Sparse Mode The following example shows how to enable PIM multicast routing on the VLT node globally.
PAGE 983
EXEC mode show vlt role ● Display the current configuration of all VLT domains or a specified group on the switch. EXEC mode show running-config vlt ● Display statistics on VLT operation. EXEC mode show vlt statistics ● Display the RSTP configuration on a VLT peer switch, including the status of port channels used in the VLT interconnect trunk and to connect to access devices. EXEC mode show spanning-tree rstp ● Display the current status of a port or port-channel interface used in the VLT domain.
PAGE 984
Delay-Restore Abort Threshold Peer-Routing Peer-Routing-Timeout timer Multicast peer-routing timeout DellEMC# : : : : 60 seconds Disabled 0 seconds 150 seconds The following example shows the show vlt detail command.
PAGE 985
VLT Statistics ---------------HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: ICL Hello's Sent: ICL Hello's Received: 994 978 89 89 The following example shows the show spanning-tree rstp command. The bold section displays the RSTP state of port channels in the VLT domain. Port channel 100 is used in the VLT interconnect trunk (VLTi) to connect to VLT peer2. Port channels 110, 111, and 120 are used to connect to access switches or servers (vlt).
PAGE 986
Configure the backup link. Dell_VLTpeer1(conf)#interface ManagementEthernet 1/1 Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-ma-1/1)#ip address 10.11.206.23/ Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-ma-1/1)#no shutdown Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-ma-1/1)#exit Configure the VLT interconnect (VLTi).
PAGE 987
Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-po-110)#vlt-peer-lag port-channel 110 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-po-110)#end Verify that the port channels used in the VLT domain are assigned to the same VLAN.
PAGE 988
Table 135. Troubleshooting VLT (continued) Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take A one-time informational syslog message is generated. To resolve, enable RSTP on both VLT peers. A one-time informational syslog message is generated. Correct the spanning tree configuration on the ports. Spanning tree mismatch at port level A syslog error message is generated.
PAGE 989
Specifying VLT Nodes in a PVLAN You can configure VLT peer nodes in a private VLAN (PVLAN). VLT enables redundancy without the implementation of Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), and provides a loop-free network with optimal bandwidth utilization. Because the VLT LAG interfaces are terminated on two different nodes, PVLAN configuration of VLT VLANs and VLT LAGs are symmetrical and identical on both the VLT peers. PVLANs provide Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same VLAN.
PAGE 990
MAC Synchronization for VLT Nodes in a PVLAN For the MAC addresses that are learned on non-VLT ports, MAC address synchronization is performed with the other peer if the VLTi (ICL) link is part of the same VLAN as the non-VLT port. For MAC addresses that are learned on VLT ports, the VLT LAG mode of operation and the primary to secondary association of the VLT nodes is determined on both the VLT peers.
PAGE 991
Scenarios for VLAN Membership and MAC Synchronization With VLT Nodes in PVLAN The following table illustrates the association of the VLTi link and PVLANs, and the MAC synchronization of VLT nodes in a PVLAN (for various modes of operations of the VLT peers): Table 136.
PAGE 992
Table 136.
PAGE 993
7. Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 8. (Optional) To configure a VLT LAG, enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN where the VLT forwards packets received on the VLTi from an adjacent peer that is down. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number peer-down-vlan vlan interface number Associating the VLT LAG or VLT VLAN in a PVLAN 1.
PAGE 994
By default, proxy ARP is enabled. To disable proxy ARP, use the no proxy-arp command in Interface mode. To re-enable proxy ARP, use the ip proxy-arp command in Interface mode. To view if proxy ARP is enabled on the interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode. If it is not listed in the show config command output, it is enabled. Only nondefault information displays in the show config command output.
PAGE 995
VLT Nodes as Rendezvous Points for Multicast Resiliency You can configure VLT peer nodes as rendezvous points (RPs) in a Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) domain. PIM uses a VLT node as the RP to distribute multicast traffic to a multicast group. Messages to join the multicast group (Join messages) and data are sent towards the RP, so that receivers can discover who the senders are and begin receiving traffic destined for the multicast group.
PAGE 996
DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#peer-link port-channel 1 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#back-up destination 10.16.151.116 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#primary-priority 100 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#system-mac mac-address 00:00:00:11:11:11 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#unit-id 0 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)# DellEMC#show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 1 peer-link port-channel 1 back-up destination 10.16.151.
PAGE 997
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs, R - Remote Port Mirroring VLANs, P - Primary, C - Community, I - Isolated O - Openflow Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged o - OpenFlow untagged, O - OpenFlow tagged G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack i - Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - VLT untagged, V - VLT tagged NUM 50 Status Active Description DellEMC# Q M M V Ports Po10(Te 1/8/1) Po20(Te 1/12/1) Po1(Te 1/30-32/1) Sample Configuration of VLAN-Stack Over VLT (Peer 2) Con
PAGE 998
DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 10 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 20 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)# DellEMC#show running-config interface vlan 50 ! interface Vlan 50 vlan-stack compatible member Port-channel 10,20 shutdown DellEMC# Verify that the Port Channels used in the VLT Domain are Assigned to the VLAN-Stack VLAN DellEMC#show vlan id 50 Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs, R - Remote Port Mirroring VLANs, P - Primary, C - Community, I - Isolated O - Openflow Q: U
PAGE 999
node, node2, owing to LAG-level hashing in the ToR switch, it is routed instead of forwarding the packet to node1. This processing occurs because of the match or hit for the entry in the TCAM of the VLT node2. Synchronization of IPv6 ND Entries in a VLT Domain Because the VLT nodes appear as a single unit, the ND entries learned via the VLT interface are expected to be the same on both VLT nodes.
PAGE 1000
Figure 141. Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Consider a sample scenario as shown in the following figure in which two VLT nodes, Unit1 and Unit2, are connected in a VLT domain using an ICL or VLTi link. To the south of the VLT domain, Unit1 and Unit2 are connected to a ToR switch named Node B. Also, Unit1 is connected to another node, Node A, and Unit2 is linked to a node, Node C.
PAGE 1001
Consider a case in which NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node1 on the VLT interface and NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node2 due to LAG level hashing in the ToR. When VLT node1 receives NS from VLT VLAN interface, it unicasts the NA packet on the VLT interface. When NS reaches VLT node2, it is flooded on all interfaces including ICL. When VLT node 1 receives NS on ICL, it floods the NA packet on the VLAN. If NS is unicast and if it reaches the wrong VLT peer, it is lifted to the CPU using ACL entry.
PAGE 1002
When VLT node receives traffic from non-VLT host intended to VLT host, it routes the traffic to VLT interface. If VLT interface is not operationally up VLT node will route the traffic over ICL. Non-VLT host to North Bound traffic flow When VLT node receives traffic from non-VLT host intended to north bound with DMAC as self MAC it routes traffic to next hop.
PAGE 1003
ToR 1. Enable BFD globally. TOR(conf)# bfd enable 2. Configure a VLT peer LAG. TOR(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#no ip address TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#port-channel-protocol lacp TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#port-channel 10 mode active TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#no shutdown TOR(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/2 TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/2)#no ip address TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/2)#port-channel-protocol lacp TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/2)#port-channel 10 mode active TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/2)#no shutdown 3.
PAGE 1004
5. Enable BFD over OSPF. TOR(conf)# router ospf 1 TOR(conf-router_ospf)# network 100.1.1.0/24 area 0 TOR(conf-router_ospf)# bfd all-neighbors VLT Primary 1. Enable BFD globally. VLT_Primary(conf)# bfd enable 2. Configure port channel which is used as VLTi link. VLT_Primary(conf)# interface VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# port-channel 100 no ip address channel-member tengigabitethernet 1/1/1, 1/1/2 no shutdown 3. Enable VLT and configure a VLT domain.
PAGE 1005
2. Configure port channel which is used as VLTi link. VLT_Secondary(conf)# interface VLT_Secondary(conf-if-po-100)# VLT_Secondary(conf-if-po-100)# VLT_Secondary(conf-if-po-100)# port-channel 100 no ip address channel-member tengigabitethernet 1/1/1, 1/1/2 no shutdown 3. Enable VLT and configure a VLT domain. VLT_Secondary(conf)# vlt domain VLT_Secondary(conf-vlt-domain)# VLT_Secondary(conf-vlt-domain)# VLT_Secondary(conf-vlt-domain)# 100 peer-link port-channel 100 back-up destination 10.16.206.
PAGE 1006
Delay-Restore Abort Threshold: Peer-Routing : Peer-Routing-Timeout timer: Multicast peer-routing timeout: 60 seconds Enabled 0 seconds 150 seconds ● To verify the VLTi (ICL) link is up in the VLT secondary peer, use show vlt brief command.
PAGE 1007
Static VXLAN Configuration in a VLT setup Configuration steps are covered below: 1. Both Gateway VTEPs need VLT configured. ● ICL port configuration interface Port-channel 1 no ip address channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 0/4-5 no shutdown ● VLT Domain Configuration vlt domain 100 peer-link port-channel 1 back-up destination 10.11.70.14  this is ip address of the peer node ● VXLAN Instance Configuration vxlan-instance 1 static local-vtep-ip 14.14.14.
PAGE 1008
vni-profile test vnid 200 remote-vtep-ip 3.3.3.3 vni-profile test ● VLT Access port configuration interface TengigabitEthernet 0/12 port-channel-protocol lacp port-channel 30 mode active interface Port-channel 30 no ip address vxlan-instance 1 switchport vlt-peer-lag port-channel 30 no shutdown 2. Configure loopback interface and VXLAN instances on both the peers. ● Configure loopback interface IP address on both peers with the same IPaddress. interface Loopback 1 ip address 14.14.14.14/32 no shutdown 3.
PAGE 1009
60 VLT Proxy Gateway The virtual link trucking (VLT) proxy gateway feature allows a VLT domain to locally terminate and route L3 packets that are destined to a Layer 3 (L3) end point in another VLT domain. Enable the VLT proxy gateway using the link layer discover protocol (LLDP) method or the static configuration. For more information, see the Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1010
Figure 143. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway Guidelines for Enabling the VLT Proxy Gateway Keep the following points in mind when you enable a VLT proxy gateway: ● Proxy gateway is supported only for VLT; for example, across a VLT domain. ● You must enable the VLT peer-routing command for the VLT proxy gateway to function.
PAGE 1011
● Private VLANs (PVLANs) are not supported. ● When a Virtual Machine (VM) moves from one VLT domain to the another VLT domain, the VM host sends the gratuitous ARP (GARP) , which in-turn triggers a mac movement from the previous VLT domain to the newer VLT domain. ● After a station move, if the host sends a TTL1 packet destined to its gateway; for example, a previous VLT node, the packet can be dropped.
PAGE 1012
● You must globally enable LLDP. ● You cannot have interface–level LLDP disable commands on the interfaces configured for proxy gateway and you must enable both transmission and reception. ● You must connect both units of the remote VLT domain by the port channel member. ● If you connect more than one port to a unit of the remote VLT domain, the connection must be completed by the time you enable the proxy gateway LLDP.
PAGE 1013
● The preceding figure shows a sample square VLT Proxy gateway topology. There are no diagonal links in the square VLT connection between the C and D in VLT domain 1 and C1 and D1 in the VLT domain 2. This causes sub-optimal routing. For VLT Proxy Gateway to work in this scenario you must configure the VLT-peer-mac transmit command under VLT Domain Proxy Gateway LLDP mode, in both C and D (VLT domain 1) and C1 and D1 (VLT domain 2).
PAGE 1014
2. Configure peer-domain-link port-channel in VLT Domain Proxy Gateway LLDP mode. The VLT port channel is the one that connects the remote VLT domain. Sample Dynamic Proxy Configuration on C switch or C1 switch Switch_C#conf Switch_C(conf)#vlt domain 1 Switch_C(conf-vlt-domain1)#proxy-gateway lldp Switch_C(conf-vlt-domain1-pxy-gw-lldp)#peer-domain-link port-channel 1....
PAGE 1015
The MAC addresses, configured using the remote-mac-address command, belong to Dell-3 and Dell-4.
PAGE 1016
remote-mac-address 00:01:e8:8b:ff:4f remote-mac-address 00:01:e8:d8:93:04 The MAC addresses, configured using the remote-mac-address command, belong to Dell-3 and Dell-4. interface Vlan 100 description OSPF peering VLAN to Dell-1 ip address 10.10.100.2/30 ip ospf network point-to-point no shutdown The following is the OSPF configuration on Dell-2. router ospf 1 router-id 2.2.2.2 network 10.10.100.0/30 area 0 The following output shows that Dell-1 forms OSPF neighborship with Dell-2.
PAGE 1017
interface Vlan 102 description ospf peering vlan to DELL-4 ip address 10.10.102.1/30 ip ospf network point-to-point no shutdown The following is the OSPF configuration on Dell-3. router ospf 1 router-id 3.3.3.3 network 10.10.101.0/30 area 0 network 10.10.102.0/30 area 0 The following output shows that Dell-4 and VLT domain 120 form OSPF neighborship with Dell-3. Dell-3#sh ip ospf nei ! Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.4 1 FULL/ - 00:00:33 10.10.101.1 Vl 101 0 1.1.1.
PAGE 1018
61 Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Overview The switch acts as the VXLAN gateway and performs the VXLAN Tunnel End Point (VTEP) functionality. VXLAN is a technology where in the data traffic from the virtualized servers is transparently transported over an existing legacy network. Figure 146. VXLAN Gateway NOTE: In a stack setup, the Dell EMC Networking OS does not support VXLAN.
PAGE 1019
• • Routing in and out of VXLAN tunnels NSX Controller-based VXLAN for VLT Components of VXLAN network VXLAN provides a mechanism to extend an L2 network over an L3 network. In short, VXLAN is an L2 overlay scheme over an L3 network and this overlay is termed as a VXLAN segment.
PAGE 1020
Service Node(SN) It is also another VTEP, but it is fully managed by the controller. The purpose of SN is to be the central replication engine for flooded packets Legacy TOR It is a TOR switch, which performs routing or switching decisions. Functional Overview of VXLAN Gateway The following section is the functional overview of VXLAN Gateway: 1. Provides connectivity between a Virtual server infrastructure and a Physical server infrastructure. 2.
PAGE 1021
● Destination Address: Generally, it is a first hop router's MAC address when the VTEP is on a different address. ● Source Address : It is the source MAC address of the router that routes the packet. ● VLAN: It is optional in a VXLAN implementation and will be designated by an ethertype of 0×8100 and has an associated VLAN ID tag. ● Ethertype: It is set to 0×0800 because the payload packet is an IPv4 packet.
PAGE 1022
Configuring and Controlling VXLAN from the NSX Controller GUI You can configure and control VXLAN from the NSX controller GUI, by adding a hardware device to NSX and authenticating the device. 1. Generate a certificate in your system and add it to the NSX before adding a hardware device for authentication. To generate a certificate, use the following command: ● crypto cert generate self-signed cert-file flash://vtep-cert.pem key-file flash:// vtep-privkey.
PAGE 1023
Figure 148. Create VXLAN Gateway To create a VXLAN L2 Gateway, the IP address of the Gateway is required. After connectivity is established between the VTEP and NSX controller, the management IP address and the connectivity status are populated as shown in the following image. Figure 149. Hardware Devices 3. Add a service node or replicator. Under Home > Networking and Security > Service Definition > Hardware Devices > Replication Cluster, click the Edit button.
PAGE 1024
Figure 150. Add Service Node or Replicator NOTE: Ensure L3 reachability between the VTEP and the replicator. 4. Create Logical Switch. You can create a logical network by creating a logical switch. The logical network acts as the forwarding domain for workloads on the physical as well as virtual infrastructure. Click Home > Networking and Security > Logical Switches and click Add. The New Logical Switch window opens. Enter a name and select Unicast as the replication mode and click OK. Figure 151.
PAGE 1025
In the Manage Hardware Bindings window, expand a VTEP and click Add. The Manage Hardware Bindings Window opens. Click the Select link and the Specify Hardware Port window opens. Click the hardware port and click OK. Figure 152. Specify Hardware Port In the Manage Hardware Bindings window, under the VLAN column, enter the VLAN ID and press OK. Figure 153. Create Logical Switch Port 6. (Optional) Enable or disable BFD globally. Go to Hardware Devices tab > BFD Configuration, and click the Edit button.
PAGE 1026
Figure 154. Edit VXLAN BFD Configuration NOTE: For more details about NSX controller configuration, refer to the NSX user guide from VMWare . Configuring and Controling VXLAN from Nuage Controller GUI The Dell EMC Networking OS supports Nuage controller for VXLAN. You can configure and control VXLAN from the Nuage controller GUI, by adding a hardware device to the Nuage controller and authenticating the device. 1. Under the Infrastructure tab, add a datacenter gateway. Figure 155.
PAGE 1027
Figure 156. Port-to-VLAN mappings 3. Under the Networks tab, create an L2 domain. Under the L2 domain, create a logical network (VNI) and add access ports of the VTEP in the logical network. Figure 157. Access ports of the VTEP Configuring VxLAN Gateway To configure the VxLAN gateway on the switch, follow these steps: 1. Connecting to NVP controller 2. Advertising VXLAN access ports to controller Connecting to an NVP Controller To connect to an NVP controller, use the following commands. 1.
PAGE 1028
3. Define how the device connects to the controller. VxLAN INSTANCE mode controller controller ID ip address port port-number TCP | SSL The port number range is from 1 to 6632. The default connection type is SSL. TCP, PTCP, and PSSL are supported with NSX controller only. 4. Enter the gateway IP VxLAN INSTANCE mode gateway-ip IP address 5. Enter the maximum backoff time (Optional). VxLAN INSTANCE mode max_backoff time The range is from 1000-180000. The default value is 30000 milliseconds. 6.
PAGE 1029
The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance logical-network command. • show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 logical-network Instance : 1 Total LN count : 1024 * - No VLAN mapping exists and yet to be installed Name VNID 1ba08465-8774-3383-ba51-8b7e642ff632 6427 02f063c2-36c7-3ef6-a324-b432b748d15d 6218 36ab6265-5fa8-3ce8-b35c-e7cfdaf7c9e8 6368 The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance statistics interface command.
PAGE 1030
Examples of the show bfd neighbors command. To verify that the session is established, use the show bfd neighbors command. Dell_GW1#show bfd neighbors * Ad Dn B C I O O3 R M V VT * * * * * * - Active session role Admin Down BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr 1.0.1.1 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 RemoteAddr 1.0.1.2 192.168.122.135 192.168.122.136 192.168.122.137 192.168.122.138 192.168.122.
PAGE 1031
VNI-PROFILE mode vnid VNID Range 6. Create a remote tunnel and associate the remote VTEP to the VNID. VXLAN-INSTANCE mode remote—vtep—ip remote IP Address vni-profile profile name 7. Enable the VXLAN. VXLAN-INSTANCE mode no shutdown 8. Enable VXLAN instance on the interface. The interface should not be on layer 2. INTERFACE mode vxlan-instance Instance ID 9. Associate VNID to VLAN.
PAGE 1032
Use the following command to clear the remote VTEP and access port statistics. DellEMC# clear vxlan vxlan-instance 1 statistics Disabling MAC Address Learning on Static VXLAN Tunnels You can configure the system to not learn MAC addresses on static VXLAN tunnels or remote VTEPs. MAC address learning on static VXLAN tunnels is Enabled by default.
PAGE 1033
Following is the output of show ip routecommand for the above connection: DellEMC# show ip route Destination Gateway --------------- Dist/Metric Last ----------- *B IN 0.0.0.0/0 C 1.1.1.1/32 B IN 2.2.2.2/32 200/0 0/0 200/0 via 192.168.11.2 Direct, Lo 1 via 192.168.22.1 Change ----------16:13:30 8:59:34 00:36:48 From the above routing table it is understood that the remote VTEP 2.2.2.2/32 is resolved through next-hop 192.168.22.1, which is not directly connected.
PAGE 1034
In this RIOT scheme, whenever R1 tries to reach R2, the packet gets to P1 on VTEP 1 with VLAN 10 and gets routed out of P2 on VLAN 20. VTEP 1 sends an ARP request for R2 (10.1.2.1) through P2. This request gets VXLAN encapsulated at P3 and is sent out of P4. Eventually, the native ARP request reaches R2. R2 sends an ARP response that is VXLAN encapsulated at VTEP 2. This response reaches VTEP 1 on P4 with a VXLAN encapsulation. At this point, the ARP response is de-capsulated at P4.
PAGE 1035
The topology to achieve RIOT with a physical loopback is inherently susceptible to Layer 2 loops. To prevent these loops from disrupting the network, the following egress masks need to be applied: ● ● ● ● Any Any Any Any frame frame frame frame ingressing ingressing ingressing ingressing on on on on a a a a VXLAN access port is not allowed to egress out of a VXLAN loopback port. VXLAN loopback port is not allowed to egress out of a VXLAN access port.
PAGE 1036
In this topology, P2 and P3 in VTEP 1 are VLT port-channels with corresponding VLT peer LAGs being P2 and P3 in VTEP 2. Similarly, P6 and P7 in VTEP 3 are VLT port-channels with corresponding VLT peer LAGs being P6 and P7 in VTEP 4. NOTE: P2, P3, P6, and P7 can be a single port or multi-port port-channels that are VLT port-channels. NOTE: The VLT VXLAN configuration for RIOT deviates from the standard VLT behavior when these physical loopbacks are provisioned as VLT port-channels.
PAGE 1037
Figure 159. Controller-based VXLAN for VLT Providing Redundancy Important Points to Remember ● The VLT peer port channel number must be the same on both VLT peers. ● before configuring controller-based VXLAN with VLT, remove any existing standalone VXLAN configuration. ● BFD tunnels come up only after the NSX controller sends tunnel details. The details come after the remote MAC addresses are downloaded from NSX controller.
PAGE 1038
bfd enable Enter the result of your step here (optional). 2. Create an uplink-state group. CONFIGURATION mode uplink-state-group group-id group-id: values are from 1 to 16. 3. Assign a VLT port channel to the uplink-state group as an upstream link. UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode upstream interface 4. Assign a network port or port channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream link.
PAGE 1039
vlt domain domain-id The domain ID range is from 1 to 1000. Configure the same domain ID on the peer switch 2. Configure the IP address of the management interface on the remote VLT peer to be used as the endpoint of the VLT backup link for sending out-of-band hello messages. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode back-up destination ip-address 3. Configure the port channel to be used as the VLT interconnect between VLT peers in the domain. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 4.
PAGE 1040
vlt-peer-lag port-channel 10 no shutdown The following are some of the show command outputs on the VLT primary: DellEMC#show vlt brief VLT Domain Brief -----------------Domain ID: Role: Role Priority: ICL Link Status: HeartBeat Status: VLT Peer Status: Local Unit Id: Version: Local System MAC address: Remote System MAC address: Configured System MAC address: Remote system version: Delay-Restore timer: Delay-Restore Abort Threshold: Peer-Routing : Peer-Routing-Timeout timer: Multicast peer-routing timeout: D
PAGE 1041
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs, R - Remote Port Mirroring VLANs, P - Primary, C - Community, I - Isolated O - Openflow, Vx - Vxlan Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged o - OpenFlow untagged, O - OpenFlow tagged G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack i - Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - VLT untagged, V - VLT tagged * NUM 1 Status Active Vx 20 Active 500 Active Description DellEMC# DellEMC# DellEMC#sh vxlan vxlan-instance 1 multicast-mac * - Active Replicator
PAGE 1042
Role Priority: ICL Link Status: HeartBeat Status: VLT Peer Status: Local Unit Id: Version: Local System MAC address: Remote System MAC address: Configured System MAC address: Remote system version: Delay-Restore timer: Delay-Restore Abort Threshold: Peer-Routing : Peer-Routing-Timeout timer: Multicast peer-routing timeout: DellEMC# DellEMC# DellEMC# 10 Up Up Up 1 6(8) f4:8e:38:2b:3e:85 14:18:77:0a:53:80 00:00:00:11:11:11 6(8) 90 seconds 60 seconds Enabled 0 seconds 150 seconds DellEMC#sh vxlan vxlan-insta
PAGE 1043
Tunnel : count 1 6.6.6.2 : vxlan_over_ipv4 (up) DellEMC#show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 unicast-mac-local Total Local Mac Count: 1 VNI MAC PORT 5000 00:00:00:cc:00:00 (N) Po 1 VLAN 20 DellEMC#show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 unicast-mac-remote Total Remote Mac Count: 1 VNI MAC TUNNEL 5000 00:00:bb:00:00:00 4.3.3.
PAGE 1044
Copy and paste the generated certificate to the NSX. NOTE: Once controller connectivity is established from VLT peers, if you want to generate a new certificate and use it for controller connection, generate the certificate from the node (node that is directly connected to controller). If you do not generate a new certificate from the node, system shows inconsistent behavior. 2. Create a VXLAN Gateway. To create service node, the required fields are the IP address and SSL certificate of the server.
PAGE 1045
Figure 161. Hardware Devices 3. Add a service node or replicator. Under Home > Networking and Security > Service Definition > Hardware Devices > Replication Cluster, click the Edit button. Select required hosts for replication and click OK. Figure 162. Add Service Node or Replicator NOTE: Ensure L3 reachability between the VTEP and the replicator. 4. Create Logical Switch. You can create a logical network by creating a logical switch.
PAGE 1046
Figure 163. Create Logical Switch 5. Create Logical Switch Port. A logical switch port provides a logical connection point for a VM interface (VIF) and a L2 gateway connection to an external network. It binds the virtual access ports in the gateway to logical network (VXLAN) and VLAN. In the Manage Hardware Bindings window, expand a VTEP and click Add. The Manage Hardware Bindings Window opens. Click the Select link and the Specify Hardware Port window opens. Click the hardware port and click OK.
PAGE 1047
Figure 165. Create Logical Switch Port 6. (Optional) Enable or disable BFD globally. Go to Hardware Devices tab > BFD Configuration, and click the Edit button. The Edit BFD Configuration windows opens. Check or uncheck the Enable BFD check box. You can also change the probe interval if required. Figure 166. Edit VXLAN BFD Configuration NOTE: For more details about NSX controller configuration, refer to the NSX user guide from VMWare .
PAGE 1048
62 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows a physical router to partition itself into multiple Virtual Routers (VRs). The control and data plane are isolated in each VR so that traffic does NOT flow across VRs.Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to co-exist within the same router at the same time.
PAGE 1049
Figure 167. VRF Network Example VRF Configuration Notes Although there is no restriction on the number of VLANs that can be assigned to a VRF instance, the total number of routes supported in VRF is limited by the size of the IPv4 CAM. VRF is implemented in a network device by using Forwarding Information Bases (FIBs). A network device may have the ability to configure different virtual routers, where entries in the FIB that belong to one VRF cannot be accessed by another VRF on the same device.
PAGE 1050
VRF supports some routing protocols only on the default VRF (default-vrf) instance. Table 1 displays the software features supported in VRF and whether they are supported on all VRF instances or only the default VRF. NOTE: To configure a router ID in a non-default VRF, configure at least one IP address in both the default as well as the non-default VRF. Table 137. Software Features Supported on VRF Feature/Capability Support Status for Default VRF Support Status for Non-default VRF 802.
PAGE 1051
DHCP DHCP requests are not forwarded across VRF instances. The DHCP client and server must be on the same VRF instance. VRF Configuration The VRF configuration tasks are: 1. Enabling VRF in Configuration Mode 2. Creating a Non-Default VRF 3. Assign an Interface to a VRF You can also: ● View VRF Instance Information ● Connect an OSPF Process to a VRF Instance ● Configure VRRP on a VRF Loading VRF CAM ● Load CAM memory for the VRF feature.
PAGE 1052
interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 2. Assign the interface to management VRF. INTERFACE CONFIGURATION ip vrf forwarding management Before assigning a front-end port to a management VRF, ensure that no IP address is configured on the interface. 3. Assign an IPv4 address to the interface. INTERFACE CONFIGURATION ip address 10.1.1.1/24 Before assigning a front-end port to a management VRF, ensure that no IP address is configured on the interface. 4. Assign an IPv6 address to the interface.
PAGE 1053
Table 138. Configuring VRRP on a VRF (continued) Task Command Syntax Assign an IP address to the interface Configure the VRRP group and virtual IP address View VRRP command output for the VRF vrf1 Command Mode ip address 10.1.1.1 /24 no shutdown vrrp-group 10 virtual-address 10.1.1.100 show config ----------------------------! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/13/1 ip vrf forwarding vrf1 ip address 10.1.1.1/24 ! vrrp-group 10 virtual-address 10.1.1.
PAGE 1054
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 nd ra-lifetime — Set IPv6 Router Advertisement Lifetime nd reachable-time — Set advertised reachability time nd retrans-timer — Set NS retransmit interval used and advertised in RA nd suppress-ra — Suppress IPv6 Router Advertisements ad — IPv6 Address Detection ad autoconfig — IPv6 stateless auto-configuration address — Configure IPv6 address on an interface NOTE: The command line help still displays relevant details correspon
PAGE 1055
Figure 169. Setup VRF Interfaces The following example relates to the configuration shown in the above illustrations. Router 1 ip vrf blue 1 ! ip vrf orange 2 ! ip vrf green 3 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 10.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 20.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding green ip address 30.0.0.
PAGE 1056
ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 1.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 192 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 2.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1/1 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.1 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.0.0/24 area 0 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.1 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 20.0.0.
PAGE 1057
! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.2 network 11.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/1 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.2 network 21.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/2/1 ! ip route vrf green30.0.0.0/24 3.0.0.1 ! The following shows the output of the show commands on Router 1.
PAGE 1058
Change --------------------C 2.0.0.0/24 C 20.0.0.0/24 00:10:05 O 21.0.0.0/24 00:10:41 ------- ----------- Direct, Vl 192 Direct, Te 1/2/1 via 2.0.0.
PAGE 1059
----------C 1.0.0.0/24 00:27:21 O 10.0.0.0/24 00:14:24 C 11.0.0.0/24 00:19:46 Direct, Vl 128 via 1.0.0.
PAGE 1060
The following example illustrates how route leaking between two VRFs can be performed: interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/9/1 ip vrf forwarding VRF1 ip address 120.0.0.1/24 interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/10/1 ip vrf forwarding VRF2 ip address 140.0.0.1/24 ip route vrf VRF1 20.0.0.0/16 140.0.0.2 vrf VRF2 ip route vrf VRF2 40.0.0.0/16 120.0.0.
PAGE 1061
ip route-export 1:1 3. Configure VRF-red. ip vrf vrf-red interface-type slot/port[/subport] ip vrf forwarding VRF-red ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-red is created and the interface is assigned to this VRF. 4. Configure the import target in VRF-red. ip route-import 1:1 5. Configure the export target in VRF-red. ip route-export 2:2 6. Configure VRF-blue.
PAGE 1062
00:00:11 C 122.2.2.0/24 Direct, Te 1/12/1 0/0 22:39:61 DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Green O 33.3.3.3/32 via 133.3.3.3 110/0 00:00:11 C 133.3.3.0/24 Direct, Te 1/13/1 0/0 22:39:61 DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Shared O 44.4.4.4/32 via 144.4.4.4 110/0 00:00:11 C 144.4.4.0/24 Direct, Te 1/4/1 0/0 00:32:36 Show routing tables of VRFs( after route-export and route-import tags are configured). DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Red O C O C 11.1.1.1/32 111.1.1.0/24 44.4.4.4/32 144.4.4.0/24 via 111.1.
PAGE 1063
● The leaked route points to the next-hop of the source routes. You cannot do any modifications to the next-hop of the leaked route in the destination VRF. ● IPv6 link local routes will never be leaked from one VRF to another. Configuring Route Leaking with Filtering When you initalize route leaking from one VRF to another, all the routes are exposed to the target VRF.
PAGE 1064
DellEMC(config-route-map)match source-protocol ospf This action specifies that the route-map contains OSPF as the matching criteria for importing routes into vrf-blue. 8. Configure the import target in VRF-blue with route-map import_ospf_protociol. ip route-import 1:1 import_ospf_protocol When you import routes into VRF-blue using the route-map import_ospf_protocol, only OSPF routes are imported into VRFblue.
PAGE 1065
63 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. Topics: • • • • • • VRRP Overview VRRP Benefits VRRP Implementation VRRP Configuration Sample Configurations Proxy Gateway with VRRP VRRP Overview VRRP is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network.
PAGE 1066
Figure 170. Basic VRRP Configuration VRRP Benefits With VRRP configured on a network, end-station connectivity to the network is not subject to a single point-of-failure. Endstation connections to the network are redundant and are not dependent on internal gateway protocol (IGP) protocols to converge or update routing tables. In conjunction with Virtual Link Trunking (VLT), you can configure optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP).
PAGE 1067
NOTE: In a VLT environment, VRRP configuration acts as active-active and if route is not present in any of the VRRP nodes, the packet to the destination is dropped on that VRRP node. Table 139.
PAGE 1068
The following examples how to configure VRRP. DellEMC(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#vrrp-group 111 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-111)# The following examples how to verify the VRRP configuration. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#show conf ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 ip address 10.10.10.
PAGE 1069
3. Set the backup switches to version 3. Dell_backup_switch1(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-100)#version 3 Dell_backup_switch2(conf-if-te-1/2/1-vrid-100)#version 3 Assign Virtual IP addresses Virtual routers contain virtual IP addresses configured for that VRRP group (VRID). A VRRP group does not transmit VRRP packets until you assign the Virtual IP address to the VRRP group.
PAGE 1070
virtual-address 10.10.10.1 virtual-address 10.10.10.2 virtual-address 10.10.10.3 ! vrrp-group 222 no shutdown The following example shows the same VRRP group (VRID 111) configured on multiple interfaces on different subnets. DellEMC#show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1, VRID: 111, Version: 2 Net: 10.10.10.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 255, Master: 10.10.10.
PAGE 1071
Virtual IP address: 10.10.10.1 10.10.10.2 10.10.10.3 10.10.10.10 Authentication: (none) -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/2/1, VRID: 111, Net: 10.10.2.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 125, Master: 10.10.2.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 601, Gratuitous ARP sent: 2 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:6f Virtual IP address: 10.10.2.2 10.10.2.
PAGE 1072
● Prevent any BACKUP router with a higher priority from becoming the MASTER router. INTERFACE-VRID mode no preempt Re-enable preempt by entering the preempt command. When you enable preempt, it does not display in the show commands, because it is a default setting. The following example shows how to disable preempt using the no preempt command.
PAGE 1073
The following example shows how to change the advertise interval using the advertise-interval command. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#vrrp-group 111 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-111)#advertise-interval 10 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-111)# The following example shows how to verify the advertise interval change using the show conf command. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-111)#show conf ! vrrp-group 111 advertise-interval 10 authentication-type simple 7 387a7f2df5969da4 no preempt priority 255 virtual-address 10.
PAGE 1074
● (Optional) Display the configuration and the UP or DOWN state of tracked objects, including the client (VRRP group) that is tracking an object’s state. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show track ● (Optional) Display the configuration and the UP or DOWN state of tracked interfaces and objects in VRRP groups, including the time since the last change in an object’s state.
PAGE 1075
2007::1 fe80::1 Tracking states for 2 resource Ids: 2 - Up IPv6 route, 2040::/64, priority-cost 20, 00:02:11 3 - Up IPv6 route, 2050::/64, priority-cost 30, 00:02:11 The following example shows verifying the VRRP configuration on an interface.
PAGE 1076
Sample Configurations Before you set up VRRP, review the following sample configurations. VRRP for an IPv4 Configuration The following configuration shows how to enable IPv4 VRRP. This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes.
PAGE 1077
R2(conf-if-te-2/31/1-vrid-99)#virtual 10.1.1.3 R2(conf-if-te-2/31/1-vrid-99)#no shut R2(conf-if-te-2/31/1)#show conf ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31/1 ip address 10.1.1.1/24 ! vrrp-group 99 priority 200 virtual-address 10.1.1.3 no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-2/31/1)#end R2#show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 2/31/1, VRID: 99, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 200, Master: 10.1.1.
PAGE 1078
Figure 172. VRRP for an IPv6 Configuration NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be MASTER even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address. The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv6 Router 2 and Router 3. Configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface.
PAGE 1079
vrrp-group 10 priority 100 virtual-address fe80::10 virtual-address 1::10 no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#end R2#show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1, IPv6 VRID: 10, Version: 3, Net:fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f (local) Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 135 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:0a Virtual IP a
PAGE 1080
groups on each VRF instance in order that there is one MASTER and one backup router for each VRF. In VRF-1 and VRF-2, Switch-2 serves as owner-master of the VRRP group and Switch-1 serves as the backup. On VRF-3, Switch-1 is the ownermaster and Switch-2 is the backup. In VRF-1 and VRF-2 on Switch-2, the virtual IP and node IP address, subnet, and VRRP group are the same.
PAGE 1081
S1(conf-if-te-1/2/1)#no shutdown ! S1(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/3/1 S1(conf-if-te-1/3/1)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-3 S1(conf-if-te-1/3/1)#ip address 20.1.1.5/24 S1(conf-if-te-1/3/1)#vrrp-group 15 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 15 in VRF 3 will be 243. S1(conf-if-te-1/3/1-vrid-105)#priority 255 S1(conf-if-te-1/3/1-vrid-105)#virtual-address 20.1.1.
PAGE 1082
This VLAN scenario often occurs in a service-provider network in which you configure VLAN tags for traffic from multiple customers on customer-premises equipment (CPE), and separate VRF instances associated with each VLAN are configured on the provider edge (PE) router in the point-of-presence (POP).
PAGE 1083
10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) VRRP in VRF: Switch-2 VLAN Configuration Switch-2 S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-1 1 ! S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-2 2 ! S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S2(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 S2(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#no ip address S2(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#switchport S2(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#no shutdown ! S2(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#interface vlan 100 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#ip address 10.10.1.
PAGE 1084
Port-channel 1, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 2 vrf2 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 419, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) VRRP for IPv6 Configuration This section shows VRRP IPv6 topology with CLI configurations.
PAGE 1085
NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be master even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address. Router 2 R2(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 R2(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#no ip address R2(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#ipv6 address 1::1/64 R2(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#vrrp-group 10 NOTE: You must configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface.
PAGE 1086
State: Backup, Priority: 100, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 11, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:0a Virtual IP address: 1::10 fe80::10 DellEMC#show vrrp tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1, IPv6 VRID: 255, Version: 3, Net: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:fd76 VRF: 0 default State: Backup, Priority: 90, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed Hold Down: 0 centise
PAGE 1087
VRF: 2 vrf2 State: Backup, Priority: 90, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 548, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1::255 fe80::255 Proxy Gateway with VRRP VLT proxy gateway solves the inefficient traffic trombone problem when VLANs are extended between date centers and when VMs are migrated between the two DCs.
PAGE 1088
● The core routers C1 and D1 in the local VLT domain are connected to the core routers C2 and D2 in the remote VLT Domain using VLT links. ● The core routers C1 and D1 in local VLT Domain along with C2 and D2 in the remote VLT Domain are part of a Layer 3 cloud. ● The core routers C1, D1, C2, D2 are in a VRRP group with the same vrrp-group ID. When a virtual machine running in Server Rack 1 migrates to Server Rack 2, L3 packets for that VM are routed through the default gateway.
PAGE 1089
unit-id 1 peer-routing interface port-channel 128 channel member ten 1/1/1 channel member ten 1/1/2 no shutdown int ten 1/5/1 port-channel-protocol lacp port-channel 10 mode active no shut int ten 1/4/1 port-channel-protocol lacp port-channel 20 mode active no shut interface port-channel 10 vlt-peer-lag po 10 switchport no shutdown interface port-channel 20 vlt-peer-lag po 20 switchport no shutdown int vlan 100 ip address 100.1.1.
PAGE 1090
interface port-channel 10 vlt-peer-lag po 10 switchport no shutdown interface port-channel 20 vlt-peer-lag po 20 switchport no shutdown int vlan 100 ip address 100.1.1.3/24 tagged port-channel 10 vrrp-group 10 advertise-interval 60 virtual-ip 100.1.1.254 priority 100 no shutdown int vlan 200 tagged port-channel 20 no shutdown router ospf 10 network 100.1.1.0/24 area 0 Sample configuration of D2: vlt domain 10 peer-link port-channel 128 back-up destination 10.16.140.
PAGE 1091
int vlan 200 tagged port-channel 20 no shutdown router ospf 10 network 100.1.1.
PAGE 1092
64 Debugging and Diagnostics This chapter describes debugging and diagnostics for the device. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • Offline Diagnostics Trace Logs Auto Save on Crash or Rollover Hardware Watchdog Timer Enabling Environmental Monitoring Buffer Tuning Troubleshooting Packet Loss Enabling Application Core Dumps Mini Core Dumps Enabling TCP Dumps Offline Diagnostics The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware.
PAGE 1093
NOTE: The system reboots when the offline diagnostics complete. This is an automatic process. The following warning message appears when you implement the offline stack-unit command: Warning - Diagnostic execution will cause stack-unit to reboot after completion of diags. Proceed with Offline-Diags [confirm yes/no]:y After the system goes offline, you must reload or run the online stack-unit stack-unit-number command for the normal operation. 2. Confirm the offline status.
PAGE 1094
--------------------------------------------------------------------------0 0 up AC up 18048 0 1 absent absent 0 -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 0 up up 19275 up 19275 0 1 up up 19275 up 19275 0 2 absent Speed in RPM The following example shows the diag command (standalone unit).
PAGE 1095
**************************** S6000 LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTICS************************** Test 1 - Board Revision Test ........................................ PASS Test 2 - Cpu Type Detect Test ....................................... PASS Test 3.000 - Psu0 Presence Test ..................................... PASS diagS6000PsuPresenceTest[1022]: ERROR: Psu:1 is not present... Test 3.001 - Psu1 Presence Test ..................................... NOT PRESENT Test 3 - Psu Presence Test ..................................
PAGE 1096
I2C Devices Scanned - 20 I2C Device PASS Count - 17 I2C Device FAIL Count - 3 Test 13 - I2c Access Test ........................................... Test 14 - RTC Presence Test ......................................... Test 15 - CPU Sdram Presence Test ................................... Test 16 - CPU Sdram Size Test ...................................... Test 17.000 - System Cpld Access Test ............................... Test 17.001 - Master Cpld Access Test ............................... Test 17.
PAGE 1097
QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 Length(OM2) 1m = 0x00 Length(OM1) 1m = 0x00 Length(Copper) 1m = 0x00 Vendor Rev = 01 Laser Wavelength = 850.
PAGE 1098
-- Temperature Limits (deg C) ----------------------------------------------------------------Minor Off Minor Major Off Major Shutdown Unit2 55 60 75 80 85 ---------------------------------------------------------------Minor Off Minor Major Off Major Shutdown Unit3 55 60 75 80 85 Troubleshoot an Over-temperature Condition To troubleshoot an over-temperature condition, use the following information. 1. Use the show environment commands to monitor the temperature levels. 2. Check air flow through the system.
PAGE 1099
Table 140. SNMP Traps and OIDs (continued) OID String OID Name Description .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.4 dellNetFpPacketBufferTable View the modular packet buffers details per stack unit and the mode of allocation. .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.5 dellNetFpStatsPerPortTable View the forwarding plane statistics containing the packet buffer usage per port per stack unit. .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.
PAGE 1100
● show hardware {ip | ipv6 | mac} {eg-acl | in-acl} stack-unit stack-unit-number port-set 0 pipeline 0-3 ● show hardware ip qos stack-unit stack-unit-number port-set 0 ● show hardware system-flow layer2 stack-unit stack-unit-number port-set 0 {counters | pipeline 0-3} ● show hardware drops interface interface ● show hardware buffer-stats-snapshot resource interface interface ● show hardware buffer inteface interface{priority-group { id | all } | queue { id| all} } buffer-info ● show hardware buffer-stats-sn
PAGE 1101
TxPurge CellErr Aged Drops --- Egress MAC counters--Egress FCS Drops --- Egress FORWARD PROCESSOR IPv4 L3UC Aged & Drops TTL Threshold Drops INVALID VLAN CNTR Drops L2MC Drops PKT Drops of ANY Conditions Hg MacUnderflow TX Err PKT Counter --- Error counters--Internal Mac Transmit Errors Unknown Opcodes Internal Mac Receive Errors : 0 : 0 : 0 Drops : 0 : 0 : 0 : 0 : 0 : 0 : 0 --- : 0 : 0 : 0 DellEMC#show hardware stack-unit 1 drops UNIT No: 1 Total Total Total Total Total Ingress Drops IngMac Drops Mmu
PAGE 1102
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 49 49 49 52 52 52 52 53 53 1102 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 23 0 0 0 24 0 0 0 25 0 0 0 26 0 0 0 27 0 0 0 28 0 0 0 29 0 0 0 30 0 0 0 31 0 0 0 32 0 0 0 33 0 0 0 34 0 0 0 35 0 0 0 36 0 0 0 37 0 0 0 38 0 0 0 39 0 0 0 40 0 0 0 4
PAGE 1103
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 53 53 54/1 54/2 54/3 54/4 Internal Internal 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 67 0 0 0 68 0 0 0 69 0 0 0 70 0 0 0 71 0 0 0 72 0 0 0 53 0 0 0 57 4659499 0 0 Dataplane Statistics The show hardware stack-unit cpu data-plane statistics command provides insight into the packet types coming to the CPU.
PAGE 1104
txPkt(COS7 ) txPkt(COS8 ) txPkt(COS9 ) txPkt(COS10) txPkt(COS11) txPkt(UNIT0) :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 Example of Viewing Party Bus Statistics DellEMC#sh hardware stack-unit 1 cpu party-bus statistics Input Statistics: 27550 packets, 2559298 bytes 0 dropped, 0 errors Output Statistics: 1649566 packets, 1935316203 bytes 0 errors Display Stack Port Statistics The show hardware stack-unit stack-port command displays input and output statistics for a stack-port interface.
PAGE 1105
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter Good Packet Counter Packet/frame Counter Unicast Packet Counter Multicast Packet Counter Broadcast Frame Counter Byte Counter Control frame counter PAUSE frame counter Oversized frame counter Jabber frame counter VLAN tag frame counter Double VLAN tag frame counter RUNT frame counter F
PAGE 1106
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - Multicast Packet Counter Broadcast Frame Counter Byte Counter Control frame counter PAUSE frame counter Oversized frame counter Jabber frame counter VLAN tag frame counter Double VLAN tag frame counter RUNT frame counter Fragment counter VLAN tagged packets 64 Byte Frame Counter 64 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter
PAGE 1107
RX - Ingress Dropped Packet RX - MTU Check Error Frame Counter RX - PFC Frame Priority 0 RX - PFC Frame Priority 1 RX - PFC Frame Priority 2 RX - PFC Frame Priority 3 RX - PFC Frame Priority 4 RX - PFC Frame Priority 5 RX - PFC Frame Priority 6 RX - PFC Frame Priority 7 RX - Debug Counter 0 RX - Debug Counter 1 RX - Debug Counter 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Enabling Application Core Dumps Application core dumps are disabled by default. A core dump file can be very large.
PAGE 1108
0035d60c : 00274f8c : 0024e2b0 : 0024dee8 : 0024d9c4 : 002522b0 : 0026a8d0 : 0026a00c : ----------------STACK TRACE END-----------------------------------FREE MEMORY--------------uvmexp.free = 0x2312 Enabling TCP Dumps A TCP dump captures CPU-bound control plane traffic to improve troubleshooting and system manageability.
PAGE 1109
65 Standards Compliance This chapter describes standards compliance for Dell EMC Networking products. NOTE: Unless noted, when a standard cited here is listed as supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS, the system also supports predecessor standards. One way to search for predecessor standards is to use the http://tools.ietf.org/ website. Click “Browse and search IETF documents,” enter an RFC number, and inspect the top of the resulting document for obsolescence citations to related RFCs.
PAGE 1110
RFC and I-D Compliance Dell EMC Networking OS supports the following standards. The standards are grouped by related protocol. The columns showing support by platform indicate which version of Dell EMC Networking OS first supports the standard. General Internet Protocols The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for general internet protocols. Table 141.
PAGE 1111
Table 141. General Internet Protocols (continued) R F C # Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 6 0 Transfer Protocol 2 4 7 4 Definition of 7.7.1 the Differentiate d Services Field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2 PPP over 61 SONET/SD 5 H 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2 6 9 8 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.
PAGE 1112
Table 142. General IPv4 Protocols (continued) RF C# Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 103 DOMAIN NAMES 5 IMPLEMENTATION AND SPECIFICATION (client) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 104 A Standard for the 2 Transmission of IP Datagrams over IEEE 802 Networks 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 1191 Path MTU Discovery 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.
PAGE 1113
Table 143. General IPv6 Protocols (continued) RFC Full Name # S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 246 2 (Par tial) IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 246 4 Transmission of IPv6 Packets over Ethernet Networks 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 267 5 IPv6 Jumbograms 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2711 IPv6 Router Alert Option 8.3.12.0 9.8(0.
PAGE 1114
Table 144. Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) (continued) RFC# Full Name SSeries/ZSeries S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048TON S6010–ON 2842 Capabilities Advertisement with BGP-4 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2858 Multiprotocol Extensions for BGP-4 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2918 Route Refresh Capability for BGP-4 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 3065 Autonomous System Confederations for BGP 7.8.1 9.
PAGE 1115
Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for IS-IS protocol. Table 146. Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) RFC# Full Name S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 1142 OSI IS-IS Intra-Domain Routing Protocol (ISO DP 10589) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 1195 Use of OSI IS-IS for Routing in TCP/IP and Dual Environments 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.
PAGE 1116
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for RIP protocol. Table 147. Routing Information Protocol (RIP) RF C# Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 105 8 Routing Information Protocol 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 245 RIP Version 3 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 4191 Default Router Preferences and More-Specific Routes 8.3.12.0 9.8(0.
PAGE 1117
Table 149. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 1156 Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP/IP-based internets 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 1157 A Simple Network Management 7.6.1 Protocol (SNMP) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 1212 Concise MIB Definitions 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.
PAGE 1118
Table 149. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name 2575 S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON View-based Access Control 7.6.1 Model (VACM) for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 2576 Coexistence Between Version 1, 7.6.1 Version 2, and Version 3 of the Internet-standard Network Management Framework 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 2578 Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2) 7.
PAGE 1119
Table 149. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 3418 Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 3434 Remote Monitoring MIB Extensions for High Capacity Alarms, High-Capacity Alarm Table (64 bits) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 3580 IEEE 802.
PAGE 1120
Table 149. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON IEEE Management Information Base 7.7.1 802.1A module for LLDP configuration, B statistics, local system data and remote systems data components. 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) IEEE The LLDP Management 802.1A Information Base extension B module for IEEE 802.1 organizationally defined discovery information. (LLDP DOT1 MIB and LLDP DOT3 MIB) 7.7.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.
PAGE 1121
Table 149. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name FORC E10-IFEXTEN SIONMIB S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON Force10 Enterprise IF Extension 7.6.1 MIB (extends the Interfaces portion of the MIB-2 (RFC 1213) by providing proprietary SNMP OIDs for other counters displayed in the "show interfaces" output) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) FORC E10LINKA GGMIB Force10 Enterprise Link Aggregation MIB 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.
PAGE 1122
Table 149. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON ALAR M-MIB MIB Location You can find Force10 MIBs under the Force10 MIBs subhead on the Documentation page of iSupport: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/KnowledgeBase/Documentation.aspx You also can obtain a list of selected MIBs and their OIDs at the following URL: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/Main/Login.aspx Some pages of iSupport require a login.
PAGE 1123
66 X.509v3 supports X.509v3 standards. Topics: • • • • • • • • • Introduction to X.509v3 certificates X.509v3 support in Information about installing CA certificates Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) Information about installing trusted certificates Transport layer security (TLS) Online Certificate Status Protocol (OSCP) Verifying certificates Event logging Introduction to X.509v3 certificates X.
PAGE 1124
Advantages of X.509v3 certificates Public key authentication is preferred over password-based authentication, although both may be used in conjunction, for various reasons. Public-key authentication provides the following advantages over normal password-based authentication: ● Public-key authentication avoids the human problems of low-entropy password selection and provides more resistance to brute-force attacks than password-based authentication.
PAGE 1125
The other hosts on the network, such as the SUT switch, syslog server, and OCSP server, generate private keys and create Certificate Signing Requests (CSRs). The hosts then upload the CSRs to the Intermediate CA or make the CSRs available for the Intermediate CA to download. generates a CSR using the crypto cert generate request command. The hosts on the network (SUT, syslog, OCSP…) also download and install the CA certificates from the Root and Intermediate CAs.
PAGE 1126
After the CA certificate is installed, the system can secure communications with TLS servers by verifying certificates that are signed by the CA. Installing CA certificate To install a CA certificate, enter the crypto ca-cert install {path} command in Global Configuration mode. Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) Certificate Signing Request (CSR) enables a device to get a X.509v3 certificate from a CA. In order for a device to get a X.
PAGE 1127
● ● ● ● ● ● Organization Unit Name Common Name Email address Validity Length Alternate Name NOTE: The command contains multiple options with the Common Name being a required field and blanks being filled in for unspecified fields. Information about installing trusted certificates Dell EMC Networking OS also enables you to install a trusted certificate. The system can then present this certificate for authentication to clients such as SSH and HTTPS.
PAGE 1128
When not operating in FIPS mode, the system may support TLS 1.0 up to 1.2, and older ciphers and hashes: TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS compression is disabled by default.
PAGE 1129
Configuring OCSP behavior You can configure how the OCSP requests and responses are signed when the CA or the device contacts the OCSP responders. To configure this behavior, follow this step: In CONFIGURATION mode, enter the following command: crypto x509 ocsp {[nonce] [sign-request]} Both the none and sign-request parameters are optional. The default behavior is to not use these two options.
PAGE 1130
Verifying Client Certificates Verifying client certificates is optional in the TLS protocol and is not explicitly required by Common Criteria. However, TLS-protected Syslog and RADIUS protocols mandate that certificate-based mutual authentication be performed. Event logging The system logs the following events: ● ● ● ● ● A CA certificate is installed or deleted. A self-signed certificate and private key are generated. An existing host certificate, a private key, or both are deleted.